Posts Tagged ‘UFO Cult’

TI and DO The Father and “Jesus” Heaven’s Gate UFO Two Witnesses – Cover, Overview, TOC and Section I.

January 26, 2017

752034-ti-do-father-jesus-heavens-gate-ufo-two-witnesses-front-cover

 This “Little Book” Provides the “Backside” Evidence Showing How All Jesus’ Prophecy Revelations are Fulfilled By Those Who were Known as:

TI & DO
The Father and “Jesus” Heaven’s Gate
UFO Two Witnesses

Who Returned Incarnate With Their “Saints”
From 1972 to 1997
Prophesied in the Book of Revelations

Termed by Christians as
“The Second Coming”

From
The Physical “Evolutionary” Level Above Human
The Kingdom of God in Heaven

Whose Membership: “Wear” Physical Vehicles (Bodies),
Grown on a Vine
(That Human bodies are Designed to Resemble)

To Work Within Planet Sized Spacecrafts
Like Pluto and Ceres
That Serve as Laboratories for Their Earth
Soul-Growing “Garden” Experiments

That Incorporate the Negative Influence of
The Luciferian “Space” Aliens, aka “The Fallen Angels” So
Prospective New Members, Directed By Incarnate Older Members
May Overcome the Human “Evolutionary” Kingdom

To Graduate Into the
Next Level Kingdom In the Literal Heavens

SAWYER


© 2017 Sawyer. All rights reserved.

This book is protected by Common Law copyright. Permission is
hereby granted to reproduce this book, or portions thereof, as
long as the content is unchanged, i.e., nothing added to it or
taken away from it as long as it is for non-commercial purposes.

Scripture taken from the King James Version of the Bible.

Translations of Scripture taken from the Strongs Hebrew and Greek Dictionary


This “Little Book” provides detailed evidence from everything Jesus prophesied to show how and why those called, Ti (Tee) and Do (Doe) were the new incarnations of the Ones referred to as the Father and Jesus, who with Their Crew of Student “Saints,” were on earth again to fulfill the promised return of Their Kingdom during these “End Times,” through Their task recorded as the “Two Witnesses” in the Book of Revelations that was completed when they exited their incarnations in 1997 – seen in the world’s news as Heaven’s Gate.

Here is a tiny bit of the evidence of Their return that will be covered in these next pages in great detail, examining most every verse from the Book of Revelations, in context with both the Old and New Testaments and in consideration of the many translation options from the Hebrew, Aramaic and Greek and most importantly in how TI and DO’s teachings, behaviors, ways and lifestyle coincided, without Their trying to do so, as I, Sawyer witnessed as Their student for 19 years.

-Father and Son both reside, (dwell with, abode) with Their Students. (Joh 14:22-23)
-They both have new names and the One who was “Jesus” identifies His Father. (Rev 3:12, Rev 14:1)
-They come incarnate in the task of the Two Witnesses to speak publicly (prophesy) New Revealing about the reality of Their Kingdom, how and when it can be entered, that serves to gather Their returned “Saints,” the Souls who were their students with Jesus and Moses. (Luk 17:30, Mat 24:31).
-The Father incarnates into a female human body and “Mind/Spirit births” His Son to the Throne. (Rev 12)
-They are both Olive Trees, Lampstands, and are Anointed so are both Christs. (Rev 11:3-4, Zec 4:1-14)
-They speak plainly, (open, bold, confident), not in parables (Luk 12:2) and Students can ask the Father questions directly. (Joh 16:25-27)
-Their prophecy is focused in the West and Southwest U.S.A., described as the spiritual (symbolic) Sodom (scorched, desert) e.g. Las Vegas, Egypt (“two straights” (Streets, Ways (FIRST & LAST)) and New Jerusalem; California (Los Angeles) to Texas, (Rev 3:12), to a “new nation (people)” (Mat 21:42-43), leaving Jerusalem in Palestine/Israel “desolate” (empty of Their Updated Mind/Spirit – Presence). (Rev 11:8, Mat 23:37-39)
-In 1975 They are subdued (overcome) by the U.S. national media, mouthpiece of the “Beast” – the Secret Govt (Mystery Babylon) formed because of the release of the Luciferian Space Aliens from their “bottomless pit” prison in the 1940’s to 1950’s during the 5th Angels Trumpet Sounding. (Rev 9, 11:7, 12:4, 17)
-The Father’s incarnation Exit was seemingly “natural”-“Earth Opened Her Mouth.” in 1985. Do and Students Exited by laying (falling) down Their human bodies in 1997, shown by the comprehensive translation of the Greek “apokteino auto” as “to separate by dying Their selves.” (Rev 11:7,16, Rev 12:16)
-Their ascension, Jesus called a “spirit birth,” compared to wind, not seen as physical bodies going up. The “cloud” (of light) was the Hale-Bopp Comet with it’s photographed “companion object.” (Rev 11:12, Joh 3:5-8)
-Do Comes Public as the return of “Jesus” in 1993, shown as sitting on a “white horse,” the human body He took named Marshall Applewhite, which He purifies to Recover Virginity. “Bow” represents the Covenant (rainbow) with the “litter/fold” He “births” by directing each Students own Overcoming of Humanness. (Rev 6:2)
-The Red/Ruddy “Horse” – G.W. Bush, et al, used the 9/11 WTC attacks – the “great earth(shaking)” (1st Fall of “Babylon”) to wield a great sword (military) for a perpetual “war on terror.” (Rev 6:3-4, 11:13, 14:8)
-Barack Obama, et al, was the Black/Deep Blue (jacinth) “Horse” presiding over the stabilizing of the Global Financial Crisis (2nd Fall of “Babylon”) manufactured to usher in the U.S. BEAST’s riding the yolk of the New World Order (U.N.) (Rev 6:5-6, Rev 13, 14:8, 18:2)
-Sign of Opening of Temple of God in Heaven revealed by NASA Dawn spacecraft photos of dwarf planet Ceres’ cityscape of lights with 5+ mile high crystal-like Tower as evidence of 2017 4th Seal Opening: Green (Space Alien tare (weed) harvest, NWO front promotion of human caused global warming) Horse (US President) agenda, accelerating death in Tribulation/Judgment Hour = LAST Harvest Wave (Rev 6:8, 11:19, 14:20, 15:5)
-Luciferian (restricted Space) Aliens are depicted as fowls, birds of prey, locusts(Mat 13:4;Rev 9:3,18:2, 19:17)
-Afterward, Do returns with His “Armada” of brightly shining (glorious) Clouds of Light – “horses” (spacecrafts) for every eye to see, with His FIRST Fruit Graduate (Saints) all “wearing” Their new Kingdom of God “made” (grown to an adult on a vine, not born of woman) physical, biological bodies, with His being “like the Son of Man,” Jesus’ “dipped in blood body (vesture).”(Rev 1:7,11:19,14:14,16:15,19:11-14, 1Co 15:39+)


Overview

Evidence of these claims come from everything Jesus said in the four “gospel” records and throughout the Book of Revelations, cross referenced to the Moses and Old Testament (OT) Prophet’s records, to reveal how and why TI and DO fulfilled the task described as the “Two Witnesses,” Two Christs, the same Ones described as The Father in Heaven and His Son, (the One who came incarnate in the body named Jesus), returning this time, together, incarnate (in the flesh) as partners for the FIRST of a two WAVE “Harvest” conclusion of the experimental task They both began as recorded in the Book of Genesis as the Elohim and Adam and Enoch and then in the other OT records as Jehovah and Moses and Elijah.

It will be shown how and why these Two Witnesses were prophesied by Jesus to have New Names for Their New, “in-the-flesh” Return, (that has been called Jesus’ “Second Coming”), to occur during the New Age, aka End Time, in a New geographical area (not to the Middle East/Israel), as a New Nation, (ethnic populous), described as the New Jerusalem (also having a New Name).

The New geographic area will be shown to be primarily in the Western U.S. from the Mississippi river to the Pacific, as the “Temple” area, where the FIRST Harvest WAVE is staged. The Southwest became the “Altar” area. Elder Students (Saints) gave their physical vehicle’s lives, they’d received from giving their human lives in service to Jesus, by intentionally crashing primitive spacecrafts, called “UFOs” to release their Souls to incarnate into prepared human vehicles to rendezvous with their teachers to finish their Overcoming of humanness lessons.

It will be shown that; what these two individuals named TI and DO taught, was exactly what Jesus, and before then Moses were teaching and demonstrating, (appropriate to Their student body’s grade in Their school), but as with Jesus, brought updates and used new plain and direct generic, (non-religious) terminology, rather than speaking to most people in parables with hidden meanings. This was necessary due to the way the Lower Forces of the planet, headed by the Luciferian Space Alien Souls (fallen Angels) were permitted by the Kingdom in the Heavens to distort and dilute the truth Jesus (and before then, Moses) bore, by sowing seeds of misinformation that became organized into Religions and to date New Age Spirituality. These distortions were allowed to provide all humans 100% choice of what they want to become and in who they choose to serve, as Jesus said was between, “God (The Kingdom of God’s Older Members (Deities)) and Mammon (treasure, wealth in all the Human forms). One of many misconceptions is that the Kingdom of God is a Spiritual realm. It is but is also physical and biological, just like throughout Their creation.

Some of the generic terminology TI and DO used, described the Kingdom of God or Kingdom of Heaven as The Physical Evolutionary Kingdom Level Above Human, whose membership are not limited to any one planet. Membership have true freedom to circulate throughout the literal “heavens” (near or outer space) to perform their tasks. (Like Star Trek without human mammalian behaviors they have outgrown). The use of the term “Evolution” has nothing to do with Darwin’s theories, but instead describes the way there exists four kingdom levels of life on earth; mineral, plant, animal and human. The human kingdom was designed to be a stepping stone (footstool) to deposit Souls (that are like seeds) within and then to nurture them to grow towards taking their Next Evolutionary Step into what They termed in shorthand as the Next Level.

TI and DO indicated that Next Level members dwell within Spacecrafts, (even Planet Sized like Pluto, (and perhaps Saturn and/or Earth’s Moon and/or dwarf planet Ceres and others), that serve as Laboratories for Their “Soul” growing Earth “Garden” experimental, (always improving and free willed), experiential “God Astronaut Training Program,” They design into Earth Civilizations They spawn and nurture to graduate new Members from, (as they have outgrown mammalian reproduction and are eternal so don’t need new members but are joyed to provide what they have). They are from the future, the only one a human or human equivalent can attain to.

A big difference between the human and the other kingdom levels beneath it, is how a human does not automatically evolve into their next higher kingdom. It can only be accomplished with the direct assistance from  an existing Older Member from the Next Level Above Human, who has accomplished the transition before, even many times, who comes into human flesh, thus “undercover,” to teach and demonstrate the Overcoming of Humanness Process in stages, that are like “trimesters” in a human baby’s birth, over millenniums of time.

It is the Soul that is as a physical seed containing biological “programs”, like software that is deposited (planted) into a human vehicle (the biological body – genetic hardware) that can be grown into a Next Level Member. TI and DO taught that the Next Level was many membered and referred to them as; Older Members (Jesus described as his Father in Heaven (who wasn’t incarnate then)) and Younger Members like Archangels and those coming up who are provided degrees of service, while the Oldest Member they called the Chief of Chiefs.

TI and DO taught that Souls were actually physical containers, like a pillow case or pocket, though less dense than the human flesh containers they are deposited within and it’s that Soul, if grown to maturity, that becomes a body that is graduated (harvested) into the Next Level and is eternal thereafter. New graduate Souls are then provided with a more dense physical body (a vehicle to wear) appropriate to their new task assignments in their new Above Human Society. These new vehicles are grown on a vine in a laboratory by technicians, said in the Records (Bible) as “made” as opposed to “begotten” – born from mammalian reproductive methods.

It will be shown how Paul of Tarsus became one of the Luciferian’s “best puppets.” Paul was never a disciple of Jesus and was the first Christian preachers used as a pawn to distort the formula Jesus taught and became Satan’s best agent by having him infiltrate the young believers of the Jesus “cult.” It’s not clear whether Paul was well meaning or a Roman agent but his main “blasphemy” (expressing to others things that are against the Next Level’s true information) was saying that no one needs to change significantly to qualify to enter the Kingdom of Heaven but can be saved and enter Heaven by only having faith. Paul did not have an assigned task from Jesus and never quoted him or taught much of what he taught. His letters were influenced by the Luciferian Lower Forces, so can not be trusted and ended up being used to dilute and distort the truth, largely seen as today’s Christianity.

This book will attempt to reveal how in the past, religions and the modern definition of spirituality can be  stepping stones to the whole truth about how to become a member of the Kingdom of Heaven, but only when one begins to see through the ways organizations stifle open minded exploration of new ideas, concepts and perspectives, even on ancient records, can they remain open to what the Older Members say when they come incarnate to look for their “sheep”. Such belief systems today have become “killers of Souls,” due to their promotion of stagnated thinking, archaic concepts, ritualistic practices, less accurate or wrong definition of terms (often lost in translations), changing what was meant to be taken as literal into a figurative or “spiritual,” then diluted meaning and the soothing, even addicting affect that goes with feeling we belong to something higher than humans. If we become teachers in various religions we become easily captured to those mindsets and especially when it becomes popular. Do indicated that people “hardly stood a chance” of seeing the truth through the varied misinterpretations of scripture and those who portray themselves as teachers, guides and facilitators to Godliness.

Likewise, it will be shown how Atheism and any other human belief, non-belief, philosophy, path, practice or scientific study can also be used as steps towards the ultimate perspective of what is most true and thus most real about our reality as a Next Level school. TI and DO said it best as, “All paths can lead to the top of the mountain, but there is only one way off.” In other words to paraphrase Jesus, the way to the highest truths and the Life he spoke of, will only come to those who ask to find, seek to know and knock on the doors of the Living Beings who Created everything, all the planets and all the life forms, whose “kingdom” is not of this world, but who exist throughout the literal Heavens. Becoming a member of the Next Level was always meant to be an individual endeavor. Being part of a group that refers to themselves as on a path to God has nothing to do with the relationship each could choose to form and maintain with an Older Member in the Next Level by projecting their asking far into the most distant stars (heavens) to ask how to become a prospective candidate for Membership. This is what Jesus meant by teaching to address the Father in Heaven with our prayers. “Heaven” is defined to include all the elevated areas above the earth, but especially where the planets and stars are seen and any and all points beyond.

It will be shown how the overall Return of the Next Level Kingdom was scheduled in Two Primary Harvest WAVES, the FIRST and the LAST:

The FIRST was presented when the Two Returning Older Members awakened their chosen and prepared human vehicles (bodies) in the early 1970’s and then unknowingly began their 1260 day prophecy period in 1973, but attracted almost all their first students when they were invited to speak in the North Hollywood part of Los Angeles, California starting in March/April of 1975, that resulted in subsequent public meetings in the San Francisco Bay area and then in Waldport, Oregon, which was the meeting I, named by Do, Sawyer attended and joined from.

It was October of 1975 when TI and DO, then going by the names Bo and Peep were propelled into the U.S. national, “town square” like spotlight, covered by all three network news stations, because 34 individuals left all behind after hearing Bo and Peep’s information at the Waldport, Oregon meeting. At that meeting TI and DO spoke of needing to leave all behind to begin to overcome the human world, that is like that start of a metamorphosis of a caterpillar into a butterfly. The caterpillar must leave it’s world behind to begin it’s chrysalis stage. The chrysalis was equivalent to a Christening or Christing that Jesus completed by the time of his Transfiguration. After Jesus voluntarily set up his capture, knowing the corrupt religious leadership wanted to kill him, he “layed down his body” on his Father’s instruction, saying “no man takes it from me” (his human vehicles life). Then he healed that body over 3 days time, a characteristic of what he had metamorphosed into inside his human vehicle. He proceeded to prove to his disciples he was still flesh and bone, and was NOT a SPIRIT and could eat and drink and be touched, but could also appear and disappear and defy gravity at will, a characteristic of the “changed over” vehicle he had. After proving these things and many more to them for about 40 days, he took his changed over physical body with him into a “cloud” that humans today might call a UFO, but is actually in this case a cloud (covered) physical spacecraft.

TI and DO’s speaking (prophecy) period of 1260 days was geared primarily to the Souls who had completed their previous trimester of Overcoming of Humanness Lesson Plan, they began while in the flesh with Jesus and for some before then with Moses. It will be shown how these Souls were spoken of primarily as the Four Living Beings and the Four and Twenty Elders and I suspect the two groups referred to as 7 Angels each, equaling 42 who became the FIRST “Fruit” Harvested, the number of members of the Heaven’s Gate group, (38 + 4).

Every harvest requires “leaps of faith” (so to speak, though they are not at all “blind”, though appear to be for those who don’t recognize their calling). For Jesus’ Apostles (at least, but perhaps for the 70 as well) they could have left behind family, houses and land to literally follow Jesus, which is one Edge of the Two Edged Instruction that becomes like a sword in how it cuts ties, and this is what was referred to as the “catching away”, actually being “caught” (like a fish), where the truth is the bait to catch the human vehicle by, as Jesus said to his first disciples he would make them “fishers of men”. This part of the Overcoming of Humanness Process was distorted into the idea of “rapture”. TI and DO had the same requirement of those who chose to become their students.

Jesus, at his exit time, required his faithful Apostles (an assigned task to be His delegates to the world) to “give their life” in service to His (their Older Member’s) instructions that would result in their Souls exit of their incarnation –  the death of their human vehicle. For Jesus and His Apostles and other fully dedicated Students (Disciples), that meant speaking publically the truth Jesus provided which He knew would get them killed eventually. (As he said, if they hate me they will hate you). So He sent them to their human death but He knew their Soul would not be harmed and would enter into LIFE in the Next Level where they would be rewarded with a new Next Level vehicle, grown especially for each one of them. (The Next Level grows physical vehicles to full maturity on a vine, as mammalian reproduction is primitive to them and is the reason that desire for sexuality and procreation on the human level needs to be overcome as part of the qualifications for Next Level membership). For these 38+4 students with Do, after years of consideration (I witnessed the preparation for until September of 1994 when I left them), though they preferred to not need to do this, chose to exit their incarnations by ingesting a strong barbiturate mixture that put their vehicles into permanent sleep in what the world would see as a mass suicide. They were at that time referred to as Heaven’s Gate so the headlines read with phrases like “Heaven’s Gate Suicide cult”. This is NOT to say “suicide” is the answer for anyone, as we each actually can not grow unless we have a physical body. Suicide on the human level is most often a selfish act and a way to avoid learning difficult lessons in life. This LAST harvest WAVE comes with the overall instruction to Stand for TI and DO, which will not be looked at kindly by those who are invested in misinformation.

Do certainly knew he and Ti’s group was a “subculture” and in response to being labeled a cult by the media said they were the “cult of truth” and the “cult of cults.” It will be shown that Jesus and his disciples were just as much a “cult” in their day, in relationship to what had become the “normal” cultures of the mainstream religious, the governmental institutions and that society, that Jesus and TI and DO had no allegiance to, though also didn’t choose to fight against.

TI and DO’s information is shown to align with the prophecy as delivered via the Seven Thunders (Roars) by the Lion of the Tribe of Juda, the Seventh of which started when Do and his Crew compiled a Book they named, ‘How and When “Heaven’s Gate” (The Door to the Physical Kingdom Level Above Human) May Be Entered’ (Purple Book). This Book that became the basis of their web site HeavensGate.com along with Their Exit Statements demonstrated the conclusion to the FIRST Hour shown in prophecy as the 1st Seal Opening – with Do “sitting” on His White “Horse” – the human vehicle He chose, that had even been last named “Applewhite”. White, mostly had to do with making that vehicle “pure”, though the vehicle’s skin coloration is described in prophecy as, “His head and his hairs were white like wool, as white as snow”. All racial consciousness, identifying oneself by their vehicles race, needs to be overcome to graduate into Membership in the Next Level.

The LAST “Harvest” WAVE pertains most to those recorded as the “remaining,” “remnant” or those “elected” and who elect to take their next step towards graduation when they get the calling. These are also Souls who were brought back by the Next Level to have the opportunity to take over a human vehicle the Next Level helped them prepare, to recognize their Heavenly Father in the incarnation named Do. That recognition would be of His teachings –  the words and information He and Ti provided that constitute His (Holy) Mind aka Spirit and His characteristic behaviors and ways that He demonstrated while incarnate that required of his Students the same showing of allegiance to Him as Jesus required of those who chose to become His students. These will be faced with the lesson plan (song), that at the least entails believing TI and DO represent that Kingdom that created the earth and all of it’s occupants and are willing to stand in defense of that belief and maintain that stand until their departure – no matter what the consequences. This “standing” takes place primarily during what was prophesied as the “Time of great trouble not seen since the beginning of the world,” aka the Great Tribulation, starting largely during the 4th thru 6th Seal Openings that are upon us in 2017.

This time period has also been referred to in OT prophecy as the Judgment time period (day) or more specifically the Judgment Hour (approx. 40 years) that begins at the end of the FIRST Hour after Do and Crew exited in 1997, shown as beginning with the time of the 7th Angel’s Trumpet Sounding.

That Sounding first took place by Do’s coming public (without Ti’s incarnate presence) in the 1990’s by what can be seen as the “7 Thunders/Roars” of Revelations 10, the first of which started when He, with His Older Member – Ti, came public in 1975, that Do completed in 1988 by writing a booklet entitled “’88 Update – The UFO Two and their Crew.” (To TI and DO the acronym UFO simply referred to a “cloud of light” – a Next Level spacecraft hidden by a cloud covering as opposed to being a Space Alien craft). Subsequent Roars/Thunders are shown as; the 1992 Beyond Human Video Tape Series Do and Crew made, the 1993 Info-Ad in USA Today, then the dozens of publications in alternative newspapers, the 1994 Student delivered public meeting schedule (as Do didn’t give any further public meetings himself after doing so with Ti from 1975-1976), the 1995 posting to the World Wide Web the document ‘Undercover “Jesus” Surfaces Before Departure,’ where Do outlines most boldly how he was the return of the same Older Member who had been incarnate in the body named, “Jesus”. Jesus  knew he wouldn’t be returning incarnate in the same human vehicle he left with, which is why he said, “many shall come in my name, saying, I am Christ; and shall deceive many” and finally in two phases of soundings, the 7th as the Heavens Gate Web site that provided an anthology of all their materials since 1975 followed less than a year later in the timing of the Hale Bopp Comet’s very unusual display, scientists are still pondering, Their exit of  their incarnations in 1997 and the Exit Statements They made.

As with all prophecy there are multiple interpretations and multiple manifestations in both the physical and mental/spiritual realms. Pertaining to things humans did, as I believe was set up by a Next Level crew to provide, came the 2009 National Geographic Channel’s internet broadcast documentary entitled, “Final Report: Heaven’s Gate” that was primarily a recap of the media frenzy and misinformation from their very public “laying down of their (human) lives”, except for suggesting as a question whether they, identified as “Heaven’s Gate” (TI and DO and Crew), were the anticipated “Second Coming of Jesus,” perhaps the first and biggest national media organization to voice such a perspective.

This time in 2017, as a part of this LAST “harvest” WAVE, includes what I believe is this “Little Book” that is also described in Rev 5:1 prophecy as the “backside” or “after” and/or the historic background “behind” (what was provided by Jehovah/Father and Moses/Jesus). The BOOK comprises the updates TI and DO and crew brought that they had published that I refer to as the Purple Book, as it’s said in prophecy to be “written from within the Throne” and TI and DO were the Throne. (Most of the Purple Books contents can be found via links in the Appendix of this book).

This Little Book was said to become available and spoken about (prophesied) during the time of the 7th Angel’s Trumpet Sounding that was scheduled to occur after the Two Witnesses and Crew have exited their incarnations and their Soul bodies invisibly ascended back into their heavenly abodes on Next Level Spacecrafts, from whence they came. It will be shown how the Two Witnesses and Crew perform all their incarnate tasks during the time described as the Sixth Angel’s Trumpet Sounding.

Part of the Tribulation time will be marked by a great deal of shows put on by the Luciferian space aliens and/or those humans who have become their witting or unwitting slaves. Examples will be provided of how these show humans things recorded as “great wonders” to witness. A preview would seem to be what happened in Fatima where some young girls all saw an Image on a number of occasions that spoke to their minds, who they thought was the Virgin Mary, which was recorded as Our Lady at Fatima in 1916. TI and DO talked about this and called these kinds of things tricks and indicated they were like holograms produced by the Lower Forces.

Further it will be covered, how the Revelations chapter 13 “Image” that “speaks” could be just such a hologram or of some equivalence and could deceive many because of. Perhaps it will be of Jesus according to some painters depiction, with flowing robes, barefoot and/or riding a white horse. It’s interesting how Fatima’s sighting and others like it occurred during a time when we know humans did not have the technology to produce holograms and by my calculations 1916 was during the 2nd Angel’s Trumpet Sounding. Those Soundings purpose was essentially to announce the arrival of the participating Souls for the Harvest WAVESs, both from the Next Level and of the Luciferians and also announced things to come but were accompanied by examples (like Fatima) of how those things in the prophecy would be fulfilled during the 7th Trumpet Sounding.

While with TI and DO’s experiential classroom we saw a report from a book Bob Lazar was allowed to read while he was employed by Oppenheimer in Area 51, his job being to back engineer the engine from a recovered “UFO”. In the book that allegedly space aliens wrote, they said they “created Jesus” and have film of him on the cross. Even if there is no truth to any of this, it is not uncommon to hear from various “contactees” the same kind of thing in relationship to Jesus, where even a number of contactees themselves say, indicate or imply they are the return of Jesus, which coordinates with what Jesus said would happen with his Kingdom’s Return.

However, Jesus indicated his true believers would be shown signs in the Sun, Moon and Stars (which includes the planets) and any of the many bodies in space, e.g. dwarf planets, asteroids, meteors, comets. This is one of the ways we know such holographic like tricks are not generated by the Next Level as they occur on earth or in earth’s atmosphere or very near to earth “space,” where the Space Aliens are no longer allowed to traverse beyond. Next Level Signs occur in deep space, yet as close as the Moon. The space aliens and/or humans are also able to perform other events such as making “fire come down from the sky,” perhaps like fireballs the Next Level used before 2016. I’ve seen two or three so far that may be these kinds of tricks as based on reports are near the earth. Jesus indicated on earth one would see “distress of nations” (wars and financial collapse), “perplexity, a (state of) quandary (many events that are confusing rendered into conspiracy theories to explain, UFO’s and Space Alien abductions, Cattle mutilations, JFK, RFK, MLK assassinations, 9/11 attacks, war in iraq, 2008 financial crisis) and “waves roaring,” seen by the two large tsunami’s in Sumatra and Japan (Fukashima) and in the U.S. by hurricane Katrina and Sandy during the time approaching the 2017 tribulation time, “earthquakes in diverse places” (significant increase around the Pacific rim known as the “ring of fire.”  (Note these Signs have been shown around the world and in the U.S. essentially starting in earnest in the 1890’s, ahead of the FIRST WAVE of Jesus and His Father’s Kingdom, but then began to escalate in the 1990’s for DO’s coming Public as the return of the same Older Member Soul from the Kingdom of Heaven that was incarnate in the human vehicle named “Jesus” that began the SECOND or LAST WAVE that would be finished by his RETURN IN HIS GLORY – not incarnate, to finalize the Judgement Hour.)

The Luciferian Space Aliens have manipulated humans from the start of the civilization, largely recorded in religious literature but more directly, according to reports, especially as of the 1940’s and 1950’s, through direct contact with government military and indirectly through contactees with displays of technology, they seek help from humans to develop and in perhaps the biggest way, by motivating discarnates (spirits of dead humans) to influence living humans to do things and/or respond in all ways that replaces their recognition of the Real True Kingdom Above Human and those who have been sent time and again to help some see through the illusion they pose. These Luciferians thereby insert themselves as a facsimili “god” – aka False God built upon misinformation.

It will be shown how “The Wrath of God,” actually the Next Level’s generation of “agitation to stimulate movement” of allegiance towards the true Kingdom of God and any potential future, that includes the Next Level’s “anger” against the Luciferian Space aliens who have used human, so called Christian religious leaders as puppets to foster an illusionary belief of having a “personal relationship” with Jesus, extends into the 6th and 7th Seal periods, having been demonstrated in comparably small degrees periodically up until this point. That agitation and anger is largely seen in the 7 Angels who pour out their Vials, (plagues and calamities) beginning to manifest undiluted during the 6th Seal Opening.

It will be shown how at the end of that conclusive time of Judgment, when the opportunities to change are “done,” Do will arrive in His Next Level made physical body, described as, “like the Son of Man,” (Rev 14:14), thus like Jesus’ “dipped (baptized) in blood,” “glorified body,” returning this LAST time with his Armada of spacecrafts, piloted by those “Saints” who FIRST graduated, having their own new Next Level grown physical bodies to “wear.” This time their appearance will be more literally “For Every Eye to See,” because of their very apparent mass of spacecrafts and their brightness of light in the very near heavens so humans will be able to see/understand even with their naked eye and I imagine even for those who no eyes at all. I would say they will see it in their Mind’s eye. However, if humans have not sought to align with TI and DO’s Mind by this time, they will not know what they are observing.

Before Do and his Armada returns, the “Kings of the Earth,” led by the U.S. Secret Government (Mystery Babylon), BEAST (sly, deceitful human mammals), that formed in the 1950’s to cover up the evidence of Space Aliens on earth, (who the Next Level released from their underground “bottomless pit” prison), working to some degree with or against certain space alien groups (Dragon), each would have secured the establishment of their New World Order relationship via having the equivalent of the 9/11 attacks on the NYC World Trade Center and Pentagon and the conspiracy to program humans as responsible for Global Warming (that prophecy indicates is Next Level generated) and through the Global Financial Crisis “hid themselves in the dens and rocks” (Rev 6:15) while preparing to fight, or escape the earth to escape this Armada and it’s final judgment against them, that many will think are the “bad space aliens”.

Some in that Secret Governmental BEAST seem to believe that there are some Space Aliens who are “good” and that the ones they believe are coming to do them harm are the “bad aliens,” even Reptilians with slave greys, when the truth is that all the Space Aliens are related to Lucifer and his Associate Souls, who once had elementary (student level) service to the Next Level but fell away and became renegades against the Next Level and will try to steer humans in any direction but looking up to the Next Level. I suspect they themselves at this point believe those I am referring to as the Next Level are just another alien space race as they were/are. However, the Space Aliens are all human equivalents. None of them became Adult Members of the Next Level Above Human.

These Luciferians, once imprisoned under the earth, who initially had physical bodies that could live much longer than humans have ways of generating hybrid physical bodies from human DNA, eggs and sperm, they obtain from abductions. When the Next Level allowed them to circulate on the surface again, they sought to manipulate powerful humans to enact their agenda to escape the planet while capturing Souls to add to their ranks, which they hope can occur before an anticipated return to prison and subsequent recycling in the “Lake of Fire” thereafter.

The irony is that TI and DO’s Next Level Mothership and Armada are the only ones arriving from deep space to war against the BEASTS and the Luciferian Space Aliens and all those in their allegiance, which will be no contest at all but will result in Their casting these two Beasts (U.S. and E.U.) and the False Prophets (The religious leadership and perhaps especially the Vatican and LDS Mormon enclaves, etc.) and those in their allegiance into the Lake of Fire because they have become “weeds” in the Next Level’s “garden” and have disturbed the usefulness of Their human kingdom and Their earth’s production of “fruit” (new Membership). It is at that point the Luciferians will be re-locked up underground for 1000 years and it seems there might be a new stage of “overcoming classroom” to follow that 1000 year period, after the Luciferians are released for a time to wage another last battle against that “camp of the Saints.” At that time the Next Level will cast the Luciferians into the Lake of Fire to be with the Beasts and the False Prophets. This is followed by the judgment of those in the Book of Life and those who are not who are in the receptacles for the discarnate Spirits, referred to as “Death and Hell” who are also cast into the Lake of Fire.

TI and DO brought the “new song” as described in Revelations chapter 14. Although in part They took those names from the Sound of Music song, “Doe a deer”, they described their names as a octave apart where Ti pushed Do to his next octave, if I recall correctly. According to prophecy the Older Member who was incarnate in the vehicle named Jesus upon return would, “write upon him (each student/disciple) the name of my God (Deity),” (Rev 3:12) and in Joh 16:25 “…but I shall shew ((announce, make known, report, speak, tell, declare)) you plainly of the Father.” In other words it was Do who revealed who His “Father” (Older Member) was to the student body. Ti didn’t announce it. In fact Do had to learn it for himself in their first year or so of their awakening together to their task, by seeing how Ti’s choices were always better than his which was hard for him to accept, he said. And it was Ti who told their students who Do was as “our Father” (Older Member) and that we each needed to make our “committal” to Him. And it was Ti who said in 1977 or 1978 that we the students “needed to give them our will, which Do later told us, she wondered if we’d lose half the class by saying that. As it turned out over half those initial student did drop out thereafter, for one reason or another that amounted to not wanting to yield their will 100%. Therefore TI and DO were one another’s “Witness” as said in Luk 10:22.

TI and DO didn’t teach from the Bible, nor quoted chapter and verse that I heard in my nineteen years their student, yet had an uncanny, thorough, direct to the point, non-academic, base understanding of it’s core contents, that I only came to recognize mostly after I left their “classroom” in 1994 and began to study the scriptural records that with a lot of asking of TI and DO for help and encouragement via dreams they were in, led to the focus for this book. Some of these understandings only surface when considering alternative translations to English from the Hebrew, Aramaic, Greek and sometimes Latin origins. TI and DO said the Next Level worked very hard to preserve an accurate record of what Jesus said, as recorded in the four gospels, that years ago humans published as “Red Letter” editions, that we could rely on as a help to awaken more by and to draw clues from. This is not to say I got everything in this book the most right it could be. I know much could still be tweaked and realized but I think it’s adequate to show the possibilities to anyone who seeks for the whole truth. I don’t pretend this work is needed by anyone to have a relationship with the Next Level. TI and DO taught that there would be a group of people who would never hear about TI and DO and still be judged worthy of having their Souls and/or Spirits saved by the Next Level for a future “planting” some time after the recycling is finished.

The Next Level doesn’t need new members but it’s their joy to offer the opportunity to Consciously Evolve Beyond Human. That opportunity is still available by projecting our asking to Our “Father” in Heaven (deep outer space) and by showing Him our seriousness by beginning to adopt his behavior and ways and provision of service, according to the instructions of his most resent incarnate, Older Members, in the names TI and DO.

There is not and will not be any legitimate group or cult to form or join. There are no Older Members on Earth at this time or planned to be back before the Civilization is spaded. The information TI and DO and Crew left behind in the many writings, video’s and audio tapes are for personal absorption and application and are not intended by Do and Crew to become the basis of a “Religious Study Group”. They are to be used to help each of those who the information speaks to, further separate from the human evolutionary kingdom, though the speed in which that happens remains up to each of us to implement and the best way to start that is to speak directly to Do (in our heads, privately, as Jesus said, “in your closet”, never intending group prayer meetings, etc. which are part of the distortion in religions, however well intended.) Though I am told by some they believe in TI and DO, I keep no lists or contact information on people and have no “groups” and provide no contact information with any former classmates. However there have been start-up groups and attempts to organize that I have been invited to and have declined. There have also been complete fraudulent news stories about TI and DO.


*** TABLE OF CONTENTS ***

I. INTRODUCTION
A. ADDITIONAL STATEMENTS THIS BOOK WILL BRING AN ABUNDANCE OF SCRIPTURAL EVIDENCE TO PROVING

B. DISCLAIMERS
1. DO AND CREWS POST, “OUR POSITION AGAINST SUICIDE”
2. THERE IS NO CULT OR LEADERS AS TI and DO ARE NO LONGER IN HUMAN FLESH BODIES
3. MY MOTIVATION FOR WRITING THIS BOOK
4. TI and DO WERE NOT INTERESTED IN ATTRACTING FOLLOWERS – They were willing to accept anyone as a student but were choosy about who they thought could accomplish the task of overcoming the human condition. Public meetings were only held over two approximate nine month periods with about seventeen years of cloistered Overcoming “Classroom” in between, during which many gradually learned it wasn’t what they wanted so freely left the group and in many cases when the group had the capacity were given funds or an airline or bus ticket to go where they wanted to go.

C. BIBLIOGRAPHY AND SCRIPTURE NOTATION

D. INTRODUCTION TO TI and DO

1. THE NAMES AND TEMPORARY ORGANIZATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH TI and DO
2. TI and DO’S TERMINOLOGY CHANGES AND CONCEPT UPDATES
3. PRIMER OF TI and DO’S INITIAL TEACHINGS

a. SUMMARY OF TI and DO’S BEGINNING AND FIRST PUBLIC STATEMENT

II. JESUS PROPHECY OF THE RETURN OF THE KINGDOM OF GOD/HEAVEN
A. THE UNOBSERVABLE (THROUGH INSPECTION BY EYESIGHT), IN SECRET AS “A THIEF IN THE NIGHT” (UNDERCOVER) RETURN OF THE FATHER, THE SON (LAMB), “JESUS” AND THEIR STUDENTS, THE “SAINTS” (ANGELS) IN FLESH (CARNAL) HUMAN BODIES

1. JESUS SAY’S “The kingdom of God cometh not with observation,” Luk 17:21
2. “SON OF MAN” IS A PHRASE THAT JESUS USED TO IDENTIFY HIMSELF IN ARAMAIC AS A CHILD (SON) KIN OF GOD (HIS HUSBAND) WHILE OF A MORTAL
3. JESUS SAID HE WOULD HAVE A NEW NAME AND THAT HIS FATHER WOULD HAVE A NAME AND THE CITY OF GOD THAT IS THE NEW JERUSALEM WOULD ALSO HAVE A NEW NAME UPON HIS RETURN

4. RESURRECTION – TO STAND UP OR RISE AGAIN – IN-CARNAL (FLESH) AGAIN – (REINCARNATION), “BORN AGAIN” OF WATER AND BORN OF SPIRIT/MIND

a. ACCORDING TO TI and DO, “REINCARNATION” AS IT’S TAUGHT BY EASTERN RELIGIONS OF HINDU AND BUDDHIST ORIGINS IS NOT ACCURATE. IT INCLUDES STANDING UP AGAIN WHICH IS DEFINED AS PERFORMING SERVICE TO ONES OLDER MEMBER FROM THE NEXT LEVEL SHOWN AS THE DELIVERY OF PROPHECY
b. BORN OF WATER = BORN OF FLESH – WHICH IS A PROCESS OF “STANDING UP IN” (TAKING OVER) A HUMAN VEHICLE
c. WHAT CHRISTIANS SAY ABOUT BEING “BORN AGAIN” AND “SAVED” HAS IT’S APPLICATION BUT HAS BECOME SO DISTORTED IS NO LONGER REFLECTIVE OF FATHER AND JESUS MIND/SPIRIT INTENTION
d. JESUS HAVING A NEW NAME THUS HAVING A NEW “SON OF MAN” BODY IS ANOTHER PROOF THAT HE IS RESURRECTING, RE-INCARNATING
e. “GOD IS NOT THE GOD OF THE DEAD, BUT OF THE LIVING” and “GOD IS A SPIRIT”
f. JESUS SAID, “BEFORE ABRAHAM WAS I AM” and indicated ABRAHAM WAS BACK TO SEE JESUS’ DAY
g. JOHN THE BAPTIST WAS A RETURNING ELDER STUDENT SENT TO FULFILL THE ISAIAH PROPHECY OF A MESSENGER TO ANNOUNCE JESUS ARRIVAL BUT HAD NOT YET BECOME AN ADULT (AS OPPOSED TO A CHILD) MEMBER OF THE KINGDOM OF GOD
h. PAUL OF TARSUS, “RESURRECTION OF THE DEAD” EXPLANATION SEEMS FOUNDED UPON JESUS AND TI and DO’S TEACHINGS THAT INCLUDES AN INTRODUCTION TO A NEXT LEVEL (CELESTIAL) “FLESH” BODY
i. JESUS SAYS “THE REST OF THE DEAD LIVED NOT AGAIN UNTIL THE THOUSAND YEARS WERE FINISHED”
j. OLD TESTAMENT PROPHET DANIEL IS TOLD OF HIS RETURN AND PEOPLE IN GRAVES RISING TO THEIR JUDGMENT

5. JESUS DESCRIBES HIS RETURN AND REVEALING TO INCLUDE HIS FATHER COMING WITH HIM INCARNATE SUBSTANTIATED FURTHER BY DISCIPLES JOHN, PETER AND THE OLD TESTAMENT PROPHET DANIEL

a. JESUS SAYS “WE WILL COME UNTO HIM AND MAKE OUR ABODE WITH HIM”
b. JESUS SAYS IN Joh 16:25 – UPON HIS RETURN HE DOES NOT SPEAK IN PARABLES AKA PROVERBS, OR STORIES. INSTEAD, DISCIPLES WILL BE SHOWN (SEE FOR THEMSELVES THE FATHER) WHEN FATHER AND SON TOGETHER SPEAK/ANNOUNCE INSTRUCTIONS (COMMANDS)

i. HOW JESUS IS REVEALED IN PROPHECY – CORRELATION OF 1TH 4:16-17 WITH REV 6:1-2 AND THE REV 5:1 “BOOK” WRITTEN WITHIN AND ON THE BACKSIDE, “WITHIN” BEING THE 7 ROAR/THUNDERS AND THE “LITTLE BOOK” (REV 10) BEING THE BACKSIDE AS IT COMES LATER AFTER TI and DO AND FIRST FRUIT CREW HAS EXITED THEIR INCARNATIONS AND IT’S CONTENT PERTAINS TO BIBLE PROPHECY FULFILLMENT AS PROOF THAT TI and DO WERE/ARE THE PROMISED INCARNATE RETURN
ii. A SATAN IS AN ADVERSARIAL DISCARNATE “INFLUENCE” THE NEXT LEVEL ASSIGNS TO STUDENTS TO TEST THEIR RESOLVE THAT TI and DO CALLED BOOGERS
iii. THE TWO WITNESSES ARE SUBDUED BY THE BEASTS MEDIA MOUTHPIECE (NOT KILLED)

iv. BOTH OF THE TWO WITNESSES ARE CHRISTS
v. JESUS IS THE LION OF THE TRIBE OF JUDA, THE ROOT OF DAVID, WHO OPENS THE BOOK WHICH IS WHY WHAT HE SAYS IS DEPICTED AS A THUNDEROUS ROAR
vi. THE “TWO EDGED SWORD OF HIS MOUTH” EXPLAINED
vii. THE TRINITY IN DO’S WORDS AND JNNODY’S WORDS ON THE “HOLY SPIRIT,” OR “HOLY GHOST”
viii. DO’S WORDS ON RELIGION, THE LUCIFERIAN SPACE ALIENS, GOD, PANTHEISM, THE SECOND COMING, MISINFORMATION OF HAVING A “HEAVEN ON EARTH,” FLOWING ROBE WEARING PEACE AND LOVE JESUS, HUMANS PRAYING TO ‘MASQUERADING “GODS”‘ AND DEPENDENCE ON ONE’S OLDER MEMBER AS THE ONLY SOURCE OF UNLIMITED GROWTH AND KNOWLEDGE

c. JESUS REFERS TO HIS RETURNING AS SON OF MAN (SON OF GOD IN FLESH) IN THE ACCOMPANIMENT OF HIS GLORY (VERY APPARENT TO THE EYES) FATHER AND THE HOLY ANGELS, HIS STUDENT CREW
d. JESUS REFERS TO SON OF MAN SITTING ON THE RIGHT HAND OF POWER AND COMING IN CLOUDS DEPICTING TWO PHASES TO THE OVERALL RETURN, THE FIRST INCARNATE WITH HIS FATHER (POWER) FOR THE FIRST FRUIT HARVEST AND THE SECOND PHASE NON INCARNATE, WHILE STATIONED IN HIS SPACECRAFT ARMADA, UNDERCOVER – CLOAKED – EVEN BY LITERAL CLOUD COVER OVERSEEING AND STIMULATING THE “WINEPRESS” THAT RESULTS IN NEW BELIEVERS GIVING THEIR LIVES IN HIS/THEIR SERVICE THAT CAN RESULT IN THE LOSS OF THEIR PHYSICAL BODIES AS THEIR EXIT METHOD THEY ARE REWARDED FOR
e. ZECHARIAH TALKS OF SEEING TWO OLIVE TREES/LAMPSTANDS ANOINTED (CHRISTS) THAT STAND BY THE LORD OF THE WHOLE EARTH RELATING DIRECTLY TO THE TWO WITNESSES AS OLIVE TREES AND LAMPSTANDS AND THEREFORE BOTH CHRISTS THUS FATHER AND SON RETURNED

f. DANIEL 7:13 DESCRIBES THE OLDER MEMBER AS A SON ARRIVING TO BE WITH HIS OLDER MEMBER, DANIEL 12’s PROPHECY DESCRIBES JESUS STANDING (INCARNATE TO PROPHESY) AND THEN THE “END TIME” TWO (WITNESSES) STANDING (INCARNATE TO PROPHESY), WHO CAN ONLY BE THE SAME FATHER AND SON

g. REVELATIONS 12 DEPICTS THE FATHER’S RETURN INCARNATE IN A FEMALE (WOMAN’S) HUMAN VEHICLE TO BIRTH HIS “SON” (DO), (JESUS) TO THE THRONE TASK DEFINED AS REVELATION 11’S “TWO WITNESSES,” THE SON THEN FOLLOWING THROUGH TO SPIRIT BIRTH THEIR STUDENT BODY, WHOSE SATAN (ADVERSARY) IS LITERALLY LUCIFER, THE DRAGON, WHOM HE BATTLED BEFORE THROUGH HIS INCARNATION AS JESUS AND BEFORE THEN THROUGH HIS INCARNATION AS MOSES. WHILE OUTSIDE HIS INCARNATIONS HE WAS REFERRED TO AS MICHAEL IN HIS COMMUNICATION WITH THE PROPHET DANIEL. LUCIFER AND THE THIRD WHO WERE THE “FALLEN ANGELS” ARE SOULS WHO THESE DAYS ARE THE SPACE ALIENS WHO ARE HUMAN EQUIVALENTS AND ARE NO LONGER ALLOWED TO TRAVERSE EVEN AS FAR INTO THE SPACE AS THE EARTH’S MOON

i. SHOWS HOW REV 12:16 DEPICTS THE WAY THE WOMAN (GENERATOR OF LIFE) (TI) EXITS HER VEHICLE BECAUSE OF HER OWN CHOICES RATHER THAN BEING KILLED, WHICH IS THE INACCURATE TRANSLATION OF “APOKTEINO AUTO” FOR THE METHOD OF EXIT BY THE TWO WITNESSES THAT SHE IS ONE OF

6. THE “TWO WITNESSES” DESCRIBED IN REVELATIONS 11:3-6 ARE TASKED TO DELIVER THEIR TESTIMONY (SACRIFICE THEIR LIVES STANDING UP FOR THE GOD OF THE EARTH) AS PROPHESY FOR 1260 DAYS REQUIRING PHYSICAL HUMAN BODIES TO SPEAK THROUGH
7. THE OLDER MEMBER FROM THE NEXT LEVEL WHO LAST PERFORMED THE TASK INCARNATE AS JESUS, THE LAMB, IS TASKED BY HIS OLDER MEMBER (FATHER) WHO COMES WITH HIM INCARNATE TO “GET HIM GOING” TO “OPEN THE FIRST SEAL” WITH A “ROAR (THUNDER)” AS IN REV 6:1, BEING THE “LION OF THE TRIBE OF JUDA” IN REV 5:5. THIS “OPENING” IS A “REVEALING” ACCOMPLISHED BY SPEAKING – BRINGING UPDATES TO THE BIBLE AND PROPHECY FULFILLMENT AS THE TWO WITNESSES, WITH HIS HEAVENLY FATHER, INCARNATE IN A FEMALE VEHICLE (WOMAN), BIRTHING HIM TO THE THRONE BEFORE RETURNING (REV 12). HIS NEW VEHICLE IS DESCRIBED IN REV 6:2 AS A “WHITE HORSE,” A HUMAN VEHICLE (BORN OF FLESH) HE MAKES PURE (LIGHT/WHITE) TO SHOW HOW AND HIS “HEAD AND HAIR” ARE COMPARED TO “WOOL AND SNOW” IN REV 1:14. TO “SIT” ON HIS PREPARED “HORSE” IS TO USE IT TO PERFORM HIS TASK. HIS “BOW” REPRESENTS HIS COVENANT WITH HIS LITER OF SOULS (RETURNING SAINTS/ANGELS) TO BE BORN OF MIND/SPIRIT BY THEIR ADHERENCE TO ALL HE TEACHES THAT THEY BEGAN WITH MOSES AND STRENGTHEN WITH JESUS. HE  CONQUERS, OVERCOMES HIS WHITE LUCIFERIAN PROGRAMMED “HORSE” AND THE HUMAN WORLD AND IN SO DOING SERVES AS THE “MIDWIFE” FOR EACH OF THE “SAINTS” TO ALSO CONQUER THEIR HUMANNESS. THESE VERSES DEPICTING PART OF THE TASK THAT MARKS THE FIRST FRUIT HARVEST IN REV 14:15-16

B. WHERE ON THE EARTH THE RETURN IS MOST EVIDENCED
1. JESUS INDICATES THE KINGDOM OF GOD WILL BE GIVEN TO A NEW NATION (ETHNICITY)
2. JESUS SAYS, “WHERE THE BODY IS THE EAGLES WILL BE GATHERED” – THE GEOGRAPHY OF THE TEMPLE AND ALTAR WHERE THE KINGDOM OF GOD/HEAVEN REPRESENTATIVES COMES TO IN THE NEXT AGE
3. WHERE THE TWO WITNESSES COME INCARNATE INDICATES THE GEOGRAPHIC AREA ALSO DESCRIBED AS NON-PHYSICALLY; SODOM, EGYPT AND WHERE THE LORD WAS CRUCIFIED – Page 290

4. THE GREAT CITY IS THE WOMAN NAMED AMERICA WITH IT’S PRINCIPAL TWO CAPITALS IN THE WOMAN NAMED LADY LIBERTY REPRESENTING NEW YORK CITY AND IT’S UNITED NATIONS NEW AGE ORDER AND WASHINGTON D.C. (DISTRICT OF (LADY) COLUMBIA). MYSTERY BABYLON IS THE U.S. SECRET GOVT DESCRIBED AS THE “BEAST” THAT CAME ABOUT FROM THE TEMPORARY RELEASE OF THE LUCIFERIAN SPACE ALIENS FROM THEIR “BOTTOMLESS PIT” PRISON. THE SOUTHWEST U.S. LOS ANGELES, CALIFORNIA VICINITY IS THE NEW NON-PHYSICAL (SPIRITUAL) JERUSALEM

5. WHAT TI and DO SAID ABOUT HOW AND WHY THE U.S.A. WAS THE LOCATION FOR THEIR RETURN; WHAT LIFE IN THE NEW GEOGRAPHIC AREA WILL LOOK LIKE – I.E. NO WAR ON THEIR SOIL, GREAT PROSPERITY THAT ALL NATIONS ON EARTH LOOK TO AND PROFIT FROM, PROGRESS AND FREEDOMS IN ALL WAYS; EQUAL RIGHTS FOR RACES (ETHNICITY), WOMEN, BEHAVIORAL CHOICES, TECHNOLOGICAL ADVANCES, MORE FREEDOMS OF EXPRESSION (SPEECH IN RELIGION, POLITICS AND ENTERTAINMENT), SOCIAL ECONOMICS, HEALTH CONSCIOUSNESS, ALL TO PROVIDE A FULL FREE WILL OF CHOICES FOR ALL RETURNING SOULS TO BECOME EXACTLY WHAT THEY WANT TO BECOME, EVEN ALLOWING THEM TO GO AGAINST THE CREATORS OF THEIR ENTIRE REALITY OR TO GRADUATE INTO THE EVOLUTIONARY LEVEL ABOVE HUMAN, THE KINGDOM OF GOD, KINGDOM OF HEAVEN. ADDITIONALLY, HOW UPON TI and DO AND CREWS EXIT BY 1997 ALL OF PEACEFUL COEXISTENCE, SOCIAL EQUALITIES AND HEALTH, RELIGIOUS AND SPEECH FREEDOMS BEGIN TO REVERSE.- Page 297+

C. THE RETURN IS FOR THE HARVEST OF SOULS – REV 14.
THE KINGDOM OF GOD/HEAVEN’S QUALIFICATIONS TO GRADUATE THE HUMAN KINGDOM FOR THE 144 AND THE MYRIAD OF THOUSANDS. NO STUDENT’S PHYSICAL BODY WILL BE TAKEN AS THE “STALKS” ARE CUT DOWN. THE SONG’S OF MOSES, JESUS AND TI and DO REFER TO EACH OF A THREE TRIMESTER MIND/SPIRIT AND SOUL BIRTH LESSON PLAN, WHERE ONE’S FRUIT IS THE PRODUCT OF THE KERNEL/SEED OF GRAIN OF WHEAT AKA CORN, GROWN FROM THE HEAD/EAR (BRAIN) IN THE “STANDING UP” (GIVING) OF THE STALK (BODY) IN SERVICE TO THE CURRENT OLDER MEMBER

1. FIRST TRIMESTER: DEVELOPMENT/TAMING OF THE HUMAN BODY IN THE JEHOVAH/MOSES CLASSROOM DEPICTED AS THE GROWTH OF THE BLADE. LOOKING TO ONE’S OLDER MEMBER; MOSES, MAKING A COMMITMENT TO FOLLOW ALL THE COMMANDMENTS AND FOLLOWING ALL INSTRUCTIONS
2. SECOND TRIMESTER: DEFLATING THE HUMAN “BALLOON” (MIND), CUTTING ONE’S HUMAN ROOTS, GRAFTING TO ONES OLDER MEMBER; JESUS AND ONE’S NEW FAMILY OF FELLOW BELIEVERS; FURTHER UPDATING BEHAVIOR AND WAYS AND STANDING UP FOR JESUS KNOWING IT WOULD MEAN SACRIFICING ONE’S HUMAN LIFE
3. THIRD TRIMESTER: GIVING YOUR LIFE AND WILL TO THE INCARNATE OLDER MEMBERS WHO FULFILL THE TASK OF THE TWO WITNESSES. COMPLETING YOUR METAMORPHIC OVERCOMING OF THE HUMAN EVOLUTIONARY LEVEL BY SEPARATING FROM YOUR HUMAN ROOTS TO GIVE ALL YOUR HEART, MIND, SOUL AND STRENGTH TO YOUR OLDER MEMBERS. PUBLICITY STANDING UP FOR YOUR OLDER MEMBERS, DISSEMINATING THEIR INFORMATION WILLING TO LOSE THE HUMAN BODY YOU OCCUPY BECAUSE OF. LAYING DOWN YOUR LIFE WHEN THE OLDER MEMBER DECIDES ITS THE INSTRUCTION TO EXIT TO COMPLETE ONE’S METAMORPHIC MIND/SPIRIT/SOUL BIRTH. THIS OVERCOMING/BIRTHING IS ALSO TERMED ONE’S CHRISTING OR CHRISTENING AS ONE IS BECOMING ANOINTED WITH THE OLDER MEMBERS MIND WHICH IS “LIGHT” THAT WHEN FILLING ONE’S ENTIRE VEHICLE YIELDS TRUE ENLIGHTENMENT

4. THE HARVEST IS IN TWO PHASES AND INCLUDES 144 AND A MYRIAD OF THOUSANDS. THOSE WHO ARE THE FIRST FRUIT EXIT FROM THEIR BODIES FIRST AND THE LAST SPOKEN OF AS THE REMNANT/REMAINING WHO BELIEVE IN THE MOST CURRENTLY INCARNATE REPRESENTATIVES (THE TWO WITNESSES) AND STAND FOR THEM – EXIT THEIR BODIES DURING THE TRIBULATION PERIOD “WINEPRESS” THAT STARTS GRADUALLY WITH THE OPENING OF THE SECOND SEAL IN REV 6 THAT IS HEADLINED BY THE “RED HORSE” WHO IS PERMITTED TO WAGE AN ENDLESS WAR

a. THE 144 AND MYRIAD OF THOUSANDS SING A NEW SONG. THERE IS THE SONG OF MOSES, JESUS AND THE NEW SONG OF TI and DO. THE SONG IS THE LESSON PLAN. TI REFERRED TO THEIR LESSON PLAN AS A “PIANO ROLL” COMPARED TO THE SONG “OLD McDONALD’S FARM” ADDING ON STEPS WHILE STILL MAINTAINING PREVIOUS STEPS TO BUILD ONE COMPLETE SONG. THEIR NAMES CAME FROM THE NOTES FROM THE SCALE DO, RE, ME, FA, SO, LA, TI AS INTRODUCED IN THE THEATRICAL PRODUCTION AND MOVIE CALLED THE SOUND OF MUSIC THAT TI and DO FELT WAS IN PART A NEXT LEVEL INSPIRED STORY LINE BLUEPRINT OF THEIR TASK OF TEACHING THEIR STUDENT BODY TO “SING”

i. SUMMARY OF THE (SONG) REQUIREMENTS OF THOSE WHO BECOME PART OF THE FIRST HARVEST; THEY FOLLOW THE LAMB (OLDER MEMBER) WHITHER SOEVER HE GOETH. They RECOVER their VIRGINITY FOR CHRYSALIS (CHRISTING) SAKE – BREAKING COMMITMENTS (MARRIAGES, ETC.) TO ALL HUMANS – CHARACTERISTIC EACH OF THE OVERCOMERS (TRUE ORIGINAL ISRAELI’S) MUST HAVE. THEY HAVE NO GUILE (DECEIT) AND ARE WITHOUT FAULT. THEY HAVE WASHED THEIR ROBES ACCORDING TO THE INSTRUCTIONS FROM THE INCARNATE OLDER MEMBER THEY BOND TO
ii. THREE ANGELS HOLD THE DELIVERY OF THE “EVERLASTING GOSPEL” TO BE PREACHED THROUGHOUT THE WORLD THROUGH THE INTERNET, THE SECOND SHOWING THE “TWO FALLS” OF THE U.S. BEAST ESSENTIALLY INTO GLOBAL ENDLESS WAR AND GLOBAL ENDLESS FINANCIAL CRISIS AND THE THIRD THE JUDGMENT HOUR OF 40 YEARS WHERE PEOPLE ARE JUDGED BY WHO THEY SHOW THEIR ALLEGIANCE TO BETWEEN THE ONE TRUE KINGDOM OF GOD AND HUMAN OR HUMAN EQUIVALENT SPACE ALIEN (MAMMALIAN) FORMS OF WEALTH AND TREASURE

b. THE “FIRST” FRUIT HARVEST IS COMPLETED BY THE TIME OF FIRST OF SEVEN SEALS OF REV 6 AS A RESULT OF THE TWO WITNESSES PROPHECY PERIOD OF 1260 DAYS THAT SERVED TO GATHER THE FLOCK OR RETURNING SAINTS, TAGGED BY THE MEDIA AS THE UFO TWO, FOLLOWED BY A TOTAL OF ABOUT 21 YEARS OF CLASSROOM TIME ALL BEGAN IN MARCH OF 1972 WHEN TI and DO’S HUMAN VEHICLES MET IN HOUSTON, TEXAS AND WAS PRIMARILY CONCLUDED BY MARCH OF 1997 WHEN DO AND 38 STUDENTS LAID DOWN THEIR BODIES AS THE HEAVEN’S GATE GROUP AT THE TIMING OF THE PERIHELION OF THE MYSTERIOUS HALE BOPP COMET
c. THE “LAST” HARVEST IS COMPARED TO A WINEPRESS AND IS THE TIME OF GREAT TRIBULATION AKA FINAL JUDGMENT THAT BEGINS GRADUALLY WITH THE SECOND OF THE SEVEN SEALS OF REV 6 AND CONTINUES UNTIL THE SEVENTH SEAL

III. THE TIME LINE THAT REVEALS THE RETURN OF THE EVOLUTIONARY LEVEL ABOVE HUMAN KINGDOM OF PHYSICAL BEINGS (GODS) FROM THE LITERAL HEAVENS (THEIR ENVIRONMENTS IN DEEP OUTER SPACE)

A. THE PREPARATIONS AS DEPICTED IN REVELATIONS CHAPTERS 1 TO 5

1. REVELATION 4: THE BRIEFING ON BOARD THE SPACECRAFT BEFORE THEY ARE TO STAND IN NEW HUMAN VEHICLES ON EARTH
2. REVELATIONS 5: THE BOOK CONTAINS THE NEW INFORMATION TASKED TO BE DELIVERED TO THE HUMAN KINGDOM WHICH INCLUDES REMOVING THE SEALS PUT UPON IT THAT THE PROPHET DANIEL AND JOHN WERE TO MAINTAIN IN THEIR RECORDING TASK OF THE PROPHECY OF THE END TIMES

B. PREPARATIONS FOR THE SEVEN ANGELS WITH TRUMPET SOUNDING – REV 8
1. TECUMSEH PROPHECY FULFILLMENT OF GREAT COMET OF 1811-12 AND NEW MADRID AREA EARTHQUAKES
2. CENSER IS CAST TO EARTH; 1897 AURORA (DAWN/MORNING STAR), TEXAS (CAPTAIN’S DECK) UFO CRASH WITH ONE OTHERWORLDLY OCCUPANT NEWS EVENT

3. LIGHTNING (COMETS) (Mat 24:27 and Luk 17:24), THUNDER/ROARS (HURRICANE’S/STORMS), VOICES (MEDIA) AND SHAKING (EARTHQUAKES)

C. THE SEVEN ANGEL’S TRUMPET SOUNDINGS IN REV 8-11

1. FIRST TRUMPET – 1900’s – 1910’s – REV 8:7 EVENTS THAT FOLLOW IMMEDIATELY AS PREPARATION LEADING UP TO THE FIRST AND LAST “WINEPRESS” FRUIT HARVEST WAVES & FINAL JUDGMENT HOUR SHOWN IN REV 16:2 CALAMITIES AND TRIBULATION (TRIAL BY FIRE (HEAT IN ALL WAYS))

a. THE THIRD PART, GEOGRAPHIC AREA FOR THE RETURN AND THE RETURN OF THE HUMAN “LEAVES” (GENETIC RETURN) AND SOULS/SPIRITS FOR THE THIRD TRIMESTER TIME OF GRADUATION AND JUDGMENT

2. SECOND TRUMPET – 1910’S – 1920’S – INCLUDES EVENTS IN FIRST HARVEST PERIOD THAT ARE MANIFEST DURING THE LAST HARVEST PERIOD SHOWN IN REV 16:3
3. THIRD TRUMPET – 1920’S – 1930’S – INCLUDES EVENTS IN FIRST HARVEST PERIOD THAT ARE MANIFEST DURING THE LAST HARVEST PERIOD SHOWN IN REV 16:4
4. FOURTH TRUMPET – 1930’S – 1940’S – INCLUDES EVENTS IN FIRST HARVEST PERIOD THAT ARE MANIFEST DURING THE LAST HARVEST PERIOD SHOWN IN REV 16:8

a. ZIONISTS IN GERMANY REPORTEDLY MAKE A DEAL WITH A DEFEATED GREAT BRITAIN TO GET THE U.S. TO ENTER AND WIN THE WAR AGAINST GERMANY ET AL, IN EXCHANGE FOR PALESTINE WHICH SETS UP THE CRITERIA FOR WORLD WAR II AND THE JEWISH HOLOCAUST AND THE CREATION OF THE STATE OF ISRAEL

5. FIFTH TRUMPET/FIRST WOE – 1940’S – 1960’S – THE ARRIVAL OF SOME OF THE RETURNING STUDENT BODY (SAINTS) VIA INTENTIONAL CRASHING OF PRIMITIVE MODEL NEXT LEVEL SPACECRAFT (UFOS) AND THE OPENING OF THE “BOTTOMLESS PIT” – THE INNER EARTH JAIL CELL FOR THE LUCIFERIAN FALLEN ANGEL SPACE ALIEN HUMAN EQUIVALENTS THAT SIGNIFICANTLY STARTS THE UFO PHENOMENA IN THE U.S. – INCLUDES EVENTS IN FIRST HARVEST PERIOD THAT ARE MANIFEST DURING THE LAST HARVEST PERIOD SHOWN IN REV 16:10

6. SIXTH TRUMPET/SECOND WOE – 1960’S – 2000’S – THE ONE WHO WAS INCARNATE IN THE NAME “JESUS” ARRIVAL AS THE FINAL PREPARATION PERIOD FOR HE AND THE ONE WHO IS HIS OLDER MEMBER, THE FATHER, FOR THEIR INCARNATION (TAKING OVER OF PREPARED HUMAN VEHICLES) FOR THEIR TASK IN THE FULFILLMENT OF THE TWO WITNESSES PROPHECY PERIOD, TO GATHER THE RETURNING STUDENT SOULS TO HELP THEM INCARNATE INTO THEIR PREPARED VEHICLES TO FINISH THEIR OVERCOMING OF THE HUMAN KINGDOM CONDITION TO GRADUATE INTO ADULT MEMBERSHIP IN THE NEXT LEVEL – INCLUDES EVENTS IN FIRST HARVEST PERIOD THAT ARE MANIFEST DURING THE LAST HARVEST PERIOD

a. THE ACTUAL ARRIVAL OF THE OLDER MEMBER SOUL OF THE ONE WHO WAS LAST INCARNATE AS JESUS

D. THE REV 11 TWO WITNESSES- TI and DO’S 1260 DAYS OF PROPHECY AS BO AND PEEP TO GATHER THEIR LOST SHEEP, THEIR BEING SUBDUED BY THE BEAST, THE 3+ YEAR WILDERNESS “OVERCOMING CLASSROOM,” THE EXIT OF TI BY THE EARTH SWALLOWING HER VEHICLE UP, DO’S RISE AGAIN TO RETURN AS “JESUS” TO THE WILLFUL LAYING DOWN OF THEIR HUMAN LIVES AND RETURN TO THEIR HEAVENLY ABODE WITH THE TIMING OF THE 2ND WOE AS THE HALE BOPP COMET

1. REV 11:1-2 – PREPARATION FOR THEIR PROPHECY PERIOD – MEASUREMENTS, DEFINING THE “HOLY CITY” AND WHO IN THAT CITY “TREAD UNDER FOOT”
2. REV 11:3 – THE TASK OF WITNESSES – THEIR PROPHECY PERIOD AND MEANING OF THEIR BEING CLOTHED IN “SACKCLOTH”
3. REV 11:4-6 – WHO THEY ARE, DESCRIBED AS OLIVE TREES AND CANDLE STICKS AKA LAMPSTANDS, BOTH ARE ANOINTED (CHRISTS), FATHER AND RETURNED JESUS AND HOW THEY ARE SEEN, BY WHOM AND WHY
4. REV 11:7 – THE TWO WITNESSES ARE SUBDUED (OVERCOME (SHOT DOWN BY THE NATIONAL MEDIA IN 1975)) AND AFTER THE “OVERCOMING CLASSROOM” WOULD “SEPARATE (EXIT INCARNATION) BY DYING THEMSELVES” – THEIR PROPHECY IS DESCRIBED AS THE FIRST OF SEVEN ROARS (THUNDERS) FROM THE LION OF THE TRIBE OF JUDAH WHO OPENS THE FIRST OF SEVEN SEALS

a. FIRST ROAR – 1975-76 – BO AND PEEP – HUMAN INDIVIDUAL METAMORPHOSIS – UFO TWO (CULT) – FIRST WAVE OF PUBLIC MEETINGS IN 144 CITIES ACROSS U.S. AND CANADA

b. THE “BEAST” AND THE “BOTTOMLESS PIT” – THE LUCIFERIAN FALLEN ANGEL HUMAN EQUIVALENT SPACE ALIENS THROUGH THEIR OFFSPRING/HYBRIDS, WHO WERE FORCED TO HIDE UNDERGROUND TO SURVIVE THE RECYCLING OF THE PREVIOUS EARTH’S CIVILIZATION TO BE PERMITTED BY THE NEXT LEVEL TO COME OUT OF THEIR UNDERGROUND HIDING PLACES TO BUILD THE HUMAN KINGDOM IN THEIR LIKENESS TO PROVIDE THE TRAINING GROUND FOR THE THIRD TRIMESTER CLASSROOM AND SO BECAME THE LEADING NATION OF THE WORLD AS THE UNITED STATES OF AMERICA

i. REVELATIONS CHAPTER 13 CUES US INTO ADDITIONAL PROPHECIES THAT DESCRIBE THE HISTORY OF “BEASTS” AS FORETOLD BY DANIEL’S PROPHECIES AS KINGS AND/OR KINGDOMS
ii. DANIEL 7 INTERPRETATION BEGINS – THE END TIME FOUR BEASTS (KINGS) – Page 526
iii. DANIEL 8 INTERPRETATION – END TIME BEGINNING FROM THE MEDIA-PERSIAN AND GREEK EMPIRES THAT SPAWN THE LITTLE HORN OF THE AMERICAS TO RICHARD (THE LIONHEARTED) NIXON PRESIDENCY AS THE FIRST BEAST OF DANIEL 7 – Page 531
iv. DAN 7:3 – DAN 7:7 INTERPRETATION – THE FOUR BEASTS (KINGS) AND THE FOURTH AND LAST KINGDOM OF THE NEW WORLD ORDER RELATED TO THE FOURTH SEAL OPENING OF REV 6:8 – ON EARTH THE GREEN (GREEK GOD DEMETER AND ROMAN EQUIVALENT CERES) HORSE, THE PRESIDENT OF THE U.S. TO TAKE POWER IN 2017 IDENTIFIED/NAMED BY THE CHARACTERISTIC OF DEATH (THANATOS) THROUGH GREAT TRIBULATION AND THE “WINEPRESS” AND FOLLOWED/ACCOMPANIED BY HELL (HADES AKA PLUTO – THE RECYCLER) AND HOW IT RELATES TO NASA DISCOVERIES OF LIGHTS ON DWARF PLANET CERES (RELATED TO GREEN HARVEST) AND DWARF PLANET PLUTO’S EARTH LIKE CHARACTERISTICS AND TI and DO’S 1982 MOVIE SCRIPT DEPICTING PLUTO AS A LABORATORY BASE CONTAINING NEXT LEVEL TECHNICIANS CONTAINING AN WORKING MODEL OF EARTH

c. BEAST ASCENDS FROM BOTTOMLESS PIT, WARS AGAINST THEM, SUBDUES (OVERCOME) THEM AND THEY (DO AND CREW) THEN “SEPARATE BY DYING THEMSELVES” (Greek “apokteino auto”)

5. REV 11:8 – “DEAD BODIES” to “RUINED BODIES (REPUTATIONS)” (THE SUBDUING PART) – “STREET” TO “WIDE/BROAD PLAT, TOWN SQUARE” – THE GREAT CITY IS THE WOMAN NAMED AMERICA WITH IT’S PRINCIPAL TWO CAPITALS IN THE WOMAN NAMED LADY LIBERTY REPRESENTING NEW YORK CITY AND IT’S UNITED NATIONS NEW AGE ORDER AND WASHINGTON D.C. (DISTRICT OF (LADY) COLUMBIA). THUS NEW YORK CITY IS THE MYSTERY BABYLON WHILE LOS ANGELES IS THE NEW NON-PHYSICAL (SPIRITUAL) JERUSALEM
6. REV 11:9 – THE “PEOPLE AND KINDREDS AND TONGUES AND NATIONS” THAT SEE THEIR RUINED BODIES – “THREE AND A HALF” – NOT PUTTING THEIR RUINED REPUTATION “GRAVES” AS “MEMORIAL” – KEEPING THEIR MEMORY ALIVE
7. REV 11:10 – HUMANS REJOICE OVER THEIR DEMISE
8. REV 11:11 – THE SECOND “THREE DAYS AND A HALF” PERIOD – SPIRIT OF LIFE ENTERS THEM – THEY RECOVER FROM BEING SUBDUED “STOOD UP ON THEIR FEET” – THEIR SECOND PUBLIC EFFORT – ROARS 2-7 ARE VOICED
9. REV 11:12 – THEIR EXIT BY DYING THEMSELVES – A NON-PHYSICAL (BORN OF SPIRIT/MIND) ASCENSION – SEEN AS THE HEAVENS GATE “SUICIDE” CULT – WHAT DO CALLED THE “CULT OF CULTS” AND THE “CULT OF TRUTH” – WERE NOT PRO SUICIDE BUT SUICIDE TO THEM WOULD HAVE BEEN TO REJECT THEIR OLDER MEMBER (TI’S) DISCLOSURE (VOICE) TO “COME UP HITHER”
10. REV 11:13 – SAME HOUR (40 YEARS) GREAT SHAKING (EARTHQUAKE) (U.S. GOVERNMENT COUP D’ETAT – SUPREME COURT ORDERS WINNER OF G.W. BUSH’S PRESIDENTIAL ELECTION AS THE REV 6:4 RED HORSE OF ENDLESS WAR FROM 9/11 ATTACKS HOPED FOR IN THE STATEMENT BY THE “PROGRESS FOR A NEW AMERICAN CENTURY” (PNAC) WRITTEN IN 1997 WITH SIGNATORIES CHENEY, RUMSFELD, WOLFOWITZ, ETC. CALLING FOR A “REBUILDING OF AMERICA’S DEFENSES” THAT WOULD NEED AN EQUIVALENT OF A PEARL HARBOR ATTACK TO JUSTIFY FIGHTING A TWO FRONT WAR THAT ENDED UP BEING AFGHANISTAN AND IRAQ

a. THE TEN HORNS OF THE BEAST

11. REV 11:15 – SEVENTH ANGELS TRUMPET SOUNDING – DISCLOSURES (VOICES) FROM HEAVEN DESCRIBING THE OWNERSHIP OF THE WORLD AND ALL IT’S SYSTEMS AND OCCUPANTS AND THE TEACHINGS OF THE LORD’S CHRIST AS THE RULES (REIGN) FOREVER. OCTOBER 17, 2008 ON THE WORLD WIDE WEB’S NATIONAL GEOGRAPHIC’S CHANNELS SEASON 3, EPISODE TWO ENTITLED, “FINAL REPORT: HEAVEN’S GATE”, THAT BROADCASTS FOR THE FIRST TIME BY A MAINSTREAM POPULAR MEDIA ORGANIZATION, A QUESTION THAT SUGGESTS IN THE BROADCAST THAT “HEAVEN’S GATE” COULD BE WHAT CHRISTIANS REFER TO AS THE “SECOND COMING OF JESUS THE CHRIST” – Page 673
12. REV 11:16-17 – DESCRIPTION OF HOW THE TWENTY FOUR ELDERS LAYED DOWN THEIR LIVES THEMSELVES (FELL ON THEIR FACES IN SERVICE TO GOD – THIS IS NOT “BOWING AND SCRAPING” – THEIR FACES ARE THEIR GIVING UP THEIR HUMAN IDENTITY VIA USE OF THE HUMAN VEHICLES TO “OVERCOME THE WORLD” AS IS REQUIRED FOR MEMBERSHIP IN THE NEXT KINGDOM
13. REV 11:18 JUDGMENT PERIOD BEGINS – AKA GREAT TRIBULATION – AKA TIME OF THE WINEPRESS OF REV 14 AND A SECOND HARVEST TIME BY THOSE WHO CHOOSE TO BELIEVE IN EVERYTHING TI and DO SAID AND DID AND TAKE A STAND FOR THEM ACCEPTING THE RAMIFICATIONS OF HOW IT WILL BE THEIR SEPARATION FROM HUMAN WORLDLINESS IN SO DOING AS THE LUCIFERIAN DRIVEN SPACE ALIENS ARE TRYING TO REAP THE SPOILS OF THE PLANET BEFORE RECYCLING
14. REV 11:19 THE DWELLING (TEMPLE) OF GOD REOPENS IN OUTER SPACE (HEAVENS) SHOWS THE TIME PERIOD WHEN THE NEXT LEVEL TI and DO’S SPACECRAFT WILL BE LITERALLY VISIBLE (SEE THE CITYSCAPE OF LIGHTS ON CERES (SEE REV 6:8 GREEN/HARVEST= DEMETER/CERES)) THAT THE NATIONS OF THE EARTH SEEK TO WAR AGAINST – SPOKEN OF AS THE BATTLE AT ARMAGEDDON WHICH PROMPTS THE BEASTS (US AND EU) AND FALSE PROPHET (ALL THE RELIGIOUS, NEW AGE, SPIRITUALIST PREACHERS, TEACHERS, CONTACTEES AND CHANNELERS, ETC.) TO THEIR END – Page 687

IV. THE OPENING OF THE SEVEN SEALS ON THE BOOK IN REV 5-7
A. FIRST SEAL – “WHITE HORSE” – DO SITTING ON HIS VEHICLE (“HORSE”) – NAMED MARSHALL HERF APPLEWHITE WHOM AS AN OLDER MEMBER FROM THE KINGDOM OF GOD IN THE LITERAL HEAVENS (ALL OF THE SKY TO DEEP OUTER SPACE) TOOK OVER (SITS (TAKES THE POSITION) ON FOR HIS TASK), WHO TAKES THE NAME BO IN 1975 AND FINALLY DO (AS IN DOE A DEER) – BRINGS THE RETURNED (RISE AGAIN) COVENANTED STUDENTS (BOW, FROM RAINBOW, RELATED TO HIS LITER OF NEW BIRTHS INTO HIS NEXT LEVEL KINGDOM) THROUGH THEIR OVERCOMING (CONQUERING) OF THEIR HUMAN VEHICLES TO BECOME THE FIRST FRUIT HARVEST (REV 14) FINALIZED BY THEIR VOLUNTARILY LAYING DOWN THEIR LIVES (FALLING ON THEIR FACES (REV 11)), THE CUTTING DOWN OF THEIR STALK AS JESUS FIRST PRESCRIBED BY BEING THE EXAMPLE OF DOING TO PLEASE HIS HEAVENLY FATHER AS HIS ASSIGNED TASK FOR HIS DISCIPLES
B. SECOND SEAL – RED HORSE (HUMAN) VEHICLE – 43 RD U.S. PRESIDENT, GEORGE W. BUSH 2001-2009 IS “GIVEN POWER” TO WAGE WAR (GREAT SWORD) IN THE U.S. (FOLLOWING THE PLANNED EXIT OF THE INCARNATIONS BY THE TWO WITNESSES OLDER MEMBERS TI and DO AND THEIR 4 LIVING BEINGS AND 24 ELDERS AND OTHER GRADUATE (FIRST FRUITS)) VIA THE 9-11-2001 NEW YORK CITY WORLD TRADE CENTER AND WASHINGTON D.C. PENTAGON ATTACKS THAT “WOUNDED THE BEAST” PROVIDING THE IMPETUS TO START THE ENDLESS GLOBAL WAR ON TERROR
C. THIRD SEAL – BLACK/(BLUE) HORSE (HUMAN VEHICLE) – 44TH U.S. PRESIDENT, BARACK OBAMA – 2009-2017 – HAS A “PAIR OF BALANCES (BURDEN/YOLK TO JOIN TWO OXEN (BEASTS-U.S. AND E.U.) IN THE ONE WORLD GOVERNMENT (NEW WORLD ORDER) PRESIDING OVER WHAT BECAME KNOWN AS “THE GLOBAL FINANCIAL CRISIS”

1. THERE ARE TWO FALLS OF THE UNITED STATES (THE NEW BABYLONIAN EMPIRE) FOCUSED ON NEW YORK CITY; 1) THE ENDLESS GLOBAL WAR ON TERROR AND 2) THE GLOBAL FINANCIAL CRISIS WAR ON THE MIDDLE AND LOWER CLASSES. BOTH REPRESENT A LOSS OF ANY REMAINING DEMOCRATIC PROCESSES, THE PATRIOT ACT’S, A BIGGER SURVEILLANCE STATE, AN OVERLORD HOMELAND SECURITY DEPARTMENT OVER ALL OTHER “INTELLIGENCE” AGENCIES, MAKING CORPORATIONS EQUAL TO PEOPLE SO UNLIMITED FUNDS CAN EVEN MORE OPENLY BUY ELECTIONS AND EVEN TECHNICALLY ENABLING A CORPORATION TO RUN FOR PUBLIC OFFICE – Page 718
2. REV 13:7-11 WAR AMID/AMONG/WITH THE REMAINING (REMNANT) SAINTS

D. FOURTH SEAL – GREEN/PALE (DEMETER/CERES HARVEST GODDESS) HORSE (HUMAN – WHOSE NAME/REPRESENTATION IS DEATH (THANATOS) AND HELL (HADES/PLUTO – PERSON, CONDITION AND/OR PRISON LOCATION, NOT SEEN) FOLLOWS WITH/AFTER/BEHIND HER. THIS IS THE BEGINNING OF THE FOURTH QUARTER IN THE KINGDOM OF GOD’S PROCESS TO BRING SOULS TO THEIR VOLUNTARY HARVEST THROUGH ENGAGING THE OVERCOMING (CHRISTING) OF THEIR HUMAN EVOLUTIONARY CONDITION AND TO OTHERS THEIR DEATH AND SUBSEQUENT SECOND DEATH

1. REV 13:11-18 – THE SECOND BEAST – DANIEL 7’s “LITTLE HORN” HAS TWO INSTRUMENTS WHO ARE FALSE CHRISTS AND FALSE PROPHETS IN REPRESENTATION OF THE LUCIFERIAN MISINFORMATION MIND AS SEEN AS 1) NEW AGE SPIRITUALISTS AND SPACE ALIEN CONTACTEES, CHANNELERS OR CLAIMANTS OF CHRIST AND/OR MAITREYA ENLIGHTENMENT, CHRIST CONSCIOUSNESS, UNIVERSAL MIND, ONENESS REPRESENTATIVES, ASCENDED MASTERS AND THEIR DISCIPLES WITH THE DAHLI LAMA FIGUREHEAD AND 2) THE HOLY SEE STATE AS LED BY THE MOST ECUMENICAL FIGUREHEAD POPE FRANCIS AND HIS VATICAN CITY STATE AND BANK ENCLAVE OF CARDINALS AND WORLDWIDE ORGANIZATION OF WHAT HAVE BECOME ALONG WITH THEIR OFFSHOOT SECTS FALSE CHRISTIANS
2. DANIEL 9 – THE SEVENTY WEEKS/YEARS (SEALS/AFFIRMATION PERIODS) AND THE SIX/SIXTH NEXT LEVEL ARRIVAL PERIODS/TIMES, THE JUDGMENT HOUR AND START OF THE TIME OF THE “ABOMINATION OF DESOLATION (WASTE)” JESUS REFERENCED TO ALERT PEOPLE TO

E. FIFTH SEAL – SHOWS THE START OF THE “LAST” HARVEST WAVE AND HOW SOME ARE SLAIN (NOT BY THEIR OWN HAND AS WAS THE EXIT METHOD FOR THE 38 + 4 OF TI and DO’S CREW IN 1997, BUT AFTER THAT) BECAUSE OF THEIR “SPEAKING” ABOUT THE TRUTH PROVIDED BY TI and DO AND/OR BECAUSE OF THEIR WITNESS TESTIMONY THEY RECEIVED FROM BEING IN TI and DO’S CLASSROOM. SHOWS HOW THEY SHALL RECEIVE “WHITE ROBES” – NEW PHYSICAL NEXT LEVEL STUDENT VEHICLES AFTER OTHERS IN THE SAME SERVICE TO TI and DO EXIT THEIR HUMAN VEHICLES. THESE HAVE ALL BEGUN OR CONTINUED THEIR METAMORPHOSIS BY ADOPTING TI and DO’S BEHAVIORS AND WAYS (WASHING THEIR ROBES – HUMAN VEHICLES) TO THEIR BEST CAPACITY – LOOKING TO THEM TO HELP THEM SEPARATE FROM THEIR HUMAN KINGDOM ROOTS AND “STANDING” FOR THEM AND MAINTAINING THAT STAND UNTIL THEIR EXIT OF THEIR VEHICLE, HOWEVER THAT TAKES PLACE, BECAUSE OF THEIR TAKING THAT STAND

1. VOLUNTARY CASTRATION IN DO’S CLASSROOM (FOR STUDENTS WITH MALE VEHICLES) – JESUS REFERRED TO AS “MAKING ONESELF A EUNUCH FOR THE KINGDOM OF HEAVENS SAKE” – TEACHING TO THE FUTURE “THIRD TRIMESTER” CLASSROOM, REFRAIN FROM HUMAN PROCREATION AND MARRIAGE (COMMITMENT TO OTHER HUMANS), TO GIVE ONES ALL TO THE KINGDOM OF GOD THROUGH THE MOST CURRENT INCARNATE OLDER MEMBER FROM THE NEXT LEVEL – WHO SERVED AS THE LAMB (JESUS SERVING AS THE CHRISTING EXAMPLE OF OVERCOMING THE HUMAN KINGDOM (WORLD) TO INCLUDE LAYING DOWN ONE’S OWN CURRENT HUMAN VEHICLE’S LIFE FOR ONES “MARRIAGE” TO THEIR RECOGNIZED OLDER MEMBER) WHICH INCLUDES BECOMING NON-SEXUAL TO “RECOVER ONE’S VIRGINITY” (DOESN’T MEAN NEVER WAS MARRIED OR HAD SEXUAL INTERCOURSE, A LUCIFERIAN DISTORTION) – RELATED TO THE EARLY FIRST TRIMESTER LESSON STEP OF CIRCUMCISION THAT JESUS UPDATED IN HIS SECOND TRIMESTER CLASSROOM

F. SIXTH SEAL- AN ESPECIALLY LARGE SHAKING (EARTHQUAKE) AND OTHER CALAMITIES OCCUR ON AND TO THE U.S. MAINLAND TO SIGNAL THE END OF THE “LAST” “JUDGMENT” TIME OF “TRIBULATION” HARVEST WAVE AND BEGINNING OF THAT “GREAT DAY OF WRATH” AKA THE “WINEPRESS” END OF DAYS THAT CAUSES THE HUMANS WHO HAVE BOUGHT SPACE IN CONSTRUCTED UNDERGROUND DWELLINGS TO FLEE THE SURFACE CORRECTLY ANTICIPATING MORE CALAMITY (PLAGUES) MANY WILL ATTRIBUTE TO THE SO CALLED BAD SPACE ALIENS, OF WHICH TI and DO AND CREW WOULD BE CONSIDERED BY THEM TO BE A PART. A SEALING OF THE “144 THOUSAND (TRIBE/FAMILY)” TAKES PLACE BEFORE THE 7 ANGELS POUR OUT THEIR VIALS – ESCALATING THE “WRATH OF GOD” MANY ARE FURTHER TESTED TO STAND THROUGH

1. DAY OF WRATH IS SHOWN AS THE DOUBLE REWARD FOR THE U.S. BEAST DESCRIBED IN REV 17-18 THAT INCLUDES THE LARGE STONE OBJECT(S) THAT ARE CAST INTO THE SEA IN REV 18:21, WHOSE DAMAGE IS A PART OF WHAT’S DESCRIBED IN FURTHER DETAIL IN REV 16:17-21 – THE SEVENTH ANGEL’S POURING OUT OF THE VIAL THAT SIGNIFIES THE KINGDOM OF GOD IS “DONE” WITH ANY NEW OPPORTUNITIES FOR THE REMAINING EARTH’S OCCUPANTS TO CHANGE THEIR MIND TO SHOW ALLEGIANCE TO THE NEXT LEVEL ABOVE HUMAN
2. THE GATHERING AT ARMAGEDDON – SEEMS TO DEPICT TWO AREAS; THE MISSISSIPPI RIVER IN THE FOURTH PART OF THE WORLD (USA) AND THE EUPHRATES RIVER IN THE THIRD PART OF THE WORLD (MIDDLE EAST) RELATIVE TO THE GATHERING OF THOSE FOR AND AGAINST THE KINGDOM OF GOD STUDENT BODY FOR THE “GREAT DAY OF GOD ALMIGHTY” THAT TAKES PLACE WHEN DESCRIBED IN REV 16:12-16 AND THEN AGAIN AFTER THE 1000 YEARS WHEN THE LUCIFERIAN SPACE ALIENS ARE LOCKED UP UNDERGROUND AGAIN
3. THE FINAL JUDGMENT – THE “WINEPRESS” IS FOR THE HARVEST OF THE RIPE “GRAPES” – THOSE SOULS WHO ARE NOT YET 100% COMMITTED TO SERVICE TO TI and DO OR HAVEN’T HEARD ABOUT THEM BUT WHO ARE SEPARATING FROM THE WORLD IN THEIR OWN WAYS BY NOT GIVING THEIR ALLEGIANCE TO THE “BEAST” – (RECEIVED IT’S MARK ON THE HAND AND/OR ON THE HEAD OR RECEIVED IT’S NUMBER OR NAME OR WORSHIPED IT’S IMAGE (THE BEASTS SPIRITUALITY AND/OR LUCIFERIAN SPACE ALIEN COUNTERFEIT GODS AND/OR HUMAN WORSHIP – EVEN RELATED TO “WONDERS” AND/OR “FIRE FROM THE SKY” LIKE HOLOGRAMS OR LIGHTS, FIREBALLS, LIKE FATIMA AND OTHER EQUIVALENT ILLUSIONS

G. SEVENTH SEAL – Silence from the Kingdom of God/Heaven – THE THOUSAND YEARS THAT THOSE HARVESTED GET TO SERVE WITH TI and DO THROUGHOUT

V. UNDERCOVER “JESUS” SURFACES BEFORE DEPARTURE – DO’S WRITING THAT WAS PUBLISHED TO 90 WORLD WIDE WEB NEWSGROUPS IN 1995 – THE 6TH ROAR/THUNDER. PART OF THE START OF WHAT WOULD BECOME THE LAST HARVEST WAVE

VI. APPENDIX
A. Links to Do and Crews “Anthology of Our Materials” entitled: ‘How and When “Heaven’s Gate” (The Door to the Physical Kingdom Level Above Human) May Be Entered’ (Purple Book)
B. Links to Beyond Human – The Last Call Videos and other Heaven’s Gate Videos
C. Links to TI and DO’s “Classroom” Internal Meeting Audio Tapes (Most of poor technical quality)
D. Links to Sawyer’s Internet Sites
E. Other Links

VII. THE FINISH – SAWYER’S LAST STATEMENT

*** END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS ***

I. INTRODUCTION

I.A. ADDITIONAL STATEMENTS THIS BOOK WILL BRING AN ABUNDANCE OF SCRIPTURAL EVIDENCE TO PROVING

– The Return Jesus spoke about was to be in two WAVES (FIRST and LAST) both being characteristically “as a thief,” but the FIRST undercover, in secret (in a human vehicle) and thus not observable and discerned with one’s eyes. Jesus’ students (disciples), the Souls returning with Him, would recognize His “Holy Mind/Spirit,” as their “Shepherd” by what they have “within” their Souls from their last Trimester’s Classrooms, when the human vehicles, prepped by and for them, hear what He says through his voice (disclosure), literal “words” that begin to be expressed during the 1260 day period described as the Two Witnesses Prophecy (speaking publically). When they recognize Him and literally leave all behind to follow with Him, as He requires to begin to show 100% all their “Heart, Mind, Soul, Strength” allegiance, staying with His program as an Active Student until They all Exit the human vehicles they “borrow,” they would be “Rising Again” (Resurrecting) to receive LIFE – to become a new Adult Member of the Kingdom of Heaven, to receive a Next Level physical vehicle that is non-mammalian and a “position” (seat) of significant service on He and His Older Member’s (“Father’s”) crew. (Luk 17:20-21,Jhn 5:25-29, Rev 11:3 (FIRST))

– For the LAST part of His overall return He would not be incarnate but would still be recognizable only by those He gives that recognition to, so in that sense still “as a thief” while apparent for “every eye to see” among the clouds, appearing with His FIRST “fruit” Graduate Students, who have their new physical Next Level “made” vehicles (bodies) and are all together as an Armada of brilliantly lighted “clouds of light” (spacecrafts, aka in this particular context as “horses”). This is described as taking place after He exits from his incarnation WAVE and at the end of the “Judgment Hour” and “Wrath of God” shown by the Seven Angels pouring out their Vials (calamities, plagues) to include the U.S. and Europe (to include the Middle East) as the two geographical areas, in particular, to receive “two fold” (double) the Next Level’s payment for the sorrow and torment they heaped upon others and for elevating themselves above the Kingdom of God. (Joh 16:12,25-27, Rev 14:14, Rev 16, Rev 18, Rev 19:11)

– The One Jesus referred to as “The Father” or “Our Father in Heaven” comes incarnate with Him to assist Him to start His Task of taking the Throne (by himself incarnate) and then leaves His incarnation in a human woman’s body, seemingly naturally (earth swallows Her vehicle), to better oversee the remainder of the Overcoming Process for each of Their students, from His Spacecraft. The overseeing includes setting up further tests to help some who are not showing the needed readiness to be “born of spirit” (a birth of the Soul Body, that is invisible) to decide to give their all to the Overcoming Process or leave that “classroom” group. (Joh 14:22-23, Rev 11,12).

– The Revelations “Two Witnesses,” are Both identified as “anointed,” the primary keyword related to the term Christ and what is meant by Their being Olive Trees and Candlesticks/Lampstands, all related to the Old Testament Prophets Jesus referenced. We know Jesus was a Christ so we can assume His Father (God) was  Christened (anointed a King) before him, since the Father is who gives birth to the Son. (Rev 3:12 (Father is named and identified by the Son), 11:3-4, Rev 12:1-7, Rev 14:1 (Father has a name), Zec 4:1-14, Dan 12).

A “Christ” is an Older Member from the Kingdom of God/Heaven – Next Level, who has graduated the human evolutionary kingdom through a “Spirit/Mind Soul birth,” as a “Son” to His Older Member (Father) before, even many times, so is qualified to take others through the “Overcoming of Humanness Process.” The Process requires an incarnate Older Member’s step by step direction and can not be accomplished at any other time when the Older Member is not incarnate and holding a “classroom,” though after an Older Member has left their incarnation for a time while their information is still available as they left it, so is accurate, new students can start to engage that Metamorphic Process by adhering to what that most current Older Member taught while incarnate, which will include separating from the human roots that hold them back and changing their behavior and ways as best they can in accordance with what the Older Members taught and by being of service to what the Older Member left for them to do which includes being willing to Stand Up for Them while accepting the consequences that will come from doing so until they exit their vehicles.

After the Older Members have exited their incarnations, the Luciferian Space Aliens step in right away to begin to twist, distort and dilute the truth and realism the Older Members provided, to make Their teachings into a spiritual endeavor to practice and promote the impression one is on the “path” by following. Those most targeted by the Luciferians are those that were students of those Older Members while they were incarnate ,which includes me, which is why it’s important to examine the material for oneself. I am open to such criticism but the ones mounting such criticism will also be targeted to make things up as the intention of the Luciferian Space Aliens is to do anything and everything they can do to distract, distort, dilute and confuse what the Older Members said, did and why. This seems to include getting those who had the personal experience to not express that experience. These attacks have been ongoing and will get worse for everyone that comes in this direction. We each need to seek the help of our Older Members to ward off attacks of this nature and should anything be said that is justifiable evidence of getting off track from what the Older Members intended, we then just need to make appropriate corrections.

However, it’s via these Luciferian tactics that show how religions get started. Some people then become priests, nuns, monks, recluses, Rabbi’s or Imams or have other titles to identify themselves as a devotee, leader or teacher and even with best intentions are actually deluding themselves, though if they keep seeking the Older Members Mind, all experiences can be converted into a positive just like getting into any human endeavor is something to “get out of,” when we see through it. In the case of religious or spiritual paths it can even become a greater lure away from the Next Level’s reality and process because it gives one the “soothing,” but false impression they are holy or have it all figured out and will go to heaven when they die or are working for God when they bring others to believe as they do, which is not the way it works. No one brings someone else to God. The only way someone grows closer to the Next Level Older Members is by their own personal seeking of such a continuous relationship and puts into motion what the most current Older Member provided as instructions. For instance Jesus said to “love your neighbor as yourself” thus until we heard about an Older Member returning, being a humanitarian was about the best anyone could do, though they must be willing to change to what the new incarnate Older Member provides, as that’s the next progression we must leap towards, separating from the human kingdom to become a Member of the Next Kingdom.

Actually, Christing is defined as an anointing from the process of “pressing the oil from the olive.” The “press” is one that requires force exerted and as Jesus say’s includes violence. We are not to enact violence against anyone or ourselves, but because the Luciferians are provided to wage war against Souls who seek to take their next step, that they do so through motivating humans against, violence does become the prime way Souls eventually give their physical vehicles lives Standing Up for the current Older Members. It’s the shell of the Olive that dies but the oil (fruit), as Holy Mind continues to live in all those who draw it and that becomes useful in service to the provision of light that others can be brought to see by engaging the same process . Upon completion, if they have pleased the incarnate Older Member they can qualify to become an adult Member of the Kingdom of God.

– Virtually all examples of the way in which the Kingdom of God communicates with human beings, that can be counted on as from Them, are through Their sent in-the-flesh (incarnate) Representatives. In all the records of Jesus prophecy, in the four gospel accounts and in the Book of Revelations, there are only four End Age/Time descriptions of someone literally “speaking inspired by God,” the primary definition of “to prophesy.” Rev 10:11, Rev 11:3, Rev 14:6, Luk 12:2, Luk 17:30)

– The FIRST and primary delivery of prophecy – speaking words inspired by God  (the Two Witnesses demonstrated) accomplishes the gathering of the returning Elder Student body of Souls who were slated to complete their Overcoming of their Human Kingdom behavior and ways through leaving all behind again to make their eye single in giving all their heart, mind, Soul and strength to these TWO who were acting as One Mind that in so doing would enable each to pass through their “spirit birth canal” to becoming New Adult Members in the Kingdom of God, Kingdom of Heaven. (Mat 19:27-30)

– The Second and LAST of the two descriptions of “speaking words inspired by God,” said as, to prophesy, will be shown to take place AFTER the Two Witnesses and their Elder graduate students have left their incarnate presence, which is during the time of the Seventh Angels Trumpet Sounding, through the delivery of the content of the “Little Book,” as depicted in Revelations chapter 10, where that schedule is announced (sounded). This LAST time period of information delivery also pertains to, and is shown in the timing as, the opening of seals 4=7 that is also described as the Backside of the Book, shown in Revelations chapter 5, referring to the final revealing of The Mystery of God as spoken by the Prophet Daniel. who Jesus referred to as taking place during the time of the Abomination that makes Desolation (waste) that is in progress as we speak. (Rev 10, Luk 20:33-36)

– These FIRST and LAST provisions of the truth that together set the records straight and reveal what has been shrouded in mystery, a Kingdom of God strategy that becomes the criteria for all who hear about it to decide to believe in or not, together with our actions, behaviors and ways, that determines which Souls and Spirits will go on further in their schooling, when they can be brought back at a future time after the current civilization is spaded under and the waste is recycled.

-Luk 13:30 And, behold, there are last which shall be first, and there are first which shall be last.

It seemed to me among the ways Jesus could have meant this, it appears He might have been referring to those who think they are first in line to see him and recognize him and be taken into heaven by him – those who call themselves Christians who so far for many I’ve spoken to, can’t imagine He’s been here in the vehicle named Do (of TI and DO). Nor can most imagine hardly anything I say in these pages is possible. But knowing of this Jesus saying about the FIRST and LAST and other supporting reasons is what made me choose to talk about the Two WAVES as the FIRST and LAST. Currently we are in the LAST Harvest WAVE and this one is geared towards Christians most of all since they as a group seem to have been the recipients of the most Luciferian disinformation attacks, evidenced by their, as a group paying little attention to what Jesus actually taught was required to become a Member of the Kingdom of Heaven. They instead paid most attention to what Paul wrote in his letters. Most of what Paul wrote serves to distort and dilute the truth Jesus bore. Yet the Next Level can use it as a positive separator of those with a “(computer like) chip of recognition” from those without that “chip.”

– Our individual judgment is established for each of us when we die, because it is through our life in the human kingdom, however short or long, that we make our choices and have the capacity to change and grow from or not. For the entire human kingdom on Earth, the Judgment time is finalized when the same Older Member from the Kingdom of God, who was incarnate as Jesus, who will be shown comes incarnate again in the new human body that becomes named Do, as one of the Two Witnesses, returns in his Kingdom of God physical body. That body is described as “like” the body he took with him 2000 years ago returning with his crew of Elder students that graduated (that made them, their Soul body eternal) and were awarded with new physical bodies grown on a vine (not by mammalian reproduction) by the Kingdom of God for their use. (Rev 3:12; Rev 11; 14:14; 19)

– Jesus referred to a “Spirit Birth” as an unseen birth into the Kingdom of Heaven, He compared to the way the wind had physicality, as we could feel it, yet was mostly invisible to our eyes and that it was through conquering/overcoming a “water” (flesh body from the earth waters that is born in a water sack) body that our physical Spirit Body is born, necessitating his disciples to be “born again of water” to accomplish.

Being “born again of water” is also a reference to Souls needing to enter into a flesh body again, but is not the same thing the Eastern Religions call reincarnation, as each body in the human kingdom has it’s own Spirit, synonymous with “Mind” and can become a container to grow a Soul within ONLY IF the Kingdom of God deposits a Soul container into that human body and like a seed through the direct efforts of an incarnate Representative from the Kingdom of God helps the recipient think and do all they are given to “sprout” that “seed” deposit. What I’m calling sprouting has to do with the recipients choice to change their thinking, behavior and ways to their Older Members updated thinking, behavior and ways and by their providing service by delivering the Older Members new truth to humans that helps find other humans with Soul seeds that can stimulate them to recognize and then choose to engage their own separation from their humanness to even become a “tree” that yields further “fruit” as a new Student and/or Adult Member in the Kingdom of God. (Joh 3:3-8)

– The Kingdom of God membership do not propagate as humans (mammals) thus do not have sex and do not marry as humans do, thus the reason those characteristics must be overcome by all prospective members of the Kingdom of God before they can be awarded with a “glorified,” celestial, incorruptible, everlasting physical body. Initial laws provided by the Kingdom of God governing sexuality and marriage were lesson steps to establish order and teach self restraint to work up to disconnecting from entirely. (Mat 19:10-12, Mat 22:30, Rev 14:4)

– Members of the Kingdom of God, even the youngest Member are literally evolutionarily (not Darwinian evolution) “Above” even the greatest humans. (Mat 11:11)

– Upon return He would NOT BE SPEAKING IN STORY FORM (PARABLES) and He would have new things to share that even His disciples didn’t understand when they were physically with Him. (Joh 16:25)

– The return would take place primarily in a new area of the world, apart from the Middle East, to a people (nation) who Jesus’ disciples at the time didn’t know of, that will be shown was to be in the geography of North America with a FIRST and LAST Harvest lesson plan application. Evidence will show how North America was divided into “two straights/streets (paths),” (one meaning of the symbolic “Egypt” in Rev 11:8), with the FIRST as the new “Temple/Altar” Students and area, that is brought manifest in the U.S. Southwest from the Mississippi River to California via the incarnations (Souls taking human vehicles) of TI and DO and their Crew of returning “Saints” to finish their Overcoming of Humanness under the direction of Do. The LAST Harvest lesson plan application was to be held in the areas and for those “remaining” (after the FIRST Harvest) as the “Courtyard” outside that “Temple area” as the other of the Two Streets – paths students must STAND for TI and DO upon as their lesson step towards being in a future FIRST Harvest “classroom” with the incarnate Older Member in a new millennium after the spading/recycling).

– The timing of return would take place after his gospel has been spread to every corner of the world, which he indicated would be accomplished by the time of the End Age, or End Time. (Mat 24:14)

– Members of the Kingdom of God, Kingdom of Heaven are physical, both as Souls and in their use of physical bodies they refer to being “wrapped around their Soul body” thus illustrated as clothing, raiment, robes, fine linen,  that are their “vehicles” they perform tasks through in the denser physical environments. The human vehicle when They come to “borrow” one, said as borrow because they leave them behind when they finish their tasks so that they once again become part of the dust (elements) of the earth they arose from) is spoken of as an “incarnation” (in-carne (latin for flesh)). That’s the context of the Rev 6 usage of “horses,” mammals, but with a Next Level Older Member sitting on the “white horse” while the Red/Ruddy, Black/Blue and Green/Pale horses are sat upon by a Luciferian Space Alien – Fallen angel. Now, in the context of Rev 19, the “horses” are spacecrafts in what I believe is the evidence of Do’s (returned “Jesus’) Armada. (Zec 10:3 – The Lord makes his flock of Judah his “goodly horse in battle,” Jer 8:6 compares a horse to a man, Isa 63:13 with Moses compared to “a horse in the wilderness”).

– Members of the Kingdom of God, Kingdom of Heaven, use physical transportation, to interface with Their physical Creations, that to humans, if seen would be in modern times labeled “Unidentified Flying Objects” (UFO’s), though in the records described as a “cloud of light” or a “swift cloud” or a “whirlwind of fire” or a “chariot of fire” or as a “white horse” or as a “Wheel Within a Wheel,” or Pillar or Column of Cloud that led Moses encampment in the wilderness, lighted up at night and even killed snakes and scorpions in their path, etc.

– Luciferian space aliens – the “fallen angels,” having an aborted Soul Body also seek to use human physical bodies to have function in and around the earth, but also travel in physical spacecrafts humans would call a UFO. These are not Kingdom of God spacecrafts and TI and DO indicated they are primitive in comparison.

– The term “heaven” referred to the literal heavens – being all areas “elevated” above the earth, though where the Members of the Kingdom of God circulate was considered to be the Heaven of Heavens. The Luciferian space aliens really are no longer “space” aliens as they can not travel very far from the earth’s surface – certainly not as far as the Moon, otherwise being “fallen” and restricted to earth, they could interfere with the Signs in the Sun, Moon and Planets and Stars – Jesus said would be as signs from the Kingdom of God.

– Heaven as the environment for the many members of the Kingdom of God to circulate in, Jesus said has within it “many abodes, dwelling places” or “mansions” which are actually spacecrafts that can be as large as a planet like Pluto and/or Ceres and/or the Earth’s moon and/or virtually wherever the Kingdom of God chooses to make a base within, upon or around.

– Today’s “space aliens” are Souls that were lured away from becoming Members of the Kingdom of God during a previous civilization on or off the earth, by those who were led by a former student member of the Kingdom of God named Lucifer who with others rebelled against the Kingdom of God to become known as the “fallen angels.” They take over human and human equivalent vehicles for their use, by directly or indirectly claiming to be the “gods.” They try to grow new human vehicles for their use by stealing DNA, eggs and sperm from humans to grow hybrid humans they can occupy and manipulate to their agenda. The Kingdom of God doesn’t permit them to circulate very far away from earth and they are forced to go underground and under the sea when the Kingdom of God spades the earth’s surface as evidenced by the records of a global flood and said to be occurring again soon, though not with water this time, but via fire, after the Kingdom of God is “done” with the Judgment Hour.

TI and DO indicated in 1975, that during the “Seventh Closeness” (which was after they performed their prophecy and testimony period, they called the “Sixth Closeness,” (with 1st as Adam, 2nd as Enoch, 3rd as Moses, 4th as Elijah and 5th as Jesus, (aligned with the 12 grades in school analogy where Jesus brought the formula to graduate the 12th grade)), would include what Christians refer to as the “second coming” and “rapture” and “completion of the final prophecies in John’s Book of Revelation,” when “the one who was Jesus will come in at close range, to receive the elect into his company.” They said, “those who are in the middle of their normal life span will easily live to see it’s completion,” indicating the timing. (If someone was 35 at what looks like is the official start of the Seventh Closeness – perhaps 2007. they might be 75 by the time it’s “done” around 2047 perhaps). There are a number of ways to work the numbers, but it’s not within my capacity to nail it down more than that and I could be wrong about.

TI and DO were not Bible scholars, yet even then knew the plan for what was to happen during the Seventh Closeness, during the time of the Seventh Trumpet Sounding. Do and Crew (38+4 Membered FIRST Fruit) set in motion the start to this last approach to this Seventh Closeness in 1992, 3, 4, 5, 6 and 7 – seen in prophecy as the 7 Thunders/Roars – public global scoped announcements of the One who was Jesus’ arrival. Their Song (The TI and DO design of the graduation lesson plan, Ti always called a “piano roll” was brought to it’s crescendo as Their Heaven’s Gate Exit of their incarnations that ushered in the remaining 6 Seals that would be finished by the time of the 7th Seal and 7th Vial being poured out when the younger Souls who showed allegiance to TI and DO while still in their human vehicles are taken into safe keeping.

– The earth is a “garden” in the sense that humans are plants that can become the containers for Souls planted within them, to grow during “seasons” when the Older Member is incarnate, into Members of the Kingdom of God. In that way these Luciferian space aliens are allowed to influence humans to provide misinformation that planted Souls have the capacity, with help they request from the Older Members, to see through. This makes the Luciferian presence into a growth catalyst Student Souls can develop their “mind muscle” by fighting against.

– The content of what is spoken by these Two Witnesses is described as the OPENING OF THE SEAL ON THE BOOK THAT WAS WRITTEN FROM WITHIN BY THE THRONE, where Throne refers to the Two Witnesses that together in their performance of their Witnessing/Testifying task, They Give Their Lives to, become the First of SEVEN THUNDERS (ROARS), though the primary speaking task is through the literal voice of the One of the Two who was noted as the LION OF THE TRIBE OF JUDA, (a reference to the One who was incarnate as Jesus). (Rev 5, 10).

All these points and many more are in my opinion only able to be realized and related to all Jesus taught and his prophecy because of and through everything said and done by TI and DO, who did not base what they said on the Bible, though certainly knew it contained the primary and most accurate records of the Kingdom of God’s ongoing nurturing of their created (designed and developed) human kingdom in their “garden” on their Earth.

I think it safe to say TI and DO didn’t use the Bible to know what to think, say and do. They didn’t try to justify what they thought by what was in the Bible. In other words, they didn’t formulate what they said publically by particular bible verses nor use the Bible to build justification for what they were thinking. They did say the Bible content and especially the Jesus record helped them awaken and was used to provide clues that would verify information they were receiving from their Older Member in the Heavens. It seems clear that Jesus used the Old Testament records in the same kind of way. This book is hopefully providing some of the further revealing of what was intended by the prophecies in the past records.

Nor did TI and DO try to fit what they thought, said and did to the parts that were considered to be  prophecy. I never heard them quote chapter and verse or even quote and recite any one verse except for a few keywords or the paraphrasing of a certain story or saying. There is a considerable amount of evidence that the prophecy record was not their guideline to stick to and at times they seemed to intentionally not align with certain religio-spiritual “correctness” in the “Records” (as they most often referred to the Bible and other associated materials). For example one time Do asked the student body if they wanted to stop a fast that day or the next day that would have been day 40. I recall thinking 40 would be good but didn’t really care, but that was because 40 was the number of days Jesus was reported as fasting before he came public with his ministry. And there were other references to 40 so that was appealing to my still remaining human religio-spiritual correctness. Some of the students at that time said it didn’t matter to them and wanted to do what Do felt to do. We stopped on day 39.

TI and DO said that the Next Level worked very hard to preserve the accuracy of what Jesus said, so we could count on the “red letters” of the four gospels. They said these Records, not limited to the Red Letters or the Bible, as for example they also provided us with publications of the Dead Sea Scroll and Nag Hammadi Library and books about those materials, to include the Essene Jewish sect, said to have stored some of those materials. They said these ancient records were provided by the Next Level to be used as tools for their own gradual awakening and as a help for parts of their student body’s lesson plan, (Ti called a “piano roll”). They developed that lesson plan in steps and said they were only given steps one at a time ahead of the student body, often proceeding on a next step only when the students who were having the most trouble with the previous step either caught up or chose to leave the classroom. Further details are provided throughout this book.

I.B. DISCLAIMERS

In 1975 TI and DO’s group were tagged by the media, among other names, the “UFO Cult” and then twenty two years later the Heaven’s Gate cult. There is no disputing that they were certainly a “subculture” and that they stood apart from all societal norms and resembled in some ways other groups also labeled as “cults.” But over time it has been shown without much doubt, to an objective discerning mind, even by psychologists and social scientists, that when compared point by point to any other groups, they stood apart from all others, in many ways, though one will never know that if they don’t delve into Their story and teachings, behaviors and ways to find out.

Despite the controversy of how they left this world, that I will show in this writing was completely voluntary, as shown in part by many “exit video tapes” (by those in the group of 38 members who wanted to make such a video), and by other proofs that show they each had to actually qualify to remain among them, though qualifying was never emphasized as if a ploy to get people to stay. For instance, the day after I met up with the group at the Colorado National Monument, in my first more personal meeting with Do, along with two other new students, he said to us something to the affect of it being unlikely we would all see the metamorphic “process” through to completion and graduation because of how difficult it would be. I recall not understanding what would be so difficult and yet Do’s saying that didn’t cause me to take it as a challenge either. I thought it strange but looking back Do obviously knew a ton about the process that I didn’t. Now, having flunked out of that initial program the difficulty is very, very clear and coming clearer yet as time marches on. It was my choice to drop out entirely as it was to re-apply though had they not helped me re-apply I would never have even come this far and I’m not claiming to have anything in the bag as I need to have even harder tests since I flunked the first time.

Their exit of their physical bodies was mostly accomplished by ingesting a strong barbiturate mixed into applesauce or pudding and chased with some vodka designed to put their bodies to sleep gently and permanently and as insurance to not wake up or slip into a coma they put a plastic bag over their own heads. Thus the death of the vehicle was to be as gently self administered as was possible. There is nothing to suggest that kind of action would be appropriate for anyone to do now but nor am I in the position to say what’s not. Do and his class of students posted their opposition to suicide though their interpretation of suicide was not the typical one, though there is significant evidence that it was the way Jesus thought about it, then called “laying down you life” for one’s “Father” as he said his disciples must do to reap the reward of receiving a new physical body and eternal Life in his kingdom in the literal heavens, stationed upon one of their “mansions” (dwelling places) spacecraft/Labs. The evidence is that these students were not ordinary humans but had Souls who had been with Jesus during his ministry and accomplished all their lessons at that time so were given their next trimester’s lessons towards their Spirit Birth by coming back and taking a new human body to overcome through TI and DO’s hands on direction.

I.B.1. DO AND CREW POST, “OUR POSITION AGAINST SUICIDE”

(I am putting their statement in my own words to avoid problems from those who hold the copyright to the material who are former students of TI and DO and were given the logistical part of the task to maintain the web site, as they have done, but who repeatedly demonstrate changing what TI and DO taught when they give interviews to bloggers, etc.. I have challenged them on each of their given public interviews I became aware of, to be found on my blog via links in the Appendix of this book. Therefore I’m playing it safe in case my saying this angers their influences into trying to stop the distribution of this material. I hope not, but in any case the original can be found at:

Our Position Against Suicide
https://sawyerhg.wordpress.com/2016/11/23/our-position-against-suicide-by-do-and-crew-posted-on-heavensgate-com/

Because some would read one document Do wrote and can easily misunderstand the context of the many things Do said about who could be saved from the recycling, I put this composite together. Overall, the Kingdom of God is open to everyone who reaches up to their Father in Heaven to give their will to, to help them separate from their human attachments and addictions, behaviors and ways – all the ways of the world.

Suicide is NOT a solution – All Souls Have A Chance To Choose Their Allegiance to God or Mammon
https://sawyerhg.wordpress.com/2014/08/02/ti-and-dos-teachings-provide-opportunity-for-all-souls-to-choose-degrees-of-allegiance-to-the-kingdom-of-god/

Here is my paraphrased report of the document, “Our Position Against Suicide”:

TI and DO indicated that to learn the needed lessons we each need a physical vehicle (body). It is also the way we provide service while incarnate in the human kingdom – we need a vehicle to do so. They indicate they keep them out of harms way and care for them well, so they can function the best they can for their task.

They went on to express when this was written in 1996, after they had been considering their exact method of exiting their vehicles since before I left, as early as August of 1994, how they would prefer and even anticipate entering a spacecraft with their bodies but were aware of several ways it could happen.

Before exit, some could lose their physical body which would be like a “recall,” even from an accident or because of an irate person. They knew that it was possible they could be jailed for some reason or be subject to some form of mental or physical torture, they compared to Ruby Ridge and Waco.

Its the Next Level way to look at all the possibilities to prepare for whatever happens. They used the example of Masada around 73 A.D., and talked about how they would exit in that situation rather than experience an animalistic murdering military assault.

Truly, the truest meaning of suicide is turning against the Level Above Human when leaving is offered. They felt they were focused on two tasks. First to make a last attempt to tell the truth about how to graduate into the Next Level so some humans could avoid “suicide” by remaining for the recycling of the civilization and of the spirits and souls who went against the Next Level or ignored Them. The second task they had was to take advantage of each day to work on overcoming and changing to be ready to become a member of the Kingdom of Heaven.

I.B.2. THERE IS NO CULT OR LEADERS AS TI and DO ARE NO LONGER IN HUMAN FLESH BODIES and in my opinion there is no need or desire among the few former members that still believe in TI and DO, of which I am one, to try to start one, even though several new believers have requested such. Among the former members there is no leader and we are hardly in contact with one another and each is living their lives in a somewhat normal fashion. I go by the name of Sawyer, a name Do gave me early on as I was the woodcutter for the Bedouin (no one place to lay our heads) styled commune we had that for several years existed outdoors in tents largely in the National Forests and private ranch lands we leased in Wyoming and Texas. My maintenance of several social media accounts is the only way I know of new believers as I don’t actively look for any, nor concern myself with how much they do or don’t believe and don’t keep a list of those who tell me they believe. I simply try to answer questions and post commentary and recollections from my experiences with TI and DO.

There are all sorts of charlatans on the Internet posing as the return of Do or claiming Do has returned and I suspect that will only grow. I am certain Do is not returning incarnate during this current civilization.

I.B.3. MY MOTIVATION FOR WRITING THIS BOOK

I could have made money long ago with my story if I had titled a book, “How I got out of the cult of cults” even though I suspect one reason no former members have written such a book that I’m aware of was because it was easy to get out. In fact many were made to leave, sometimes permanently and sometimes temporarily so they could see if they really wanted to be in TI and DO’s classroom. I wrote this book because I believe in TI and DO and want to be in their service (which is still possible just as it has been possible to serve Jesus after he exited) and this is the service at this point I believe they have offered me even though I didn’t leave to do this. I failed to make the grade but have another chance. They don’t throw us away if we don’t want to be thrown away. Should I succeed in “Standing for TI and DO” and re-starting my metamorphic changeover, by adopting all their behaviors and ways, I have no idea whether when I drop this vehicle however it happens if I will be in TI and DO’s company or will be “put on ice” (so to speak) to be prepared for a future classroom to finish my overcoming when I can be with my Older Member for the entire program.

Nor do I claim that everything I have said in this book would meet with TI and DO’s approval. I think it’s likely that there are many areas they would have had me leave out or qualify that I could be wrong about or re-write, but  I do think I am mostly in the ballpark of what TI and DO would have me do. I have received many corrective hints as I went. I do believe there are some of my classmates assigned to help me stay on track enough to not compromise what this may be able to do for others coming in this TI and DO direction.

I’m not saying what I am saying here is needed by anyone but it has always been the way of TI and DO to be very thorough in providing all the helps they can for each of the Souls they brought back to have this opportunity to see the truth and take over a human vehicle to engage their own metamorphosis and service Standing up for TI and DO, asking them for help all along the way and giving their all to result in their “Mind/Spirit birth” graduation when TI and DO determine each of us qualify.

I.B.4. TI and DO WERE NOT INTERESTED IN ATTRACTING FOLLOWERS – They were willing to accept anyone as a student but were choosy about who they thought could accomplish the task of overcoming the human condition. Public meetings were only held over two approximate nine month periods with about seventeen years of cloistered Overcoming “Classroom” in between, during which many gradually learned it wasn’t what they wanted so freely left the group and in many cases when the group had the capacity were given funds or an airline or bus ticket to go where they wanted to go

Even though I witnessed over and over how TI and DO didn’t want anyone to leave, in 1976 they still felt to tell nineteen students they weren’t ready and arranged their separation from the larger body of believers, leaving a little more than seventy of us, who they said “made the first cut.” About ten years later a couple of students were told to leave because they didn’t want to abide by all of the procedures we had, that were geared to help us overcome the human world. At one point in the early 1990’s Do offered a couple thousand dollars to anyone who wanted to leave, saying he didn’t want our most comfortable life style or the fear of having to start over again in the world be a reason to stay. Over the years many left for one reason or another that had to do with things not panning out as they had hoped or because of a desire to have a human relationship or to return to the family they left behind when they joined or just to do something else. About every year or so, TI and DO would require us to go someplace quite around the place we lived in and consciously think about whether there was something else in the world we wanted to do. Then when 20 minutes or so had passed they’d tell us to go back to blocking out such thoughts. Of course there were no monitors on our thoughts so we could always think about whatever we wanted to think about, but that classroom had a way of forcing things to the surface even if they were things that were years in the making. I realized that’s what happened to me.

I.C. BIBLIOGRAPHY AND SCRIPTURE NOTATION

I only directly quote two data sources that are both in the public domain:

– The King James Bible
– The King James Bible with Strong’s Dictionary has been placed under copyright © 2001-2002 by johnhurt.com, and is protected by United States and International Copyright Laws. All Rights Reserved.

NOTATIONS USED INSIDE KING JAMES SCRIPTURE QUOTES

– Single parentheses ( … ) inside of scriptures indicate words added by the original King James translators. Sometimes they are completely fabricated to allow for a grammatically flowing sentence, while at other times precedes the primary word but is necessary to formally translate it because often one Hebrew or Greek word requires multiple English words. Still other times words are added to fill a particular interpretation of the intended meaning.

– Two double parentheses (( … )) indicate additional and/or alternate translation options whether from Greek or Hebrew. Most times within these includes the Greek/Hebrew dictionary number at times with a G for Greek and an H for Hebrew which is listed ahead of the words translation followed by the Greek or Hebrew word, then an equal sign (=) and the additional keywords/phrases from that dictionary with this authors primary candidates at times put in UPPER CASE.

– Square brackets […] within double parentheses, (( […text…] )) contain my opinion of additions to the definition and/or interpretation.

– One or more asterisks (*) or an asterisk followed by a number are used for local footnotes that follow shortly after their usage as opposed to at the end of a page or section.

STRONGS GREEK/HEBREW DICTIONARY NOTATION:

+ (addition) denotes a rendering in the Authorized Version of one or more Greek words in connection with the one under consideration.

X (multiplication) denotes a rendering in the Authorized Version that results from an idiom peculiar to the Greek.

( ) (parenthesis), in the renderings from the Authorized Version, denotes a word or syllable sometimes given in connection with the principle word to which it is annexed.

I.D. INTRODUCTION TO TI and DO

I.D.1. THE NAMES AND TEMPORARY ORGANIZATIONS ASSOCIATED WITH TI and DO

From TI and DO’s official start on January 1, 1973, when they left Houston, Texas and their former family, friends, careers, possessions and human lifestyles behind, they went by a variety of names to include, “Guinea and Pig,” “He (Do) and She (Ti)” and others until their first meetings were held in April of 1975 in the North Hollywood part of Los Angeles, California in the United States of America where they attracted a couple dozen who wanted to follow them and because of those new students, whom they initially didn’t welcome the idea of, chose the names Bo (Do) and Peep (Ti) (from the nursery rhyme of shepherds of sheep). Throughout the remainder of this Book I will refer to them as TI and DO, though they didn’t select those names  until around 1977.

In 1975 TI and DO considered their mission identity as, “Human Individual Metamorphosis” (HIM), because humans were like caterpillars in that they had the capacity to change into a literal new creature inside, that once “born” would have new capabilities analogous to a Butterfly. When their public meeting efforts hit the national media in October of 1975, because students had designed a meeting announcement poster that was headlined with, “UFO’s…,” (which they didn’t actually approve of because of how that acronym was so populist by then),  they became referred to all over the U.S., (especially), as “The UFO Cult,” or “The UFO Two.” In addition to “Two” referring to both of them, it was also because they had come to realize they were fulfilling the prophecy task of the Two Witnesses of The Book of Revelations, chapter 11, though they didn’t actually state that in their poster, nor their first “Statement One,” nor at the two public meeting I heard them speak at in Waldport, Oregon and at Arapahoe Community College in Denver. They said they didn’t want to focus on that prophecy because before becoming aware of that prophecy, they already knew their Souls had come from the Kingdom of God, what they called The Evolutionary Level Above Human, to perform a task that had to do with bringing “updates to the Bible” and to “fulfill prophecy.” Plus they felt as if it was a lure to say and they personally had always  wanted to run the other way when they would hear of or meet someone who said they were the reincarnation of some well known biblical figure. They also became aware that there were others who had claimed to be the Two Witnesses. Nonetheless, they knew they were to fulfill that prophecy.

In 1977 they changed their names from Bo and Peep to TI and DO, reversing the order of who was who. I have reasons to believe that order was reversed because Do knew well by then that Ti was his Older Member, in religious terms his Heavenly Father and they were performing their task together as a unit. Those particular names were in part stimulated by the movie musical, “The Sound of Music,” they felt was influenced by the Next Level Above Human, (in the Records, the Kingdom of God, Kingdom of Heaven, that they felt provided them a little outline of their mission. The  names related to musical notes, as in the song in the musical entitled, “Do a deer” or as “Do-Re-Mi” that was using the Seven note scale, using the syllables, “Do re me fa so la Ti…Do.” Do told us how the choice of positions 1 and 7 demonstrated how Ti, from the previous octave pushes the emergence of Do in the next octave. I later realized that was reflective of the way the Woman gives birth to her Son – to the Thone seat/task in Revelations chapter 12.

What I didn’t know at the time, because TI and DO never talked about it to their “Classroom” (Student Body), was how their choice of “note” names was directly related to prophecy, that their students, eventually the 144,000 (or 144 and a myriad of thousands) were depicted as “singing… a new song before the Throne,” while referencing how there was the Song of Moses and the Song of the Lamb (Jesus) before then. (Rev 14:1-3, Rev 15:1-3, Rev 5:9)

Do had learned from experience that Ti was his Older Member aka Heavenly Father. Ti never talked that way. It was also Ti who told the student body that we needed to make our commitment to Do because Do was our Older Member (Father). That made Ti the equivalent of our “Grandfather” though we never referred to them in those terms. We either addressed them as Ti, or Do or if referring to them together, TI and DO, or “Links” written as “Lnks” which they preferred because it didn’t emphasize them except in the way they hoped to be Chain Links to their Older Members in the chain of Mind/Spirit to the Chief of Chiefs, the Oldest Member of the Next Level. They also talked about this as their wanting to be “pipes” that were so “clear” none of their Mind would dilute the Holy Mind they received from their Older Member in the Heavens.

Incidentally, it was documented that around the summer solstice of 1024 an Italian priest established what was called the solfege (do, re, mi, fa, so, la, ti, do) as a way to learn musical scales, which might be an example of how a Next Level crew was preparing for the fulfillment of prophecy at the return of the Older Members and student crew to be the name of the “song,” as was previously the “song of Moses” and the “song of Jesus.” Ti’s vehicle was not a musician but she always compared the overcoming lesson plan they were administering to their student body to a “piano roll,” and to be like singing the song, Old McDonald’s Farm, that went:

Old McDonald had a farm E I, E I, OH
and on his farm he had a cow E I, E, I OH
with a Moo Moo here and a Moo Moo there
here a moo there a moo everywhere a moo moo

Old McDonald had a farm E I, E I, OH
and on his farm he had a pig, E I, E, I OH
with a Oink Oink here and a Oink Oink there
here a Oink there a Oink everywhere a Oink Oink

This would continue adding more barn yard animal tones as parts of the overall Song, each of which were actually Lesson Steps being added to the list, not dropping the earlier lesson steps and continuing to practice them in the Overcoming Song. Say for instance a lesson was to only say, “yes, no or I don’t know” while talking to one another, which was an early lesson step. Then lets say the next lesson step was to put “I could be wrong” in front of everything we say that requires a judgment to get us in the habit of losing self, as Jesus also taught as “deny self” and “thy will be done.” Students would continue applying these lesson steps until TI and DO said to stop or gave an update so to change to, which with the “yes, no, I don’t know” lesson step did change so we ceased saying only those responses if more words were needed to perform the task.

In 1987 (after Ti’s exit of her incarnation to be explained later) when Do was examining going public again (by then over ten years since we had held a public meeting), he had us test the waters by briefly starting a project with the name, “Anonymous Sexaholics Celibate Church,” taken from the 12 Step programs geared to those who believed they were sex addicts. In around 1989 as part of the book we published called, “The Transfiguration Diet,” taken in part from the work of Dr. John Christopher’s Mucous-less Diet System, we used the name, “Littlegreen, Inc. Think Tank.” Then around 1990 because of dietary experimentation with raw food diets for health – to get the most out of our vehicles Do said because we didn’t know how long we would be on earth, and because of the need to buy vegetables in bulk for our population that was down to about 30 students, to help offset expenses, we started a company called, “Advanced Life Extension Research Team” (ALERT) and sold off surplus organic vegetables at a San Diego area farmers market.

In 1992 when Do started the project to make video tapes that became the series called, “Beyond Human – The Last Call” that was uploaded for satellite broadcast (before the Internet) to provide a way for people who had a satellite dish, who might see the video, a way to contact us, used the name, “Total Overcomers Anonymous” (TOA) and provided a Post Office box people could write to. Finally in March of 1997, 2 1/2 years after I left them, as the last part of their Seven, international in scope, public offerings of TI and DO’s  information, they became known as “Heaven’s Gate” and in much of the media “The Heavens Gate Cult.” Do and Crew understood and didn’t object to being called a cult, but said they were actually the “Cult of Cults” and the “Cult of Truth,” definitely an ultimate subculture.

It’s interesting to me that I am going through a final edit on this book during the time I have documented as the approaching Revelations 6:7-8 “opening” of the “Fourth Seal” that is depicted as the “Green horse” (in most Bible translations says “pale horse” which there is little evidence behind using that term, even though the human who fulfills that task on behalf of the Luciferian Space Aliens could be described best as “pale” that also relates to their name of “death.”) This all relates directly to the Ceres/Demeter “goddess of the Harvest,” where a goddess is the “bride of God,” which will be described in detail in the pages to come. But my point here is how I recently contracted Lymes disease from a tick bite and chose to treat the disease with the dietary regimen layed out in the “Transfiguration Diet,” the book Do and crew wrote while I was still with in Do’s classroom. The wording of the books author was, “Little Green, Inc.” which is interesting given how TI and DO always talked about how the Next Level Crew would even have fun interjecting little clues to their presence, through seeing to it that certain words became used or even popular. Even the word “Little” reflects on the same word used to describe what I believe is this book as shown in Revelations chapter 10.

I.D.2. TI and DO’S TERMINOLOGY CHANGES AND CONCEPT UPDATES

TI and DO changed a great deal of terminology. Granted some will see these and think, “brainwashing techniques” and they will be exactly right, except it was voluntarily washing of our own brains, (part of the real basis of Baptism – cleaning one’s house under the instructions from the most currently incarnate Older Members) using the techniques and replacements of terms and ideas with those TI and DO gave us. This is actually quite scriptural as Jesus required of his disciples to “deny themselves,” in other words give their life over to the Kingdom of God’s hands 100%, also stated in the Lord’s Prayer talking to “our Father who is in Heaven, saying, THY WILL BE DONE ON EARTH AS IT IS IN HEAVEN,” though when a Representative from that Kingdom is incarnate then for those feeling called to be with Him/Them, the process is to give Them charge of us – our will. There never has been any evidence that TI and DO did the brainwashing for us. Do even said once that if he could do it for us, he would, but then it wouldn’t work. Brainwashing was illustrated by Jesus as “washing our robes,” “sweeping out our house,” becoming “pure of heart,” “becoming as little children.” Now the religions certainly do plenty of brainwashing but with theirs some teach that Jesus did it for us and even will program people to think you are doing something wrong to try to mimic what he taught and did, as if you were “working” for the reward. That is complete misinformation like in James letters where he says, “faith is dead without works – service, making changes in thinking, and acting (repentance).

TI and DO called their new terminology, “generic” (which I related to the Jesus prophecy that said upon He and His Father’s return He would show us plainly about the Father and would no longer speak in parables). The use of new terms they provided impart a more accurate understanding than what our brains had become inundated with, thus because of that programming the new terms are actually more REAL and thus truthful to what the Kingdom of God/Heaven – Next Level Above Human really requires of it’s prospective new members. That old terminology stemmed from what worked in the past to bring humans thinking closer to reality at that time but the translators who didn’t have first hand experience with Jesus couldn’t help but begin to distort the truth and especially when influenced by the Luciferian Space Alien Souls. They didn’t really stand a chance not to distort much, nonetheless the Next Level helped them keep most quotes of Jesus still accurate. For instance Jesus use of “Father” (Greek Pater from the Hebrew Abba) was less mystical and prone to superstition than the previous name, Jehovah, which meant “I Exist” or “I Am.” Now one could relate to this individual in the way a child relates to their familial parent. So clearer yet is the phrase TI and DO used, “Older Member.”

Terminology is important to our recognition of reality. We all have preconceived judgments when we hear certain terms. Heaven conjures up a relationship to religions and because of how they have become distorted institutions  from what really happened, though founded on reality of what was provided to the human kingdom, turns many people off as they see the way religious think and act as archaic, superstitious and thereby understandably not grounded in as much reality. But this is what new Representatives come in part to do, that is, to upgrade our thinking to something closer to their reality so we can better have a chance to choose what to believe or not. There is nothing wrong with religious terminology until it becomes a limitation to what is most real and to what someone is willing to consider, because it wasn’t stated in the terms they deem were from God, which will be according to what they were taught from the records in history they grew up with. Thus someone will refer to God as the Father or Jehovah or Allah or Vishnu or Buddha, etc. and all could be referring to the same “creators” of our reality but will often fight over whose terminology is better when they all lack the most accurate understanding which the new representatives then come to update.

Thus some of TI and DO’s new terms and updated definitions follow:

– THE EVOLUTIONARY LEVEL ABOVE HUMAN, or Physical Evolutionary Kingdom Level Above Human, also said as The LEVEL ABOVE HUMAN or The NEXT LEVEL which is equivalent to the Kingdom of God or Kingdom of Heaven also said as the Kingdom in the literal heavens.

The NEXT LEVEL in evolution in the stepwise evolutionary process. That’s not Darwinian evolution. Darwin only recognized some of the built in adaptability in the species which later was recognized as genetic and even later was realized can be changed sometimes by a person’s change of behavior and ways and even thinking. TI and DO spoke about the various “kingdom levels” as the Mineral, Plant, Animal, Human and then the Next Level Above Human.

– GOD – A member of the Next Level is a God compared to any human because they have overcome the human kingdom and are now part of the Family that create humans and their environments to give them opportunities to grow towards their own membership in the Next Level. Jesus referred to this when he spoke about how John the Baptist, as among those born of women was the greatest human but that EVERYONE in the Kingdom of God/Heaven was greater than he. Also graduating members are referred to as “kings” who are given tasks that reign or rule over humans. It’s not that these are control freaks, they simply work for the Older Members and therefore administer Their instructions that provide the criteria for who in the human kingdom is “coming up” (as a plant sprouting) and who is not. The membership have immense hearts, so to speak, and will do everything in their power , the powers that the Older Members give them, to help those that ask them for help. When TI and DO were asked if there was “fun” in the Next Level, they said, “yes, but it’s a different kind of fun” and they compared it to a “horse that has fun romping around the field.” It may not look like that much fun to a human but to them it is great fun.

– OLDER MEMBER = a Heavenly Father – because they are literally on a spacecraft in the near or outer literal heavens aka space. Their domain is not limited to a terrestrial domain though they can dwell on or inside a terrestrial body.

Do would be the Older Member to those coming up from the human evolutionary level. Do knew Ti to be his Older Member, the one that birthed him into the Next Level. Ti didn’t tell him that. He learned it from working with Ti as they were awakening to their task and he saw that wherever decisions needed to be made, she summed up the circumstance faster and more accurately without having to experience it. It was the same for information and in other ways, students may not be aware of. He said he gave her a hard time for their initial wake up time together on the road before they eventually came public in 1975. He told the story of how at one point, Ti sat on the curb of the road and said she wasn’t taking another step. Do did most of the talking in public and in meetings with the student body because he was closer to the student’s ways of thinking so could serve them better where Ti would say things with a lot less words that students would often not know what she meant by. She also said from the beginning, “I’m here to get you started and then I’m going back.” Do always silently wondered, “going back to what, your vehicle’s family?,” which didn’t make any sense to him. When she left her physical body in 1985 ahead of him, he knew what she meant even though she didn’t have that method of exit on her mind exactly either. There were just many things Ti knew that she couldn’t explain the details of or how she knew it. She just did and often said what was on her mind. She told me once that I “looked green” and I asked her what she meant and she said, “You just look green to me.” It was years later that I wondered if she could see the degree to which I was jealous of students that had more tasks to do directly with them.

– RECORD = The Bible and all related documents linked to Jesus, (i.e. Dead Sea Scrolls, etc.)

– VEHICLE = A human body – This is referred to in the records as “clothing” or “raiment” or a “robe” as Members of the Next Level WEAR a body. They are actually not that body. They are the pilot of the body they are assigned. TI and DO talked about it as compared to the way a human puts on a diving suit to function underwater or a space suit to function outside the Earth’s environment and the like. In the Next Level, individuals have different “clothing” that relates to their tasks. TI and DO even said that if someone chose to enter the department of transportation they could be given a suit/body to occupy that is actually a living biological spacecraft that can do many things among the simple transport of crew members to their various assignments.

– MIND = SPIRIT = the information, programs, thinking, behaviors and ways. There are two types of mind, human and Next Level. Human mind consists of all things human beings think about and do that don’t show a direct relationship to the Next Level. Human mind is mammalian. For instance, wanting to know the truth about where we as a species and our reality came from is Next Level related as mammals don’t wonder such things unless they are stimulated to think such things. Feeling that you don’t fit in anywhere in this world is a Next Level feeling stimulated by the fact that there is more to life than what can be found in the human kingdom. Believing it is wrong for a human being to kill another human being comes from Next Level instructions and is therefore Next Level thinking. Mammals don’t have that kind of morality. The Next Level and their incarnate representatives are not held to the instructions they give to humans. However, nor do they use or abuse others. They provide a free will environment and when humans make choices, they do use those choices for the benefit of the entire garden like experiment. For instance those that interfere with the progress of those they are working to bring closer to the possibility of being born into Next Level membership, if it serves to do so could be killed before their time, so to speak. After all they designed humans with a limited life span, so at most they are accelerating the end of that life span for those they know have become weeds in their garden. Of course the weeds of the garden will be critical of the gardener’s eradication of them and today the records of Jehovah/Moses “classroom” demonstrate a great deal of this kind of weeding out of the equivalent of tares among the wheat the Next Level plans to bring to harvest. This subject is further confused because of the Luciferian fallen angels and how they influence certain humans to think they are ordained to decide upon life and death of others who don’t meet their criteria and follow their laws and/or their interpretation of the Next Level’s laws, which Jesus came to upgrade that even many Christians cling to, largely ignoring what Jesus came to upgrade.

– NEXT LEVEL MIND = “holy Spirit,” where holy refers to purity by the Next Level’s standards, which relates to not containing any human mammalian mind/spirit. Jesus referred to Next Level Mind as “new wine” and at times as “blood” as it is the lifeblood of every member of the Next Level to share as every member only cares to be a link or pipe that Mind can flow though.

– SOUL (and it’s content of MIND/SPIRIT) Do described as a “pillow case” or pocket or container that is given/gifted to a human being that Jesus referred to when it is first given, as a “seed” in the Parable of the Sower (Mat 13:3-23) and then once it is being grown to a “new bottle,” aka a leather bag or wineskin. (Mat 9:17). Do described a human vehicle as a glass vase whose mind/spirit (memory, “computer” was contained within, as if there was a balloon in the vase. He said, when a Soul pocket/container is given, that vase then has two balloons in it. However, a “Soul” actually has it’s own “brain” or “hard drive” that accumulates only information of the Next Level – mundane as well as theoretical or philosophical) which is why Jesus talked about how it is Spirit/Mind that animates (quickens) the flesh but has no long term profit in it UNLESS one accepts his words (Mind/Spirit) because they are living because they yield life. (Joh 6:63). In other words what comes from the Older Member (Father) as Behaviors and Ways and Instructions, concepts, ideas, etc. are Life providing Spirit/Mind because we can only LIVE (beyond the grave) if we become changed by being filled with his Mind/Spirit – information. Using he words our Older Members give us, not like parrots, though nothing wrong with that when we know it’s from them (as translations can lose a certain amount) helps us bond with that Older Member by following all the provided instructions that when maintained until we exit our vehicles will work towards our eventual graduation (harvest) into membership in the Next Level.

The Soul becomes part of the new creatures new physical. It is not often seen by humans. When a Soul is newly deposited, it is very small and contains only a small amount of data so is a Next Level kind of “fetus.” When it grows it must cause human mind to be aborted. That human mind is in a container right next to the soul container. Do compared the human body to a glass vase and the soul container and human mind container to balloons in that vase. At the start of the overcoming process referred to by TI and DO as a literal metamorphosis, the human balloon is mostly full and the Next Level container is near empty. As we adopt the behavior and ways and instructions, examples, words, concepts provided by the most current Older Member (still pertains to Do even though he has exited his incarnation) the Soul grows larger and the human container smaller. When the soul is ready to be “born” the human balloon being deflated is discarded. At that point that Soul filled with it’s Next Level mind had become a physical body in a new species and it will be rewarded with a new physical outer shell when they physically enter the Next Level. Entering the Next Level takes place by separating from the human vehicle/container that is seen by humans as death and that new Soul body will be helped to rendezvous in the “clouds,” what is actually a mothership for a briefing and journey to the Kingdom of the literal heavens.

Ti always said, referring to Next Level Mind/Spirit and Human mind/spirit, that “oil and water don’t mix” to where the Oil was Next Level Mind and the Water was human mind. It was only years after I left and I began to study scripture that I saw the references to how Jesus talked about his disciples needing to be “born of water” (again) so they could be “born of spirit/mind,” by filling their Soul container with Next Level Mind/information that includes their behaviors and ways which have no human mammalian characteristics.

The PROCESS aka The OVERCOMING PROCESS that TI and DO also described as an “ASTRONAUT TRAINING PROGRAM” to sufficiently get rid of ALL human mind (to the incarnate Older Member’s standards as one’s spirit birth midwife) to include:

1) THINKING ABOUT THE PAST (memories) in terms of relationships, pursuits, hobbies, habits, past times, likes and dislikes

2) BEHAVIORS – sensuality to include; sexuality, anger, ego, consuming food for pleasure verses to live, It’s not that all pleasures are to be overcome. It’s that one must accept ONLY the pleasures provided by the Older Members, that is when One wants to be in their program to graduate the human kingdom. And it’s not that one would not enjoy what they eat, but part of the program is to even learn to enjoy or at least tolerate whatever the Older Member is given to give to the students. The Older Members don’t abuse their students like by making them eat worms and things we see humans do on television. About the worse thing I tried to like was okra and it wasn’t served for very long. I got to where I could tolerate it and not gag from eating it. No one stood over us to make sure we ate stuff. Most of what we did or didn’t do was on the honor system. Our Older Member also does everything they expect us to do. For some students eating any flesh food was against their previous mindset which had to be overcome. But TI and DO worked very hard to insure that what we consumed was well prepared and tasty and generally acceptable, though of course there was always someone who had a problem with certain foods (not like allergic reactions) and for them it was a greater challenge to fight against their programming that disliked something.

3) WAYS (deceit, competitiveness, being overly pleased with self, wanting to be seen as something special, self absorbed, gossipy, so one is deflating that balloon, which has no value to the Next Level unless that same human fills their “Soul” balloon with Next Level mind which is why a Next Level Older Member needs to be physically with those coming through this process to show them how by being their example by their getting rid of their human mind and filling up their vehicle with their Next Level mind, accomplishing the process once again which Jesus completed when he said he had “overcome the world.” (Joh 16:33).

On the Heavensgate.com web site one can still freely download a .zip file that contains two files, one of which is entitled, “The 17 Steps” which came early on in the classroom and then the “Major and Minor Offense List” that show the various standards in TI and DO’s classroom. All the files are also provided on my blog since I have nothing to do with the web site. Links to my blog and specific files are in my Appendix.

– To TAKE OVER or BORROW a human vehicle or even somewhat humorously, because of the related Science Fiction movie, “Body Snatcher” describes the way a Soul who is brought back to have another experience in flesh again, aka coming “in-carnal” – Latin “carne” meaning “flesh,” becomes “Incarnate” when that Soul has brought it’s Next Level Mind into that new prepared vehicle, while the vehicles “Spirit” agrees to cooperate with giving their will to the Older Member. In the Record incarnating is also referred to as to “stand up” which is one of the meanings that was translated to Resurrection, with the “re” part reflective of “again,” so “Stand up Again.” Jesus referred to “fishing” for men and the term Rapture really means to be “caught away” from the world which is what happens when we awaken to our smelling salts and we join literally with the Older Member. Since the Older Members are no longer incarnate ones rapture would be when and if they separate from their human lives. That may not happen right away or to the full degree it needs to eventually, but as long as we are doing the best we can and know the formula and recognize our Older Members we can ask them, using their names to help us.

TI and DO said that reincarnation as it is taught by Eastern Religions is not accurate. Each human vehicle has it’s own Mind/Spirit that develops as the vehicle grows and accepts or rejects various programming from their parents, families and society. That spirit does survive death of the vehicle but can never become the spirit of another body UNLESS it takes over that new body by convincing or overriding the mind of the new body. They said that humans were really time shared computer like systems and that what we really are is only the “decider” in that we can choose which thoughts, behaviors and ways to embrace and make our own or not accept or get rid of throughout life. They called dead humans, “Influences” because that’s what they do when they come around any human. They try to influence them to their thoughts, behaviors and ways they accepted (believed in) while alive as that is the only way they can be. They can not change any longer. They can either help or hinder a human. It depends on what we allow. If we have bad thoughts, like of harming someone, the more we linger on those thoughts the more hold they have on us and the more we can find ourselves acting out those thoughts. TI and DO said, we are not responsible for the thoughts that enter our consciousness but we are responsible for allowing those thoughts to stay with us and become part of our programming that become harder and harder to reverse and get rid of, to where we can even be more prone to act them out even though they once could have been thought abhorrent to act out.

I believe an example of how the current human society have accepted more and more thoughts that before now most would not have permitted to take hold of them, is in the huge increase of frequency of more or less random or spontaneous mass killings, seen mostly among youth.

Psychologists and law enforcement and educators come up with all sorts of reasons to include the way violence against others dominates much of the computer gaming world and is even realized and acted out in the military with drone strikes from a cubicle in Nevada terrorizing and bombing people in Pakistan, Afghanistan and Yemen and wherever the leadership decides. Young humans are being trained to accept these kinds of thoughts of justifications for horrendous crimes, which they are then more prone to act out when they become angry for any reason. They are literally being “possessed” by a mindset and what many don’t understand is that for every mindset there are many, many discarnates that will gravitate to the human being that is willing to act upon it, further influencing them to do so, which used to be called being possessed by an evil spirit. And isn’t it interesting that even in many of the spiritual and religious mindsets, the reality of these “discarnates” and the great influence they have over humans in ALL areas of life, both positive and negative, is largely ignored and disregarded, except in movies and such, so that anyone that suggests spirit possession is seen as a fanatic of some sort.

Of course in the U.S. this spirit/mind possession, no matter how one explains it or what they believe as a root cause will not stop it with gun laws or knife laws or curfews or banning of violent video gaming, though they will try because to some degree it can be happening in many human heads as the mindsets/discarnates that influence us can not be turned off except by each person’s conscious effort to “just say no,” to repeat that popular phrase, but MUST go hand in hand with not justifying any violence or mental and physical abuses against fellow humans, as the Lord commanded. And frankly that’s not going to happen as the great majority of the people who have the most power in this human world are possessed with justifications galore for murder and abuse of others, not knowing that they are literally under the spell of the Luciferian space alien fallen angels and all their billions of discarnate minions who believed what they programmed them to believe while living who are saturating every brain with their justifications and judgments and measure of others. And of course to most even mention of that name Lucifer and/or Space Aliens is laughed at as having no basis in reality, which is exactly the way those “fallen angels” want them to remain, so they can be used to forward their agenda of combating the Next Level and trying to get off this planet where they have been imprisoned for millennium.

Thus a huge part of the Overcoming Process is cleaning out our brain/mind of all our past associations and replacing that mind with the (Above human (holy)) Mind, the thoughts, behaviors and ways from our Older Members. TI and DO said that in this civilization it took three periods of time, they referred to as “trimesters,” resembling the trimesters in a human birth to bring a Soul from it’s first deposit into a human vehicle to harvest after at least two more experiences of that Soul taking over a human vehicle, which is called “overcoming the (human) world. This took place over thousands of human years.

– CLASSROOM = The experiential environment for learning Next Level behaviors and ways that included meetings where lesson material was introduced and then “labs” where lesson material was experienced. The environment was not constructed. It was simply using the same things any human being has to do to survive and thrive to include, eating, sleeping, cleaning, working jobs, maintenance, relaxation, exercise, fun, administrative, medical, etc. As we lived as a commune though at times in different houses in different parts of a city and even for brief periods in different states around the United States, though mostly all west of the Mississippi River, many of these activities were departmentalized and named as Labs, short for laboratory as TI and DO said that’s what the Next Level environments consist of…labs for various task like the Earth’s weather or geographic systems, to name a few. In this way a house became called a “craft” short for spacecraft because wherever Next Level Members work, they are on some type of craft that can be as large as a planet. Some are as follows:

– Nutri Lab = Kitchen, as in Nutrition Lab. Before the group moved into houses we lived in little tent cities on leased ranch lands in Wyoming and Texas. We had two very large tents. One was green and it was used for what humans would call the mess hall. We had gas powered stove tops and an oven inside a little camper. TI and DO had a tiny camper. The remaining 70 or less students lived two to a tent. This is when TI and DO introduced food as “fuel” and the preparation as “experiments” with the recipe written as a formula, so that “MP + BR = body changes,” where MP stood for mashed potatoes and GB for green beans that together as a meal would bring about body changes, changing our (water/womb mammalian based) human mind out for Next Level Above Human Mind/Spirit that filled our Soul pocket which was the body that was changing though we didn’t have these understandings of the differentiations between Mind, Spirit and Soul at that time.

– Yeast Lab – where bread and cinnamon rolls and other bakery goods were made.
– Fiber Lab = laundry.
– Impro Lab = I never did know for sure what this represented but the crew that were assigned tasks cleaned and maintained the fleet of automobiles, did carpentry, grounds keeping and such.

– Luciferian – First off Do said that there is nothing wrong with the name Lucifer or Lucy and that it is a beautiful name that from the Hebrew means . It comes from “light bearer,” or “brilliant star.”

However, a Luciferian is a fallen angel Soul. Any human or human equivalent space alien who took the opportunity offered by the Next Level Older Members to be in a third trimester Next Level classroom with an incarnate Older Member from the Next Level, whether on Earth or on an equivalent “garden,” and subsequently dropped out of believing in, following and serving that Older Member was choosing to disconnect to their Next Level source and thereby become a fallen angel.

Now in the case of this “fallen angel,” named Lucifer, he had advanced to a certain grade in the overall human overcoming school to where he was provided a physical body designed for him by the Next Level and some elementary service in a crew on board spacecrafts, as a “watcher,” that may have had similar characteristics as the vehicle provided that was named Adam (man). I say this in part because of things TI and DO said in the Blackhawk audio tapes that also indicated that the experiment to test Adam as to subject other equivalent student level members of the Next Level to the same influence Lucifer fell because of, which Lucifer embodied in his Soul body. Thus I wondered if Adam’s vehicle was a type of match for the vehicle Lucifer received so the test would be equivalent to what Lucifer chose to fall because of not conquering. TI and DO didn’t get into this to this detail so I could be wrong.

That vehicle named Adam received his Soul seed, when he received the “breath of life through his nostrils” from his Older Member, the seed giver. I believe that was addressing whatever kind of Soul “deposit” was put into Adam’s Next Level vehicle. It wouldn’t be an adult Next Level vehicle as my understanding is that such a vehicle didn’t have the capacity to fall back into human mammalian behavior and ways as Adam did and the “watchers” Enoch listed did. Do said that Adams vehicle went through a type of reverse metamorphosis that didn’t take very long to occur.

-Ti took a vehicle whose name was related to a plant that shoots it’s seed into the air for distribution (Jesus says the seed is sown into one’s heart – Mat 13:19)

Ti chose a human physical vehicle named, Bonnie Lu Nettles. The plant Nettles is a unique variety of plant form that stands apart from other plants in the way it spreads it’s seeds. It shoots it’s seeds out into the air which is why it’s considered to be classified as an “artillery plant” as opposed to most of the plant species that distribute their seeds when the bees transport them or when the wind picks them up or an animal brushes against the flower or they fall to the ground around them. Do knew that Ti was his Older Member and part of the reason Jesus used the term “Father” was both to portray the parenting role they perform for new students but because the male shoots their sperm into the female egg of the human species to fertilize it, so I guess a human is an artillery plant. TI and DO did say that humans were plants, even though one could not see their root system and there are many references in the New and Old Testaments to humans being as “grass” or as “leaves.” TI and DO also referred to humans as “seed bearing plants” and as “perennials” in how the leaf dies but then the same human tree provides new leaves (vehicles) and in that way, there is a method to literally evolve both physically and even more so mentally as all data is saved in the human gnome (brain) of each cell.

Ti once surprised me and probably other students by saying that “The Chief still loves Lucifer” though his actions to choose to turn potential students away from their only chance to evolve out of the human kingdom to be with those that created them is not approved of though it can be turned into a positive. Jesus spoke of this by saying it was necessary for “offenses, stumbling blocks, occasions to fall” to exist but woe to that man that brings those offenses. (Mat 18:7). The Next Level allows Lucifer to continue for a while as he then is presenting the option to even become like him and therefore those that choose to look to the Next Level Older Member’s instructions and help may overcome his influence to strengthen their own Mind which is what is required for graduation into Next Level Membership.

The human civilization is literally run by all those who are known as the Luciferians while tricking humans into not even recognizing their influence or that they exist at all. They are the reason many humans think the Kingdom of God/Heaven is a spiritual realm where members float around among the clouds or have wings. Of course before the Next Level sends their representatives to provide the updates, it’s understood to remain with that understanding however inaccurate. It’s when the truth is provided and we reject it, that we are held responsible for rejecting it. Feeling challenged by the thinking and not feeling like it’s believable is natural to experience. That is far different than absolutely denying the possibility with a willingness to allow it to become a reality in our consciousness. Do said that upon awakening not a day passed that he didn’t wonder about his sanity and both TI and DO said early on that if anyone could prove them wrong about anything they were saying, they wanted them to, so they could change. They also said that if they met someone who knew more than they knew about these matters, they would follow that individual for as long as they kept on learning from them.

– CHRIST – LIGHT – Jesus spoke of how one needed to make their eye single so that their entire body would be filled with light. Filling ones vessel/body containing it’s gifted Soul=”pocket/container” with “light” in it’s primary application is the ‘overcoming/”process” of the human world’.

This process consists of the consumption (eating) of the Older Member’s (holy) Mind (spirit),” broken down to the practical “words/instructions/commandments” from the Older Members that when received (believed)(consumed/eaten) AND applied (acted upon) – given out, as Jesus said, putting one’s LIGHT “on a candlestick showing it’s “good” (utility) “works”(service) yields a “Mind/Spirit birth,” the “metamorphic” transformation of a “caterpillar)” into a “butterfly,” a new creature that has been lifted up (resurrected from it’s previous lifestyle limitations.

Serving the Older Members is the mechanism of that metamorphosis. One who is believing in all that the Older Members say is literally filling their Soul pocket/container with “oil” but to produce “light” that “oil” needs to be utilized, “burned” – exhausted through the provision of the particular service the Next Level Older Members prescribe, otherwise nothing (darkness) comes from one’s exhaustion of their “oil.”

Jesus used the illustration of the “virgins” keeping oil in their lamps as the preparation to have the light (understanding/comprehension to recognize the Bridegroom they seek to wed. He used “virgins” as because those who are not giving their energy (oil) away, via procreative processes to include sexuality are keeping that oil in their lamps and they can literally SEE better because of doing so. This is why Jesus taught that in the regeneration upon his return, his disciples would not be marrying, which also meant they would not be procreating or giving away their energy/oil in sexuality or in any otherwise considered “normal” human passionate expressions. This is for his students (disciples). It doesn’t mean these who become his students, before they become students will not be fully engaged in various human activities. It’s once they commit to being a student that the Older Members will wean them from giving their “oil” away, while channeling it into serving the Next Level program they administer, which is both in overcoming their humanness, to include the desires for human relationships and expressions to even overcoming one’s own ingrained sense of self preservation which is most evident when the students are sent to share the “light” they receive from their Older Members to a largely hostile to that light society. This is all “giving one’s life” to the Older Members and literally results in the loss of one’s human life, even in the physical sense by doing so that is actually a graduation requirement to lose, as Jesus also taught. (Jhn 10:15–18, Jhn 14:12, Mrk 13:20, Jhn 12:25, Rev 14:13)

METAMORPHOSIS FROM CATERPILLAR (HUMAN BEING) TO BUTTERFLY (ABOVE HUMAN BEING)

This is why “Christing” or “christening,” which means “one who is anointed with oil” is likened to the way the caterpillar enters the chrysalis. It is no longer operating in normal caterpillar ways. It’s isolating itself and all it’s energy is spent in it’s metamorphosis into the butterfly and that cocoon that consists of it’s old body is left behind when the butterfly with it’s new and improved body emerges. Thus a “Christ” is anyone who comes through this equivalent metamorphic process BUT one can’t come through such a process on their own and unless it’s led by someone who has completed their own Christing, even many times before, it is not a genuine christening.

And there are stages and one can not bypass a stage and each stage is designed by the Older Member but the process goes like this:

A human hears the words of the Older Members and believes them. They are required by the Older Member to leave all they knew and believed in behind. Those things were not wrong to believe in and occupy themselves with before that but for someone who is drawn to conquer what amounts to their human root system, all those relationships and activities need to be cut off, that is IN THE WAY THE OLDER MEMBERS PRESCRIBE THOSE NEW PROSPECTIVE STUDENTS TO DO SO. Anyone at any time can cut themselves off from their human attachments and that may be to some benefit to their becoming ready to join in an Older Member’s program but without the Older Member’s physical hands on direction their efforts are wasted. And by “hands on” it applies whether the Older Members are still incarnate or not as when Older Members leave, they also leave their record that teaches the stage of the process. Obviously one can not leave the world to be with an Older Member that is no longer incarnate, but they can follow in every one of that Older Member’s footsteps according to what the Older Member prescribed for them upon their exit and that will be the lessons they need at that time. If one is not abiding in the directions of the Older Member then they would not be getting the ingredients they most need that will find them in “good stead” with the Older Members when they do come incarnate again and the students Soul is brought back to have a chance to be in their classroom.

It becomes a facsimile overcoming chrysalis building process even if it’s for a teacher/guru, UNLESS that teacher is sent from the Evolutionary Level Above Human.

SEEKERS CAN BECOME TRAPPED BY SPIRITUAL OR METAPHYSICAL AND/OR RELIGIOUS TEACHERS WHO ARE UNKNOWING PROMOTING A FACSIMILE OF A NEXT LEVEL OVERCOMING OF HUMANNESS PROGRAM.

What often happens to many is that they are among the humans that are responding to the presence of the “light” in the Earth’s immediate atmosphere, before the Older Members have come incarnate. So they join this and that teacher of a metaphysical or spiritual belief and practice, and it yields an uplift to their consciousness because they are focusing the “light” through various techniques that can even include isolation from society and otherwise normal human behaviors and ways in the world as in monasteries and ashrams, etc. But then when the only true Older Members from the Next Level come, which when they come will bring updates to all that had been taught till then, with new terminology and concepts that separates them from all the spiritual/metaphysical teachers teachings (though will have many aspects in common, as that is where those other teachers originally got their ideas/teachings, however then distorted into a “path”). Like TI and DO said, “all paths lead to the top of the mountain but there is only one way off” and that must be provided by someone who is off the mountain.

Each seeker if they remain a seeker will come to hear about the Older Members and when they do will be faced with whether to believe in them or not. This can take place many times through one’s lifetime as the Older Members give all humans many chances to gravitate to them. But what takes place many times is that the seeker, having found a practice or group or teacher they have bonded to, fears the loss of what they have gained that they can feel is threatened by considering what these new teachers are saying so they justify not considering them further. However, generally speaking they have until they die to reconsider, though putting off the choice to believe or not, only makes it harder to change from what’s become comfortable.

– SPACE ALIENS – Are all “fallen angels” – they are human equivalent beings that had their genetic origin either from a different planetary system or from a previous to the current civilization. The Next Level starts and stops civilizations as a matter of course. TI and DO said they didn’t know how many civilizations there have been on Earth but thought there were probably many, yet it didn’t matter except to know that there was at least one before the current one. The Next Level allows some of the humans who lived in a previous civilization, at least on Earth, to physically survive the spading under of their civilization so they can be allowed to come out of their underground hiding places to provide an influence to those humans in their new garden human overcoming experiments. This way a human has the choice to even go against their own creators. However, they see to it that it’s an even playing field and they give each human many opportunities to see the truth of the Next Level’s existence.

I.D.3. PRIMER OF TI and DO’S INITIAL TEACHINGS

Below is “Statement I” – written by Do between September of 1974 and March of 1975 that was mailed out to dozens of religious and spiritual leaders and their groups in March of 1975 that days later stimulated their first invitation to talk to a group. That first talk in Los Angeles resulted in several dozen prospective students, who left all behind to join with TI and DO. This led to becoming a National (and to some degree International) “mystery” of a news story as no one knew where these dozens of people were vanishing to. This was their gathering of their sheep which technically lasted into June of 1976 to end their 1260 days of prophecy that began January 1, 1973. When TI and DO wrote this, though through Do’s hand, they thought students would be picked up by a spacecraft (cloud of light) before their physical death. Even before they exited by laying down their human bodies lives in 1997 they still prepared in such a way in case the Next Level (Kingdom of God/Heaven Older Member (Ti)) wanted to pick them up with their physical bodies and even do a resurrection demonstration.

There were a few ideas in this statement that Ti and then Do later updated. Their awakening was in stages and continued every day. It wasn’t like you see in movies to where they are walking along or in a meditative trance and suddenly get hit by a lightning bolt of awareness as if they took LSD or something to where thereafter they understood everything about everything. That’s an illusion and Jesus didn’t experience that either. The proof of that is this. It was told that when Jesus was twelve years old he spent three days in the temple in Jerusalem amidst doctors listening to them and asking them questions. When his parents who had left Jerusalem realized he wasn’t with them or kinsfolk and acquaintances they went back to find him and told him of their sorrow in not finding him, was documented in:

Luk 2:49 And he said unto them, How is it that ye sought me? wist ye not that I must be about my Father’s business?

If he knew everything why was he listening and asking questions? Then Luke goes on to report:

Luk 2:52 And Jesus increased in wisdom and stature, and in favour with God and man.

This was his awakening, actually not any different than any human being that is gradually coming into adulthood and all that brings with it, except he was special in that regard having been specially conceived. It’s only in the last 30 or 40 years that humans have had success with artificial insemination to where one could imagine the Next Level’s ability to bring about the inception of a baby by some alternatives to intercourse. There was certainly a function to Jesus’ special conception however it was accomplished and with what seed. I have wondered if the Next Level kept some of Moses or Elijah’s seed, the same way humans store sperm for just such a purpose. TI and DO thought that Moses physical body was also taken. It just was not something the Next Level wanted to give anyone proof of. After all only Elisha got to experience Elijah’s physical body being taken up. And we don’t know who might have witnessed Enoch’s body being “taken.” But considering the way we know genes change throughout life and how genes contain far more than just eye color in the chromosomes as was first thought but probably contain a full record of everything a human being experiences during life, using seed from one of the last servants from the Kingdom of God/Heaven might make some sense as otherwise there would be generations of experiences that say Joseph’s strain might have had to cloud Jesus remembrances. TI and DO never spoke to this that I was aware of, but that doesn’t mean there can’t be some accuracy to it. But accurate or not, it provides a way of thinking about something in a new way, at least it was new for me so sets us up to “wake up more” to what could have occurred in the past and to what is challenging to conceive of now and in the future as we all can always awaken to know more.

TI and DO always said that they didn’t know everything. They said they only knew what they needed to know to perform their task. They said there were many tasks the Next Level crew performs that they don’t know about though sometimes get glimpses of. They also said they did know where to do to get answers to any question though they also talked about how some questions are not right for them to know answers to at certain times. They would ask questions and not get any response. They said sometimes their Older Member on their spacecraft/lab wasn’t “picking up the phone” when they would ring them. They also said that on some questions they would re-examine what it was they wanted to know and would rephrase it or ask it at a later time but they wouldn’t be pests about asking constantly and we have to provide time to receive the answers in the various ways in which they received answers. They never received answers by a voice in one’s head or in some audible way but did come as thoughts but they didn’t indicate answers coming to them in dreams, though I do recall both TI and DO telling us about some of their dreams that did provide clues. They said all along that dream time is among other things a time when the Next Level can prepare someone for the next day’s lessons but that the lower forces can also use dream time to try to influence us so they didn’t trust dreams 100%. Nor did they trust every thought they had as the lower forces certainly can put thoughts into our heads. They said that is one of the reasons they both came this time, saying that the civilization had become so corrupted with the thoughts of the Luciferian space alien fallen angels that includes billions of discarnates that it was like a dense static that made it that much more difficult to think clearly, even though humans don’t know any better about all that because the discarnates are all invisible and many don’t have a clue as to how that world influences us all constantly.

TI and DO said that humans were all like computer systems that allowed time sharing of their brain/body by whatever thought is sent to us via whatever method – discarnate or otherwise. They said we are only the “decider” as we choose what thoughts and actions to entertain and/or act upon to make our own. A big part of the overcoming process is to discard all thoughts of our past to have a chance to build a new database consisting of only what our Older Members give us. By our choosing which thoughts to entertain we build who we are and we can change who we are when we don’t like what we have become. Examples of his are quitting nasty habits or disconnecting from people that we feel drag us down or into repeating past behaviors we don’t want to continue in.

But regarding Jesus staged awakening, as was reported most of his Next Level mind came into his vehicle when he came out of the water John the Baptist poured over his head or submerged him under. Some actually saw a “bodily image” descend like a dove on him and heard audible words from the sky, apparently from the one who was called the Father saying this was his son whom he was well pleased with. And then finally another example was when he went up the mountain with James, John and Peter and was instructed that it was time to “lay down his life” to exit, even though he knew that was the plan – he didn’t know when and perhaps exactly how to stimulate his exit. He certainly knew that many of the Jewish priests hated him and wanted him dead and gone as they tried to do a number of times.

In the same way TI and DO were fed information and instructions step by step according to the capacity of the student body to receive certain information. TI and DO always said when they brought us a new understanding that “this works for now and we will bring you updates as we get them.” I provide examples throughout this book.

The subject of space aliens was actually one of those examples that they gained clearer understanding of as time went on. For instance at first they thought that every non-human flying object was a Next Level spacecraft. It was only when they read the myriad of reports that were available and saw some of the behaviors of beings on board spacecrafts that Ti became concerned. I recall her saying that when she got back she will find out who was acting that way because that was not permitted. I believe she was referring to sexual activity reported on many of the abduction reports because there is no sex among Next Level members and they have no need to bring humans on a craft to mate them. That’s what they have the human kingdom for. Later she realized that these were not Next Level members. They realized that these were the space aliens that came from those spoken of in the records as the fallen angels.

So with all that said, here is some of what TI and DO had awakened to, to start their gathering of their sheep in Do’s words but coming from both he and Ti’s mind. After all Ti was Do’s Older Member, which he had awakened to know by the time he wrote this Statement:

I.D.3.a. SUMMARY OF TI and DO’S BEGINNING AND THEIR FIRST PUBLIC STATEMENT

Before the Statement, I, Sawyer who was present with Do for 19 years, (10 of which while Ti was incarnate), starting from September of 1975 when I was handed this Statement I at the meeting I attended in Waldport, Oregon where TI and DO spoke that stimulated the global news story of them as the “UFO Two” am an eye witness to all they said to include this first Statement. I wanted to include this document just the way Do wrote it but because of the way Do’s writings have been copyrighted by others who I can not trust would give me permission to include in my book, because of how they have changed things TI and DO taught and because my book is for sale, (as the best way to distribute it most widely), to not infringe on those human laws I’m re-writing this document in my words. I will try very hard to stick to the equivalent words I heard TI and DO say many times. I wish I didn’t have to do this and the original document can be found contained within the greater document Do wrote about He and Ti’s start, that I encourage everyone to read as there is nothing like reading Do’s actual words in:

’88 Update – The UFO Two and Their Crew, By Do
https://sawyerhg.wordpress.com/2010/03/02/88-update-the-ufo-two-and-their-crew/

Summary of The 88 Update logistics that includes Statement I – (1972 to 1988):

TI and DO are the names they last chose to be called. I will use those names though their physical human vehicles were born as Bonnie Lu Nettles (Ti) and Marshall Herf Applewhite (Do). They were each leading contented lives in Texas. Ti was working in the nursery of a Houston Hospital as a registered nurse and had a little amateur astrology practice on the side and had a husband and 4 children. Do had divorced and had several children but was not living with them anymore and was a professor in the University of St. Thomas teaching singing and music, while was also singing lead roles in the Houston Opera. They met when Do was visiting a sick friend in the hospital where Ti just so happened to be subbing for another nurse and their first conversation surrounded their astrological signs. Do had been interested in astrology. Both were Christians but had explored beyond what fundamentalists would approve of. In fact Do tried to go to seminary to follow in the footsteps of his Presbyterian minister dad and quit in the first year because they were too limiting what they could explore. Ti had been studying Blavatsky’s materials and things like the Mahatma Letters and materials about the ascended masters.

Upon meeting Ti recognized that Do was someone she had something to do with and at first Do thought she was interested him in a human way and wasn’t too keen on it, but also felt he wanted to pursue astrology, his chart and other things she was interested in. Soon they started the Christian Arts Center in the Christian University basement where Do worked but as they were exploring most anything spiritual, they were asked to leave. So they started another center called “KnowPlace” and had some participants while their friends and family and colleagues thought they were having an affair and were being detrimentally influenced by one another.

It got so bad that Ti’s “husband” threatened Do and they got a court order against his coming near Do. They met in late March or early April of 1972. By January 1, 1973 they knew they had to leave all behind to find out what it was they had to do together as the only thing they really had in common was a close relationship with their Heavenly Father.

They went to a farmhouse in Boerne, Texas and that’s where they spent a little less than 6 weeks studying everything they could get their hands on that was spiritual and is where they both started to get the same impressions independent of the other, when they were off in different directions. They never did have any physical relationship and were never “bed partners” at all. Neither were interested in the other in that way and both had no desire for that behavior at that time especially.

The impressions they got were that they had both, their souls, come from outer space and had some updates to the Bible and were here to fulfill prophecy. They began to write a book called, “I Can’t Believe That But You Must” but didn’t complete it and were having a hard time believing this about themselves so was a big painful adjustment to accept. They decided to travel to try to learn what prophecy they were to fulfill so they studied all the books they could find and some months later while camping on the Rogue River, at Gold Beach, Oregon they got the greater part of the picture into their heads. They knew that they were to fulfill the prophecy of the Two Witnesses in the Book of Revelations. They had a hard time accepting that because they always wanted to run the other way when someone would tell them they were the reincarnation of Cleopatra or some other Biblical figure.

They traveled across the U.S. leaving little notes for preachers saying, “the two witnesses were here” and then running out the door before having to talk to anyone. They went to a new age center to talk to the centers leaders and were told the centers leaders were the Two Witnesses so they couldn’t be. That threw them for a loop and they didn’t say that anymore.

Back when they had Knowplace, they had a student of sorts and they would occasionally meet this person in their travels and she offered them the use of a gasoline credit card which they used a bit. They had been working odd jobs to live off of. When they were in St. Louis on Christmas night their car broke down and Do pulled out one of his old credit cards that he knew was still good and used it to rent a car. They drove it quite a bit and ended up keeping it beyond the agreed upon time and they would write to the rental car company telling them they would pay for it and were taking good care of it. However, the car company reported the car stolen.

TI and DO were in Brownsville, Texas when they decided to break their story to the press. They called a reporter and told them they had a big story for him and told them where they were in a motel. The reporter thought it had to do with drug trafficking so called the police and they surrounded the motel. TI and DO were already a little paranoid so tried to drive away and were apprehended and it was discovered that they had warrants for both their arrests as the gasoline credit card was reported stolen by the husband of the student who gave it to them. They were both in jail. Ti got out after about a month as the charges were dropped. Do’s charges were dropped as well but the St. Louis prosecutor, knowing of TI and DO’s strange story decided to prosecute to make points towards his next election bid. As it ended up Do was in jail for 6 months when he was offered a plea of guilty that would be for time served or he could go to trial and take his chances. Since he wanted to get out, he pleaded guilty though he never stole anything though he and Ti did consider their choice to use the credit cards a mistake.

The benefit of Do being in jail was his writing what became their first statement of beliefs as follows:

=== STATEMENT I synopsis ===

What religions have sought to explain and lead us to believe in, has to do with what is above the human kingdom and what’s been said about how to attain that kingdom. Some teach to adore a savior as about all there is to gaining the promised rewards which TI and DO say is inaccurate, and they compare the “Process” of gaining entrance to “heaven” with the metamorphosis of a caterpillar to a butterfly. The caterpillar in this analogy is equivalent to a human being that is stimulated to separate from it’s caterpillar world to isolate itself by spinning a cocoon, within which it is then dedicating all it’s time and energy to changing into a butterfly that when it emerges is a new creature with totally new capabilities – it can now fly so is no longer limited to it’s previous environment and even looks like it has taken an evolutionary step to a more advanced creature. Likewise they said, that a human who seeks only to become a member of the Next Evolutionary Kingdom must also complete a metamorphic changeover to become that new creature before it dies.

They went on to say that in the case of humans the opportunity to willfully evolve into a member of their Next Evolutionary Step comes in stages with about two thousand years in between and that the last stage was when Jesus, who was already a Member of this Next Level Above Human, was incarnate – in the flesh to teach and demonstrate how to give all one’s energy to his “Father” in that kingdom through him, which he was sent to be the link to.

They said that the One who was a Member of that Next Kingdom forfeited his body of that Kingdom to enter a human female’s womb to take over the body named Jesus to use to interface with those Souls who were nearing being born into his Kingdom, to show them and even provide them with proof, that when he overcame all aspects of the human world, his body had changed into a new creature that could even overcome being killed. (I’ll add that he was killed by those who felt threatened by his presence and what he taught because a religion had formed around his previous incarnation in the body named Moses and that religion became in large part a dilution and distortion of the truth). They said that Jesus even stayed around for about 40 days after his resurrection from the dead to demonstrate his new changed over body’s new attributes, i.e. appearing and disappearing (changing his vibrations) before their eyes while letting some touch his new body (so they knew it was still physical). This would be like the butterfly dwelling among caterpillars for a short while to show them what they could look forward to if they separated from their caterpillar like world to go through the metamorphosis. Jesus left them in a cloud of light (what humans call UFO’s) to show how he travels and would return.

Then they explained that there were two individuals here now who also came from the Kingdom Above Human, incarnate again and who had awakened to their task to demonstrate the same proof of overcoming death. They said they were sent from that Above Human Kingdom by the “Father” to provide the same truth that was Jesus’ but this time by two individuals from that Kingdom, to restate the truth Jesus took on that became his burden to endure, restore that meaning that had been since rendered inaccurate and show how any individual can become a member in their kingdom by the same process. They said this re-statement process or the demonstration would happen within months. They indicated they would also recover from their “death,” aka to resurrect and would exit the earth’s surface via a UFO so were telling the truth so anyone left behind will comprehend the formula.

They closed the statement by saying those who can believe this process and do it will be “lifted up” and “saved” from death literally and that if someone seeks these two while they are here they will fill you in on the details and assist those who wish to follow this “path.”
=== end of Statement I synopsis ===

When Do was in jail, Ti got a nurses job back in Houston and saved enough to buy a car and they got back together and decided to mail out Statement One to New ages centers in California. One was sent to a meditation group in North Hollywood, California. The groups leader sent two of his students to meet with TI and DO and in doing so invited them to come speak to their group. When they did, to a crowd of over a hundred in a house several dozen wanted to follow them which took them by surprise as they didn’t think they were going to have followers and didn’t really want them but decided they had to go with the flow. That’s when they took the names, Bo and Peep because now they had some sheep.

They went to a campground and met with the couple dozen and others that came with them and spent some weeks meeting several times a day and after a few months decided to take their talk to others up the coast to the San Francisco bay area. The students held a meeting at Stanford and it was packed so they then held a meeting at Canada College and filled an auditorium twice and gained some more followers.

Students were required by TI and DO to leave all behind to join with them. They said to not leave a mess but to wrap things up in 2-3 days and meet them at a campground where they would then go to the next area to hold a meeting. That next area was Waldport, Oregon where I had been living for several years. I attended the meeting and knew I wanted to join. I went around telling my friends I felt like I sat in front of the equivalent of Jesus. They never said they were Jesus because Jesus was the name of the physical vehicle an Older Member from the Next Level took to perform that task. They said they were from the same family as Jesus and bore the same truth and it was to be a type of repeat performance of dying and resurrecting that they called the “demonstration.”

Some 34 people joined from the Waldport meeting and because some had arranged for their two children to live with their biological father who lives in Portland area, the police were told the kids were being abandoned and that started an investigation and involved the press. This was September of 1975 and by October it hit the national news talking about the mysterious two people who were leading some to believe if they left everything they would rendezvous with a spacecraft, (a cloud of light), a UFO to go to Heaven by.

For a week or so there was a push to learn who these two were and finally they found their human names and that Do had been a convicted felon. Walter Cronkite announced it and TI and DO who were in Las Vegas at the time felt “shot down by the press” and felt now that their reputations were ruined there was no sense going on. However after a couple days feeling subdued, they felt they got instruction from their Heavenly Father to keep going, so they went to their students who now were up to about 70 and told them the “two witnesses demonstration of death and resurrection” was canceled and they would understand if they didn’t want to follow them anymore, since their demonstration of that proof was a big basis of their mission statement.

Well that didn’t seem to phase any students. It didn’t phase me as I didn’t join based on seeing that proof. I simply knew this was for me, when all the other spiritual things I’d investigated since I was 16 and was now 24 didn’t make any sense to me but this did.

The 70 of us were all camping at the Chain of Lakes camping area north of Chicago, where TI and DO had sent us from the Colorado area where we’d held about 6-7 meetings and gained some more followers. When that news broke and TI and DO decided to go on they traveled to Chicago to talk to us and in the process learned that two of our numbers were imposters who were writing a thesis on cults so infiltrated our group. Anyway it was pretty clear that being in a big group now that it was in every newspaper in the country was not going to work so TI and DO split us up and sent us in different directions to hold more meetings. A number of us lost touch with TI and DO for months but in strange ways managed to get back together. I had travel to Vermont and Boston to hold meetings with my partner and when our car broke down hitchhiked around holding meetings and went down to Brownsville and finally in a desperate attempt to know what to do I sort of screamed to my Heavenly Father and the next day or so ran into TI and DO and their little group of 6 students who traveled with them in Oklahoma City where we saw a familiar poster at the library. Being on the road in the winter, libraries were a great place to stop and get warm and read the news, etc as we were still thinking we might get a signal that TI and DO were still going to perform the demonstration.
So we were back with a group they assigned us to and held some more meetings until Ti said, “the harvest is over” on April 21, 1976. They told us to finish up the meetings we had scheduled and then by July 4th we had all been called to gather in Wyoming at the Veedavou rustic camping area in the Medicine Bow National forest just east of Laramie, Wyoming.

There were about 100 students who stayed in the group. Three were probably at least double that who initially joined but dropped out for one reason or another. That ended our “recruitment” period and TI and DO said it was time to get down to the business of the “overcoming of humanness process.” Before that winter TI and DO sent 19 students away from the larger group and told us who remained we made the “first cut.”

We spend the next 3 or so years living outdoors between Wyoming in the spring to summer and in south Texas in the fall and winter. We had a tent city at one point with generators for lights  and lived mostly in the last couple years on ranch lands TI and DO would arrange to lease. When the money ran out that had been gathered when people joined and had something to donate, that paid for 100 of us for food, gas, toiletries, etc. some of us were instructed by TI and DO to get jobs, but not to do something we’d done before so not to relate to the past. We needed to put our past behind us in order to begin to put all our energy into our changing ourselves into the new creature, the “butterfly.”

We moved into houses and people would drop out ever so often, leaving in the middle of the night usually. No one was held against their will. There were no children and no relationships and no sexuality and no drugs or alcohol or smoking or music or anything we did before, but we had pleasures – they just needed to be pleasures TI and DO designed for us. Every year or so TI and DO would require each of us to spend some time evaluating if there was something in the world we still wanted.

Ti left her vehicle in 1985. It was diagnosed as cancer in her liver. Two years before her exit she had an eye removed that was cancerous. When she left it was a surprise and some were put to the test of whether they still believed in who they were and their overcoming process. To the core believers it didn’t’ shake their faith. Do said that Ti’s human vehicle burnt out dealing with all the negativity from those in the world who we students left behind who blamed Them for. There was a lot of truth to that as before Ti left she had us visit with those that were stressed at our absence from their lives. I traveled to NYC area and visited for the first time since I joined and it was a good visit over a weekend. TI and DO flew us all over the country. The task was to help relieve the anxiety others had at our absence. There was a lot of anxiety we learned as there was a network of parents set up to try to learn where we were. And there were several private investigators sent out to find us but who failed. As it turned out we’d move to another city just in time to miss when an investigator got to the town we were in. We learned this from our visits.

Then in 1987 while our numbers were down to the 30’s Do felt like we “needed to be who we are” – in other words he needed to stand up for being the return of the same soul who had been incarnate in the vehicle named Jesus and the students needed to stand up for being the Souls who had been Jesus’ students. However, Do didn’t know how we were to do this so he began to explore. That’s when we began to study the material that was coming out about the UFO and Space Alien phenomena. It was 1988 while living north of Dallas, Texas in a ranch house on a cattle ranch that Do felt to write what would be called the “’88 Update – The UFO Two and Their Crew” that was to “set the record straight” as there was so much misinformation about TI and DO from 1975 and thereafter.

I’m going to end this little summary there. Do’s 88update provides a great deal more to see and understand and throughout this book I also fill in many details that include what took place until they exited in 1997 and thereafter to date.

I contend and offer significant evidence that TI and DO were unlike all others who are considered by the mainstream community to be so called typcial “cult leaders.” One huge evidence was how they only had us provide Their information to the public in a face to face way via public meetings for two approximate nine-month periods with about seventeen years in between, unlike most every other organization who were constantly recruiting:

TI and DO only spoke at public meetings for about nine months from August of 1975 to April of 1976. (Students held publically advertised meetings a little before then and until June of 1976). Before that they were criss-crossing the country telling people the Information they were receiving and digesting that included knowing who they were for the delivery and application of that Information and how their task was described in the Book of Revelations as the Two Witnesses. Starting in July of 1976 they took those who had joined and began the serious “Overcoming Process,” which also ended up looking like a vetting of the seriousness of each student.

Before 1976, the first thing Do told a group of four students, including myself, literally days after leaving our world behind, was that it would be unlikely that all of us would make it. When I heard that, part of me thought I could do it but it wasn’t like I was bent on proving that at that moment and another part of me wondered why, so I just logged it. I believe I was the only one of those four who stayed the course, though I too dropped out in 1994, though it’s not over for anyone if they seek to petition the Next Level for their own stepwise process to engage their separation from and overcoming of the human kingdom.

Now it’s time for the scriptural evidence that TI and DO were the return of the Ones called the Father and Jehovah and the One who was incarnate as Adam, Enoch, Moses, Elijah, Jesus and then Do as prophesied:

Section II. Link:

https://sawyerhg.wordpress.com/2017/02/04/ti-do-the-father-jesus-heavens-gate-ufo-two-witnesses-ii-jesus-prophecy-of-the-return-of-the-kingdom-of-god-kingdom-of-heaven/

Breckenridge UFO’s I believe are Space Aliens just like Phoenix Lights and not from Level Above Human

October 7, 2014

Now I would guess that this could be space alien generated as it’s not coming from outer space where I believe space aliens are no longer permitted to circulate. I don’t know how their prohibition of traveling very far from earth is accomplished but however it’s done I do believe at this time it’s accomplished by the Level Above Human Beings by instigating changes in the way their spacecrafts are able to fly, the actual physical properties of their elemental energy systems, but I could be wrong, just a hunch. The Next Level however has no reason I have seen any evidence of to put on such displays, just like in the case of the phoenix lights. The space aliens want and need human cooperation for their agenda. The Next Level don’t need humans for anything but are providing an avenue for humans to seek out them and their offer of being in a future training program to evolve beyond human, led and managed by Ti and Do and Crew.

http://youtu.be/HiI2FHS2AKM

The Rev 19 White Horse may be Do returning in the “glorified body” he took into the cloud of light (ufo) spacecraft as Jesus

September 18, 2014

I am NOT suggesting he walks around on the planet in this body and this is not a thorough addressing of the idea yet, as I just came upon a Christian who suggested it was his glorified body which I hadn’t considered til then and it made a lot of sense in that this body is described as being “dipped in blood”, so it would not be that body he last occupied as Do. And it also indicates he is returning in his spacecraft with his armada (my word) being the graduate student body who also have “clean white fine linen” bodies and this is part of the battle of Armageddon which is in progress as it’s a battle for souls but what we don’t see much evidence of is how that has it’s physical manifestation in the way governments are preparing to do battle against what they believe to be the space aliens that space aliens have called the bad aliens which are in reality not the reptilians but are Do (in the Jesus glorified body) and Crew as prophesied by Jesus in the parable of the tares. They are returning to oversee the spading of those humans who have become weeds (which I remind we have no capacity to decide who they are specifically, except to know they exist and are running the affairs of the planet and of course don’t consider themselves weeds and these are also assisting Do and Crew by doing some of the spading themselves). I believe that any innocents that lose their lives during this process, may or may not have their spirits  saved by Do and Crew. That’s for the Crew to decide who they have a relationship with.

For any that think this is all over just because there are quite times or the recycling isn’t obviously in full swing yet, if they are alive in the next years they will see more and more to help them change their minds and those that work for Ti and Do by disseminating their information will be put to greater tests that could result in the loss of their physical bodies in the process which will simply be an acceleration of their own progress toward overcoming their humanness and graduating into Next Level membership. Ti and Do didn’t leave all their information behind just for the heck of it and it wasn’t left behind to start a new church/religion with. It was to provide the truth to those that can still embrace it and choose to. It’s our job to make it available continuously in all ways we can until it’s time for our exit. Those who try to preserve their lives in this world, by keeping their belief to themselves risk losing their life in the next world as Jesus said. I don’t know the criteria exactly for others but for me, I’ve got to tell the truth as much as possible for my remaining time in this vehicle.

With this explanation of the title of this post, here is what brought me to this title and post:

I found this site that provides some good bible study for those that want to examine to see what many Christians are saying about various subjects so one can talk their language better and be able to also address where they may be putting a less accurate meaning to scripture.

So I have included a scripture that I didn’t agree with and why: Here is the text followed by the site where I got it and then my comment I left for the publisher that was a quick rebuttal that included the revealing of Ti and Do as the Father and Jesus returned as the Two Witnesses and some clues as to how they fulfilled prophecy in that regard but is far from all the evidence, but at least this gives some a chance to look into the possibility for their own stakes in their relationship with the Next Level.

Thus the bible teacher I found said regarding the two mentions of a “white horse”, which I actually believe he is correct that the second mention in Rev 19 is referring to a “glorified” return, in other words, in his body from 2000 years ago. He provides the two verses below:

*** Start of Bible Teachers Interpretations:

Revelation discusses two prophetic horses, which are both the same color and seem to represent truth and righteousness. This is the conclusion drawn from several Bible Commentaries (Adam Clarke’s Commentary, JFB Bible Commentary, etc.). The truth is, only ONE of the horses is of God!

2. And I looked, and behold, there was a white horse; and the one who was sitting on it had a bow, and a crown was given to him; and he went out conquering, and to conquer. (Revelation 6:2, HBFV)

11. And I saw heaven open; and behold, a white horse; and He Who sat on it is called Faithful and True and in righteousness He does judge and make war . . . 13. And He was clothed with a garment dipped in blood; and His name is The Word of God. (Revelation 19:11, 13)

Clearly, the horse of Revelation 19 represents righteousness and is rode by a glorified Jesus. The rider is clothed in a garment ‘dipped in blood,’ which is Christ’s own blood shed for our sins, and his name is the ‘word of God,’ which is precisely what the apostle John calls Jesus (John 1:1).

What is the meaning of the first horse? For starters, Jesus does not need to receive a crown, which means GIVEN the power (sometime in the future) to conquer or take control. Christ has ALREADY received the ‘crown’ of dominion over the entire universe (Matthew 28:18, Mark 14:62, Colossians 2:10, etc.). Second, Jesus does not need to conquer anything, as conquering implies a struggle where either side has a chance (however small) of gaining victory. Satan has ALWAYS lost against God and has a ZERO chance of ever winning even the tiniest of battles! He utterly and totally FAILED to get Jesus to sin just one time! In fact, the devil did not have the power to unilaterally lay a single finger against just ONE person (Job 1 – 2), but instead had to ask God for permission! At his Second Coming, Jesus will assert his right to rule over mankind with a display of power the goal of which is to get people to repent (see Revelation 9:20 – 21, 16:9).

The horse of Revelation 6 represents the ability of Satan to deceive and SEEM like he represents God. According to the apostle Paul, one of Satan’s primary tactics is to lead people astray by appearing to be “an angel of light” who represents the truth (2Corinthians 11:13 – 14). He is, however, the father of deception and lies, and a master counterfeiter. In the end time, God permits him (Revelation 11:2, etc.) to deceive all mankind into thinking he is their ‘savior.’ The devil’s goals, however, are to kill ALL true Christians, have humanity worship and obey HIM, and gather an army to FIGHT the return of Jesus Christ (see Revelation 13:4 – 7, 14:11, 16:12 – 16, 17:14 – 18, 19:17 – 21, 12:9)! Paul also tells us that if the devil can appear to be righteous or ‘white’ so can the angels who follow him (2Corinthians 11:13).

The meaning of the two white horses of Revelation are not the same but rather represent two completely different things!

*** End of Bible Teachers interpretation and his website address:

http://www.biblestudy.org/bible-study-by-topic/meaning-of-colors-in-the-bible/meaning-of-color-white.html

Sawyer’s question/comment to him: (which is unusual that he provides this avenue as many don’t want questions anymore):

Excellent work, but I have one objection that is a question, re: your interpretation of the Rev 6:2 white horse being Satan. I believe you are mistaken that Jesus doesn’t need to conquer anything. He is simply doing it for his disciples, showing them how. When he said, “I have overcome the world” that implies that he had something to overcome and it’s the same word used for “conquer and prevail”. In fact an Israelite is one who prevails as Jehovah – is an overcomer/conqueror. I say the “bow” is both the “covenant” and thereby those who have been covenanted, thus the bride of
christ in the end times. Also, this was the opening of the first seal. The seal is on the book of Rev 5 that the “lion of juda” opens. So Jesus is opening the seal which is the revealing of the truth like you said, which is the word that comes across as a thunderous roar related to the seven thunderous roars of rev 10 during the sixth trumpet when the two witnesses prophesy. So they are delivering the 7 thunders/roars and one of them is Jesus returned in a new “flesh body” (son of man=offspring of mankind(human). The other is the Father. He has a crown because he is birthed to the throne by the rev 12 woman who depicts the Father as Jesus said he and his Father would return and his disciples the returned saints/angels will be able to sit with the father and speak to him directly at that time but the father will leave by the earth swallowing the body he takes meaning his body dies. Also in rev 11:7 the two witnesses are not killed. Apokteino is “separation” (apo) by/from death (kteino) and it’s stated that they are first subdued (overcome) and then separated by death before the nations, tongues which means they are in the media shot down. Dead body meant subduing of their physical bodies in front of the world who would see them as frauds in their claim to be the two witnesses. I believe these were Ti and Do of the heaven’s gate group, so my question is whether or not you might reconsider at least the interpretation of the white horse who is the returned Soul who served as Jesus in a new physical body what is made pure (white), while Do’s body was also named “applewhite”. Satan does come looking white too. That’s what a sheep in wolves clothing is and a false Christ. A Christ is someone who had overcome the human world through the pressing of oil from their abiding by the commandments of God to be worthy of harvest. Each who is of the first fruit harvest must also conquer/overcome as it says in Rev 2-3 to get their own crown and is why the white horse rider conquers and then goes a conquering. Firsts he overcomes his humanness (the body he takes) and then he takes his student body through overcoming the bodies they take to complete their overcoming having conquered 2000 years ago by giving their lives to his service though they had a little more to do as they were not quite ready to graduate yet then. They were the same souls who were with Moses and they were 42 first fruits with Do when they voluntarily laid down their lives as Jesus had said was the greatest love, for him. It was not suicide for them because they were NOT those physical bodies except that they needed to change those physical bodies into vehicles that would serve the Kingdom of God, Kingdom in the literal heavens.

Sawyer’s Story leading up to joining Ti and Do’s “Classroom” and leaving in 1994

January 11, 2014

Our lives don’t really begin at birth. We are the genetic continuation of life that is shaped by each generation’s ancestors and society that forms the human kingdom’s “Tree”. We are each one leaf on that Tree.

What many people and scientists don’t know yet is that the genes don’t only represent each cell of our body’s biology but hold our changing mentality – the programs we establish for our selves during our life and the programs we delete that constitute our mind, which in the ancient terminology is the spirit of each leaf.

That spirit upon death of the human vehicle still exists and at death gets whatever it believed it was going to get which can be a total illusion or a perspective of what’s most real about our existence – how the earth and all it’s life forms were designed by the Older Members and Their Crews in the physical, many membered Kingdom Level Above Human. The earth to date was used to foster an experiment – an Astronaut Training Program to see who could be helped to become a member of the Next Level.

This is a synopsis of the life of one leaf’s experiences growing up and becoming a student in the Next Level Older Members, TI and DO’s experiential “Classroom”.

Chapter One – History prior to meeting Ti and Do

So much of who we are is therefore shaped before our birth, then further sculpted by our parents, their characteristics, beliefs, habits, education, methods, principles, standards, ethics, morals, even their aspirations as well as their accepted limitations, bias, prejudice, jealousies, envies, angers and any number of other challenging components.

Some of these influences whether internal or externally fortified don’t surface as our characteristics until we are under the same stresses of life, often occurring at a time period comparable to when our parents experienced the same. For instance certain of us never experience conservatism until we have children and desire for their well being, forms of security and a healthy/happy future. Other influences on us never sit well with us and in these cases become points of; repulsion and/or rebellion. Our development is further complicated by the vast environmental influences we are raised into, such as the social, economic and political atmospheres prevalent during our formative years. These in total are the influences that form a new being, one that could be potentially wiser, the same or more limited than all who came before them. In either case, here is a synopsis of my journey through early development.

GENETIC HERITAGE

My (vehicles) grandparents were immigrants to the United States. On my dad’s side both of his parents, Fred and Mary were of Czech Bohemian decent though they were born in Manhattan. On my mother’s side, my grandmother, Rose was born in Austria, having her family in Vienna. I don’t know a lot of her youth except that she came from a large family of 10 siblings and at some point she went to work in a convent in Vienna, as an aspiring nun. However, she met an Austrian man, John, who she eventually married. My grandfather, previous to meeting my grandmother was enlisted into the Austrian/German army during WWI. He was critically wounded and taken for dead. As the story goes, he had received wounds to his abdomen area. They tied a coat around his midsection to hold in his organs and he was taken for dead and thrown on a truck. But it was discovered that he was still alive, so was cared for and survived. Meanwhile my grandmother, Rose followed one of her older sisters to the United States. John soon followed after Rose having started a relationship with Rose just before. They soon married. John’s war wounds left him with a half of a testicle. That didn’t keep him from impregnating my grandmother with their only child, to become my mother, named Violet. They lived in Manhattan and went through the depression. John had opened a pet shop at some point but then lost his store. However, he kept many of his pets, a good many birds and hung up the cages in their small apartment. He traded or sold them for food. At some point they were trying to qualify for welfare and they were told they had too many birds so would not qualify, presuming they could sell the birds. I can recall clearly when we’d visit them in that Manhattan apartment, all the bird cages crowding the small kitchen. I have little memory of my mother’s dad, except that he would take me to the city fountains in the summer to play and cool off. He got sick and died when I was five years old. I can see him in bed. He left me one thing he was fond of, a harmonica. I later became a player. My grandfather also avoided doctors and would do his own health research. I followed suit in that vein as well.

My dad, also named Fredrick began dating my mom, Violet soon after his return from US Army service in WWII. He served in both theaters. I always wondered why war was presented as a play or movie. Perhaps that was my first question, the first of many to come as I slid my way out of that birth canal. He, as so many others had an extremely traumatic experience with the war that would stay with him for the rest of his life. I didn’t learn to what extent until I was in my 40’s. His buddy had his head shot off while right next to him. He was a sergeant and piloted a tank. He was a good driver so became useful transporting ammunition by truck across the alps on dirt roads. At the time many of the trucks were in poor service. He often drove with no brakes in the mountains, at night during blackouts, when no lights were allowed to be used, fearing being shot at by fighter jets. My dad, who has since passed was regularity plagued by nightmares of his war experience. He would get out of bed and hold onto the side frantically, while shouting with great alarm. He was a kind hearted, hard working, fun loving guy. When I became a teenager I put him through a great deal of stress, being a rebellious youth. I hope I can do as well as he with my kids. Anyway, they hit it off and married.

BORN IN MANHATTAN

I was born in Manhattan, that’s “dirty New York City” as my mom and dad would joke as we drove in to visit grandma and grandpa. It was in the summer of 1951, sometime in the early morning when I popped my head out to take a look. My first stab at life was to shoot back following the doctor’s slap on my rump. I peed in his face. At four my parents bought a house on Long Island, the suburban town of Plainview. It was a middle class white Catholic neighborhood then but soon became mixed with those of a Jewish faith. It cost them $10,000 and I later learned that was a year’s salary for my dad at that time. He worked as a salesman for a commercial refrigeration equipment company. He was generally good at whatever he tackled be it carpentry, plumbing, car mechanics or sports. In later years he took additional part time work to make ends meet and try to get ahead. It was 1952 and except for these suburban housing developments, our town was still largely potato farms. I can recall going to church, having been raised a Catholic, in a barn with roosters running about. There were always a bunch of days each summer that climbed near or slightly above 100 degrees, so hot and humid it was, that I at times would faint in church service from heat exhaustion. I can recall then and some years later, passing out only to awaken to the face of nuns in those black habits. I always felt I was bad to have fainted, though I don’t recall having reason to feel that way, except perhaps when you come to and a nun in that black hood and white habit is sternly, even angrily admonishing me for passing out.

I was a small skinny kid, light brown hair, freckles and bad breath yet a normal kid I suppose. I did well in elementary school, though was certainly insecure. I can recall screaming for my momma not to leave on the first day in Kindergarten. My mother told me that one of the first things I said that they took special note of was a question, perhaps at five about where babies come from which they didn’t know how to answer. In response to their lack of answer I said in a matter of fact way…”Well, things don’t just happen!” as I lifted my arms to exclaim.

SAID I WANTED TO BECOME A PRIEST

I was perhaps 9, about 1960 when I remember saying I wanted to be a priest. I had no interest in being an alter boy and have mostly bad memories of being Catholic. My best memories are going to church in a barn with roosters running around, with big fans installed inside for the hot weather. As I said, I recall passing out in church on 3 or 4 occasions, I think due to the heat. My system passes out easily. Maybe it’s an oxygen thing.

I can recall at about 10 years old when my folks were about to leave me for two weeks at a Catholic Boys Camp, St. Dom Bosco, I cried and cried not to be left there by my parents. Maybe it was in part because I was a small boy and was picked on somewhat and especially by my friend who was a year younger but much larger who also went to the camp. I learned to run fast. That saved me at times. At others, my older cousin, also at the camp would protect me from him. I remember one thing I liked about camp. I sort of liked the singing we’d do in church everyday. I remember being bashful at first, but the brothers and nuns sang too and that was neat. One thing I hated was all the aggressive behaviors of the other kids. For instance at chow times, they might put out a plate of chicken per table. If you were not fast and aggressive you often did not get any chicken. But I never starved. Another thing I hated was the swimming lessons. Why couldn’t we just swim and have fun. No, we had to learn to tread water for three minutes and being skinny I was always cold in this upstate NY lake. I frequently was shivering and had blue lips. I just did not thrive on competition though in years later I played all the street sports well, even better than many of the bigger kids. I was fast and could catch anything that came my way, be it a baseball, basketball or football. And I had a good arm too. I could hit well and my dad taught me lots. I ended up pitching in Little League, but that was after several boring years as an outfielder who struck out a lot. It seems in life I have always been a late starter and frustrated by it but once I got the hang of something, I tended to excel. I also had a mischievous streak, though may have been taught that by an older friend who I grew up with that in later years I did some mischievous things with on his instigation. But he wasn’t at this camp so I certainly had my own boyhood cruelty. I recall crushing frogs with rocks. I confess, that was the extent of my cruelty to anything living, except for the times I would pull the legs off beetles and other insects and put them in arenas to battle with one another. I wonder if I imagined that they actually fought one another. Maybe they thought the other took their leg off. Who knows what karma I created there. Oh, yes, I would step on yellow jackets bees with my bare foot to kill them. If you did it with your heal real hard it worked well, though I got my share of stings at other times when I wasn’t trying to kill them. It was just something we boys did to show our machismo, something I had little of.

I loved watching the TV show, The Big Picture, essentially black and white war footage in documentary form. It was exciting to see those battle ships shooting off those big guns and all the GI’s running about. War was a theater indeed; I also liked playing cowboys and Indians with my six shooters in hand. Yes, I was a cowboy – the Indians were the savages right? I don’t know when I reversed that understanding of reality. Zorro was a favorite hero and of course Jesse James and there were these two out of time outer space characters, Bleep and Blip or something like that, animations that would zip through space on adventures. That was more or less my first exposure to anything outer space, though a few years later there would appear the TV shows the Outer Limits, the Twilight Zone and eventually; the Jetsons.

FLYING DREAMS

I remember a dream I often had. I was playing basketball and when I’d jump, like to do a layup, though it seemed in this dream I did jumping all over the court and when I’d do it, I’d be trying to stay up – in other words not come back down to my feet – yes…fly or glide. It took practice and in the first couple dreams I barely stayed up – long enough to reach the basket, though I never stuffed it or shot it in the dream. The technique I used to stay up was one of mind. It was like I was creating a pressure with my thoughts that was reaching upward to pull my body along. Maybe a year into these dreams I did glide quiet a bit and even remember soring like super man, not all over the world and stuff but all around the court. I’d be swooping down close to the floor and then exercise my mind to pull my body up, sometimes grazing the floor. I got quite good at it and it certainly was fun though at the same time it felt difficult to do. It never happened without that pulling effort that seemed to have to be primed anew with each episode. These dreams seemed to linger even after I awoke and I could go back into them. Years later I was told flying in dreams was a good sign. It meant your spirit was, as they say “astral traveling”. I registered that as…oh, I guess then I’m somewhat advanced in some way but never paid it any mind thereafter. I guess I could have tried to do it more and perhaps I would have traveled all over the world astral traveling as is told of yogi’s and such in India have experienced for thousands of years.

ADOLESENCE

But reeking of being a late starter. I can recall being ashamed of my body early on, like in 5th and 6th grade and thereafter. I learned early on that I was not well endowed as they say and to top it off was slow to puberty often marked by hair growth on the body. I remember wishing I’d had some facial hair and then was stressed about how hairless my legs were. I was a dirty blond hair color. I remember using my mom’s mascara to paint the few blondish hairs I had on my mustache. I’m sure I looked great in school. I’d wipe it off before I came home. Once I forgot and my mom wondered what was on my face. I learned early on that if I was going to fit in, at least as I felt I wanted/needed to, I’d have to hide it from my mom, I don’t know about my dad in this respect because she had her ideas about how I should look and act. You don’t want to stand out as weird or poor or lacking self respect. For instance, in 6th grade I was into the Four Seasons singing group. You know, “Sher er er er er er eri bay ay beeeee, Sheri Baby” The “in” look at the time was tight black polyester pants that came up a bit on the ankle where they were tightest. Then we’d wear white socks and if we could get them, pointy black shoes with one inch wooden heals. It was later called the greaser look as opposed to the collegiate look of penny loafers and corduroy which my mom seemed to prefer. I remember putting taps on my shoes to sound real cool walking down the hall of the school. Of course I thought I had to hide those shoes from my mom so I’d leave them at school when I had a locker in 7th grade. My mom also had a favorite hairdo for me. She would take me to the barber who would put that gunk in my hair, that stunk like glue and in fact was as it set up my hair, making it stiff. I didn’t like it but it was the way it was. The part I hated more was the way she and the barber would comb my hair with this high wave right in front. I felt so square with that “doo”. So what did I do? I’d go to school looking like that and go to the boys room and with some additional gunk and a brush, unheard of for boys to use, I’d slick back both sides of my hair and pull a little wave down in front, you know the Elvis Presley look.

In was just about this time I can recall my first introductions to manhood. I didn’t like that either. It was 6th grade when I became aware of the birds and the bees as they called it. My parents didn’t tell me anything I recall. It was my friends that whispered this and that. I recall getting “excited” in the locker room showers. I was not attracted to boys. It just happened and as I was virtually hairless and small, I hid and skipped the showers thereafter. So I hated gym for that reason in addition to the fact that I was near the smallest guy in my grade. For some reason, no one even considered a small kid could ever play basketball or football and I was at that time not one to rock the boat of pier pressures.

BEGAN MUSIC

One thing I did excel in was playing hand drums on my desk. The song Wipe Out was a favorite because of it’s drum beat. I wanted to take up drums when an instrument was offered, but they said they already had a drummer or two so my choices were band instruments. I got clarinet and early on thought it was square. Where I got some of these ideas of what was square, I don’t know.

REPEATED ABSTRACT NIGHTMARES

I can recall two additional phobias of sorts that plagued me in about my 12th year or so. I would frequently wake up screaming bloody murder and I mean screaming bloody murder and it would go on and on. My parent were beside themselves with it. I would be laying down, say on my stomach with my hand under my face on the pillow and that pillow would feel like it was growing huge like a house and then becoming normal or small again. It was well beyond reality and it was while awake too that it would continue. I was afraid to go to sleep for this reason. At times it was during a period of high fever but then occurred at other times as well.

The other thing was being spooked by the dark and especially in my room where a closet was frequently left open and it had hats on the top shelf and long overcoats hanging so looked like a person was there. I would hide under the covers. I’d wake up an stare at the shadows near ready to swear someone was there.

It reminds me, how my daughter of 9 is afraid to go to sleep and is afraid of the dark and of any loud noises and of any hint of even playful rabble rousing between people. Like if I started playing with my partner, tickling or something or with my older stepdaughter in a rollicking way, she would freak out and scream like we were murdering one another. She got a double dose of types of sensitivity or over active imagination some might call it – others a type of intuitiveness or antenna as to things that we can’t readily see happening around us at times and/or a type of genetic memory of past experiences perhaps.

My first real bad impression of Catholics was when I was to be “confirmed” into the religion. To be confirmed I had to pass this fifty question test. It was mostly memory questions, like: Where is God, the answer to which was: God is Everywhere. Well, I couldn’t pass the test and don’t recall what questions I got wrong, but do recall myself with Mother Superior and my mother at the Catholic school where I had my religion classes once a week drilling me on these questions in a last ditch effort to get me to pass. I did not and the nun was angry with me, that was clear to the point that I did some crying. I guess I was what some might call a cry baby at times. I don’t know that I ever passed the test but I was confirmed. My mother gave me the confirmation name of Scott, named after Scott Carpenter the second American to orbit the earth and the fourth American in space. Do you think that had something to do with being interested in space or why I became a space case?

I recall in some later years when at these evening Catholic adolescent meetings I felt like I excelled at their religious curriculum when it had less to do with memory of some Apostles creed or some such thing. But I also skipped the meetings and went to shoot pool instead.

MOVIES ABOUT HEROS IN WAR OR FOR GOD MADE BIG IMPRESSIONS

And from who knows what age, but certainly in early teens I was repeatedly watching the movies… The Ten Commandments, The Greatest Story Ever Told, which was about Jesus, Gunga Din – that was set in India and had one particular spot where an Englishman took a bad whipping yet did not complain or let it stop him from his just mission. That seemed heroic to me. Another movie that made a big impression on me was Spartacus set in the time of Christ, as there was a scene in it of Jesus carrying the cross to his execution. I would get very emotional whenever I’d see Jesus suffering or anyone suffering for what appeared to be for no good reason. Spartacus ends with the “good guys” as it was portrayed, though are rebels to the mainstream roman army, perhaps 300 of them are captured by the Romans. They had them all lined up and the Roman leader asked who was Spartacus, the name of their leader. There was a long pause and a then one man steps forward and says, “it is I”, then another and another and another until all 300 stepped forward and were all hung on trees sort of the way Jesus was hung. It seemed so damn brave and honorable to have that kind of commitment.

I recall thinking…wow, I want to be a hero or martyr like that. I didn’t exactly have those words form in my mind. I remember thinking being a hero or martyr, dying for another or for God, though I had no idea what God really was but that this was the noblest of lives we could live. I just felt a yearning to be that. I guess it was like my 9 year old daughter who at 4 or 5 would say… “daddy…I want be her” when she’d see someone glamorous or a good cheerleader or something. But I was not in reality all that brave. I was in fact very protective of myself – didn’t generally take big risks like other kids.

When I finally got into 7th and 8th grade, my grades started going downhill. I recall laying in my upper bunk bed at home and trying to make myself do the solo man sex thing, well you know and I just couldn’t get it to happen and I was quite frustrated by it. I was very shy, had very few school friends and did not excel in anything in particular.

At about this time, I’d joined the PBC which stood for Police Boys Club. It was a Navy formatted boys club. We wore Navy uniforms and my dad and other dads and an occasional older kid were the officers. We’d march and learn to handle a rifle in a ceremonial way. I remember one time while we were at an outing in New London, Connecticut on the Naval base there staying for the night. We were all going to bunk down in bunk beds on the base and the commanding officer of our group said good night and I replied “Guten Nacht” – German for good night. Silence. The next morning I had KP duty. The real sailors there thought it was quite funny. I was a bit of a joker but it was natural for me to speak some German as my grandmother taught me some as she was from Austria and spoke German. After KP duty we put on a drill team performance for the cadets stationed there. I was small so I was on the last row of the drill team marching in full blues. The command was “double to the rear, harch” as they would say which meant for the entire platoon to reverse direction at the same time and then reverse it again to continue marching in the original direction. I failed to do the second reversal so I was marching in the opposite direction from the rest of the platoon. I guess that sums up the story of my life in some ways. I just couldn’t get with the stream. My grandmother used to call me “wrong way Peabody” named after that cartoon character who drove airplanes and cars and such while sitting backwards. I got better at drilling though and ended up training younger cadets, but the highlight for me of the entire experience was when they started a drum core. I got a snare and I immediately took to it like a duck to water. And with it they gave us a rank to go with our experience, so overnight I went from a seaman first class to a first class petti officer and then I got to order younger cadets around, though I never gravitated to doing so.

ENTRY TO “DELINQUENT” BEHAVIORS

By the 9th grade I began smoking cigarettes, naturally on the sly. My parents had both quit smoking a few years earlier, a good move, but I recall being sent to the store to buy my mom cigarettes. I don’t know who first introduced them to me. Perhaps when I began babysitting for a smoker’s family, I got a hold of some cigarettes. I was quite the sneak back then. While baby sitting after the kids went to sleep I’d find the cigarettes and use a razor blade to slice the bottom of the package to get some out and tape it back with see through tape. I bet he discovered it though I never found out. I had a bunch of baby sitter episodes the most memorable being on a New Years Eve – I was drinking Jack Daniels that I found in the house. I must have been 16 or so. They had this ham they were going to bake the next morning for New Years Eve dinner. I remember chopping at it with a knife, not in a killing way, but just in a goofy way and putting cigarettes out on it and stupid stuff. I never baby sat after that…I wonder why.

It was about this time that my dad arranged for me to work my first job, putting newspapers together in a drug store on weekends. I recall seeing all the things in the back rooms and couldn’t help but take things. I would take prophylactics, not that I had any use for them, and I began taking cigarettes. In fact it became a big problem because I began taking cartons, sometimes two or three a night. I would take them to school and sell them out of my locker. With the money, I’d treat my friends to billiards at a local parlor. I eventually lost my job and my dad confronted me about it and I denied it. I lied. I did a great deal of lying. I’m not proud of it. I got another job through my job and stole little worthless things. I also would steal cookies and candies and stuff out of supermarkets.

In high school I stole change from the school store where I was trusted to work. I’d then go to the soda shop down the street, often cutting class to play pinball with the money. When I got away with it, I couldn’t hold myself back and would steal more and more. I eventually lost that job too. I was a petty thief and a liar to not get caught. I never made up a lie maliciously, like to get my way or to manipulate another, but to defend myself and what I wanted to do, I’d lie and lie and lie even in the face of obvious evidence of my indiscretion. My younger sister of five years once caught me smoking in the back yard of our house and I denied it up and down. This sort of came to a head when I was in a department store record department. I loved music and did not have any budget for albums so I took a shopping bag and helped myself to some 30 albums. This was my most blatant robbery. Usually I was somewhat cautious about where, when and how I stole but this time I threw all caution to the wind and tried to walk out the door. I was nabbed and taken to a back room and interrogated. For sometime I refused to give them my name, but eventually cracked and my mother came down to get me. I was let go with a warning. I guess I was lucky. After that I seemed to cease my thievery so it goes to show once a thief not always a thief and that the punishment does not always have to be harsh. I was grounded but that was no big deal as I’d just climb out of my window and back in before anyone knew I was gone. Yes, I was quite defiant of the rules whether they were just or not. I wanted to do what I wanted to do and did not take well to being told I couldn’t do it.

Now in high school with bad grades and no popularity and a girl friend that would not “put out” despite my advances, I was certainly a mixed up kid. I recall playing with my girlfriend – you know kid playing where I was trying to cop a feel and she would fight me off. I eventually got stronger than her and one time tackled her and got on top of her and was going to do what I wanted to her, which amounted to getting that first “feel” I so desperately wanted. She pleaded for me not to and I ceased and let her go. I recall a couple years later when I had gone to college and she and I had long since ended our on and off again relationship, I was fooling around with her on the doorstep of her parents house. She had had another boyfriend by then. She put her hand down my pants and determined the size to be laughable. I left her embarrassed. By that time I had had many make out sessions with various girls but nothing ever got more sexual and it was a big hang-up for me – a great source of frustration.

EXPOSURE TO RECREATIONAL DRUGS AND EXPLODING COUNTERCULTURE

In my junior year a friend, Mike turned me on to “drugs” for the first time. I don’t recall any big program to try to steer kids away from experimenting with such as they have now. It was 1968. I smoked some marijuana and liked it though I didn’t experience much. Mike’s friend Mark became my friend as well. Mark was a senior and after school his parents house became a haven for all manner of drug use, barring anything hard core like heroin or needles. There was none of that. There was plenty of hallucinogens though and I became a regular weekend tripper and a full time stoner. We began dealing to support our own growing habits and for the first time I had a click to fit into. I didn’t try the pot to get into the click. I tried it because it was offered me and I was into trying whatever was offered me. There were four of us. We were heavy into all the heaviest rock music of the late 60’s – Led Zeppelin and Pink Floyd, who at the time I felt was “evil” music, especially while “high”. We regularly attended shows of Procol Haram, The Beach Boys, Hot Tuna, Ten Years After and such. One time we went to a show and sat with the bass player from Iron Butterfly. He showed us how to roll a joint with one hand. The show opened with The Chambers Brothers playing, Time, then came Janis Joplin and Big Brother and the Holding Company and the headliner was The Jimi Hendrix Experience. Of course we love the Cream and especially the drummer Ginger Baker, a speed freak kind of a guy.

INTRODUCTION TO THE NEW AGE

We would drop acid, LSD or mescaline and go to a park nearby to hang out, listen to musicians and play Frisbee. Simultaneous with such considered to be mind enhancing drugs, as I never gravitated to depressants like heroin or opium, I began exploring religion/spirituality, perhaps stimulated some by Mark. I had always been a Jesus enthusiast, though had no interest in Catholicism. Mark was raised a Jew, but we would read our bibles together and go to the park barefoot with our bibles and hang out with older “hippies” some of whom were anti-war activists. We also read books like “The Tibetan Book of the Dead, Kahil Gibran’s, The Prophet, Johnathan Livingstone Seagull, essentially about reincarnation and many other “new age” materials that were becoming prominent in the United States at that time. We attended an introductory meeting in Manhattan given by the Maharishi Mahesh Yogi’s Transcendental Meditation Organization. A requirement for membership was quitting pot which by then was not my desire. I smoked pot and hashish like a pack a day cigarette smoker.

One time Mark came to me with a vivid dream he’d just had. He said in the dream, I, speaking of me, was one of the Apostles of Christ. He wasn’t referring to himself in that vein, just me. I found it appealing to be considered such but that’s about as far as it went.

I ASKED GOD TO BE “TAKEN”

In one of our ventures to this park, the Planting Fields arboretum we did our drugs and drove over there. Just as we were getting “off” we came upon a side area in the park where someone had created three symbols using twigs and leaves. They were the peace sign, the cross and the Jewish star all in a circle next to one another. When I saw them together, I was so impressed that they were together, I fell to my knees paying homage to that demonstration of great unity. I had a slight hallucination or dream perhaps. I saw the sky/heavens open with great light descending and it was as if I saw God. A few minutes passed and I turned to look behind me where Mark and Brad had been and all I saw were their bibles blowing in the wind. I assumed God took them and left me. I was freaked by it and fell to my knees again crying and asking God why I was not worthy. I got up and walked on, falling down every so often with grief. I was not so “out there” that I didn’t know my actions. In most of my “trips” I maintained control. I allowed myself to dramatize more than I normally would have when off drugs. I kept walking on and then saw them in the distance. I approached them and they were talking with a guy who was a year their senior. He explained that he had just come from Chicago where there were riots and he got beat up a bit. I looked at his face and could have sworn his entire face was constructed of scars, but I believe this was the drugs affect on me. However, drugs or not, this remained in my consciousness as a spiritual awakening of sorts.

FACED WITH THE VIETNAM WAR

Mark in particular was about to be drafted and his parents had hired a good lawyer to get him a deferment. I was against the Vietnam war, having had some exposure to the anti-war message and the political-economic real reasons for the war. There was no way I was going to fight in this war. I began considering fleeing to Canada. A year or so later the lottery system would be instigated by President Nixon and my birthday yielded 343 of 365, so the likelihood of my ever being called was remote.

NO INTEREST IN THE EDUCATIONS SYSTEMS

I barely graduated high school because by then I was a regular cutter of classes. I hated the subject matter, did not wish to study, was not involved with any school activities, was hanging out with other more or less hippies smoking pot regularly and tripping. But a deal was made and I graduated and my parents found a obscure college that would take me. I went away to Beckley College in Beckley, West Virginia. Until then I was still under my parents thumb. They would not permit me to grow my hair long which I resented but now that I was living at school, I did as I wanted and grew my hair and whatever beard I could. But college was a joke. I became the hippy I wanted to be. I did plenty of drugs. I was exposed to heroin but turned it down. During the course of all of my drug usage, with the hallucinogens I often hated that I took them. The beginning of a trip was physically very stressful, like being plugged into a wall socket. After that it was interesting, though still somewhat traumatic. But I continued in that vein in College.

VIOLENCE IN WEST VIRGINIA

West Virginia at that time was certainly not a peaceful place for hippy’s. I and some of my friends were threatened by locals and police, some were punched around a bit. A policeman shot my friends dog. A truck tried to run us off the highway once. I walked into a general store where they also had a beer bar and one of the beer drinkers, turned toward me and gave me the finger out of the blue with a mean angry look on his face. I never did learn why. It was just one of a number of hateful things I experienced at that time. Another time, I had just taken some mescaline and was lying in the bunk above my friends waiting to “get off” and the owner of that bunk in our dorm came in and violently grabbed me by the lapels and dragged me out of his bed. He among most others in that dorm house were football players and were big. He could have whipped me good. He didn’t. I would have just got off his bed. I guess I shouldn’t have been there. In this first year of college I was still sexually starved. There was one hippy girl I hung out with but I was not attracted to her much so we never hit it off. I bring this up again only because I ended up buying all manner of naked girl pictures and pinning them all over the wall adjacent my upper bunk in my dorm room. Nothing was considered “hard” porn but for that day and age was certainly risqué. On the week of final exams I dropped acid so didn’t pass even one exam. One close friend had his brother killed in the Kent State action. He was from Long Island. Out of anger, I can recall talking and thinking about bombing something, though we had no bombs or guns or any inclination towards violence.

COLLEGE MADE ME A HIPPIE

When I returned from college my parents freaked at my long hair and disheveled look and I suppose bad grades and thus wasted money. I recall my mom and dad on top of me screaming, with my mother pulling at my hair and my dad punching me in the arm. It was traumatic but not very physically abusive. My dad was a strong well build man and could have knocked my block off with one punch. My mom did almost all the physical punishment which mostly amounted to chasing after me with a wooden cooking spoon. She’d swat me with it and usually I’d block it. She broke it on me once. One time my dad was so upset with me, perhaps because I came home obviously on drugs, though to them it wasn’t that distinguishable, but this time he took me into the basement. He took a hammer and handed it to me. I took it and he told me to come at him to fight him. He wanted to level the field and have an excuse to really knock my lights out. I through the hammer away and took off saying he was crazy.

My parents were in no way bad parents. In fact I think they were unusually well intended but they had no idea how to raise the likes of me. It was an era of kids more or less being seen but not heard. Kids were not treated with much respect. They were loved but not counted as people yet. My parents were taught the ideology of “spare the rod spoil the child” the “Christian” way. I can recall in parochial school they at times took the paddle to a kid and some teachers had paddles and other physical forms of inflicting pain. It was still a norm, at least in the Catholic school back then. The problem was that this generation was experiencing something new as each does and the old methods don’t necessarily work for the better. In evolution all things need to evolve, peoples thoughts, actions and methods.

ENTRANCE TO THE WORK A DAY WORLD

So I was back from my “failed” college experience, working in factories, warehouses and such jobs while living with my folks and continuing drug use and whatever partying I could find in my home town. I learned that some of my boyhood friends had also proceeded with their lives. Artie, a year older than I had gone to college in Monticello, NY. I never learned how involved he might have been in the antiwar efforts in Universities nationwide. He talked of bombs being constructed and of the blowing up of them in certain student buildings and other more militant antiwar efforts. I didn’t know how seriously he was involved but certainly did not condone such. My friend Mark had become a bigger dealer, having big blocks of hash. I felt nervous once when we asked me to transport it with him somewhere. Brad, a year younger was crazy. He had set fire to his parents house, so they were temporarily living in motel. Mark and I went there to see him and while there was a knock on the door. Brad opened it and a two guys came in and one put a gun to brads head. The other held a knife on me and Mark. They proceeded to locate Brads’ stash of a bag of pot and some money. Some years later when I came back to Long Island for a visit, having moved to Oregon, Brad came over and was really weird. He took my mothers carving knife and grabbed me and put it to my throat. I acted as if he was joking and he was, but one never knew with Brad. When we partied together, I would drop on tab of acid and mark a couple and he might drop 7 or 8. Upon return from college I recall going over to Jeff’s house in Levittown. He was a friend of Marks who I knew before I went to college. He had become a much bigger dealer now. We were at his parents house and he showed us the gun he needed to carry to meet his dealers. I was not at all comfortable with all the violence and it’s pretenses. I did not hang out with any of these anymore.

I recall walking the streets nightly feeling lost and lonely talking to myself. I’d go to the local Howard Johnsons to just hang out, then go over to shoot some pool and back home. I worked factory and warehouse jobs for that summer and my parents asked me to pay rent but also wanted me home by a decent hour nightly. I resented having to pay to stay at my own house and not have the freedom such payment should have afforded me.

MY FIRST REAL GIRLFRIEND AND SEXUALITY

That’s when I met my first real girlfriend, Tara. She was such a breath of fresh air. I met her at a party. I was very stoned and acting foolish but began talking about reincarnation which was of interest to her, though I could not really talk intelligently about it as for one I had no intelligence about it really. I began hanging out with her and her friends. She was fun and seemed to like me, so to impress her I challenged another guy friendly with her to a contest of who could quit smoking cigarettes. She did not smoke. I never smoked another cigarette. I just needed a reason to quit and having a girlfriend, not that she made that stipulation, was plenty reason for me. We did go on to become a number. I loved her, not only sexually but as a person. We dated for nearly a year in which time she bought me my first Conga drum. She was tired of my banging around on her legs, a hypersensitive response I had since grade school. I got good fast and played with other musicians in some bars and in drum jams. She was more of an antiwar activist than I so asked me to go to Washington with her to demonstrate against the Vietnam war, which we did. It was 1971. I can recall being herded out of Washington DC by national guard, though it was mostly peaceful. But there were all manner of weirdo’s at the demonstration. One guy grabbed Tara from behind with his arm around her neck and she was getting alarmed. He was a big guy so I began to dance with him and her until he relaxed his grip and we scooted away. He was probably really drugged.

STRANGE PREMONITION OF DANGER

Tara was not a drug user at all. She got me to quit the hallucinogens, though they were not a big part of my drug usage, however I was still a toker as they say. One evening she decided to smoke some pot with me. We were in her room in her parents house. Her parents allowed us our privacy there. She started to hallucinate on one puff. She was quite sensitive and had only tried pot one time before that. She saw Noah’s ark in detail and was sort of freaking out. I got scared not having experienced this kind of response from pot. For some reason we both were getting more and more paranoid, a normal pot experience as it makes you more sensitive to an altered consciousness that still feels real. I recall looking at the door to her room and feeling tremendous fear at what was on the other side. I was afraid of opening it. I thought evil was on the other side but I was not that stoned that I didn’t know it could have all been my/our illusion so I went to the door. Just as I got to the door and unlocked it, Cara, Tara’s younger sister who was 14 years old came bursting into the room screaming that some guy tried to pull her into a car as she walked around the peaceful upper middle class neighborhood. After that experience I swore off pot and at that point all drugs.

DESIRE FOR ADVENTURE – SUMMER HITCHIKING TRIP

That summer of 71 I got it in my head to go cross country. I’d been up to Montreal several times with friends and people I met up there said Vancouver was the place to go. That together with hearing stories of red neck Americans harassing traveling hippies, as portrayed in the movie Easy Rider I was more fearful to cross the United States so we chose Canada. We couldn’t afford a motorcycle so decided to do so by thumb. Our parents were not happy but knew they could not stop us. That summer, we hitched to Montreal, then to Vancouver, then down to Tijuana, Mexico and back by the same route. On the way out, I recall going through the plains of Canada and people were telling us that there were roving gangs looking to pick up hitchhikers and abuse them, so I bought a knife for protection, though I never for a moment thought I’d have to use it and thank God never did. I used it to cut fruit, veggies, cheese and bread our road staples. I wasn’t really that paranoid. It was just a precaution in a world of good and evil. One strange ride was with a couple who seemed like partiers. They would drive 100 mph but it was in the plains so not really dangerous, just reckless feeling. At a gas stop we used the rest room, they drove off with one of our backpacks. I think they were tired of us and didn’t know they had our pack and didn’t care. So we had to replace the pack and the expensive sleeping bag we lost.

At one point in the journey we decided to spring for a bus ticket through the Seattle, Washington area. While on the bus we met a guy who said he was a reverend for some religious group we’d never heard of. He offered to marry us right there on the bus. I didn’t want to. Tara was upset by this. I guess she wanted to get married or just wanted to know I would, I don’t know. She pressed me for why I didn’t want to get married then and there. The reason infuriated her. I told her that I’d want to tell my mother or allow my mother to be involved. Plus, to me this guy had no more authorization to marry someone than I did so it seemed silly. I didn’t really see any reason to marry. I loved her and intended to be with her for my life. Looking back, I definitely had a strong compulsion to not add great responsibility to my youth. I remember when Tara was late on her period one time before we left on this trek. I dealt with the possibility that she was pregnant. I definitely would have been there for her and the child. I even recall that she might have been open to considering abortion at that time and to me that was out of the question. In fact the idea that she could be pregnant so affected me, that we rarely had intercourse after that and if we did, she was on birth control pills and I still insisted on the withdrawal method of contraception as it seemed the biggest safeguard against an accident. Actually her taking birth control pills was not my choice. It was diagnosed by her doctor as the best medication to assist her with very extreme menstrual cramping. Each month she was in bed for 3-4 days with severe cramping, diarrhea, nausea and weakness. Nothing helped her but the birth control pills. I recall taking care of her each month when we lived in the wilderness cabin. She was not even capable of walking by herself to the outhouse.

THE REAL HIPPIE SCENE – SAN FRANCISCO

We got down to Berkley where we hooked up with that drug dealer, Jeff I knew on Long Island. This was a few years later and he was a lawyer but I learned quite a dealer as well. He bragged a lot. One night while there we learned of a Grateful Dead concert at the Fillmore West. We were avid Dead Heads in NY having been to a bunch of their dance marathon type concerts. We went and the opening act was Quicksilver Messenger Service. During the Dead show a girl was gang banged right in front of us. I never saw the girl until some guy dragged her out of the group. All I saw were guys emerging out of the group of guys surrounding her pulling up his trousers, saying, she’s liking it. I was disgusted by it – even sickened. We were hippy types but really more of the conservative ilk. We never had group sex and I remained off drugs entirely by then. That night we stayed in an old warehouse where I later learned was where Ken Kesey had participated in group hallucinating experiences. The next night we slept on the roof of the Berkeley free clinic. So we got our dose of the real hippy movement and were not really in sync with it except for the antiwar and music aspects. Then we headed down to Redondo Beach, south of LA to stay with another friend. It was hot and humid and the air was thick, thick, thick with smog. In fact I recall a helicopter coming overhead with a megaphone announcing for the suburban populous to stay indoors with their air conditioners on. It felt bizarre. We met up with other friends in San Diego did a quick visit to Tijuana and headed back home. I recall hitching through the apple orchards where a mass murdered had stashed bodies, near Chico, California and Redmond or so. I remember being harassed by guys in pickup trucks, threatening us. We were quite vulnerable. The police would occasionally tell us to move on and we’d have to walk out of the town limits. We spent many house hiking and waiting which is when I got a great deal of experience playing harmonica and beating the bongos I had tied to my 70 pound pack. I got some decent muscles from slinging that around for three months.

On the way back from this 10,000 miles hitch hiking trek, we got a ride in eastern British Columbia, from a guy with a suit. We drove through the night sharing driving and the next day stopped at a bank in Regina, Saskatchewan. He went in and came out about thirty minutes later. We drove to the next big city, Winnipeg, Manitoba. He did the same thing. As we got into Ontario and had driven though night two, he told us, he was a bank robber and showed us his gun under the seat. He didn’t steal by gunpoint. He acquired some payroll checks. He’d deposit them in one bank and withdraw the funds from the next. Then he asked us to take this rental car across the border into the states as he knew we were headed there. We declined sheepishly. I drove through the 3rd night with no sleep to arrive in the early morning in Montreal. We got out at a park and dragged ourselves to a tree and collapsed asleep for several hours. Who knows what ever became of him.

LIVING IN “SIN”

When we returned despite our parents objections we rented an apartment together. It was $200 a month. We both got jobs and decided that next spring we were going to move to Canada to try to homestead. I wrote away for topographical maps of British Columbia and decided where we wanted to look for land. Our apartment became a pretty busy place. We had old high school friends visit. I had more then than I had in High School. I was more into music then. I played some sax and drums and harmonica so our parties were loud. Two good friends, Mike and Jack had joined the Navy. When they were on leave or AWOL, they would come stay with us. There were many a weekend we would hitch to stay at their house as they lived off base. They were stationed in Newport, RI on the Intrepid. When we’d visit them, they always had wild parties but for some reason what I recall the most was listening to Credence Clearwater Revival, drinking beer as I was still off pot and reading the bible and trying to interpret line for line in practical terms. Jack must have thought me a nut case.

BOYHOOD FRIEND TELLS ME I HAD A BIG EGO AND THOUGHT I WAS JESUS

I remember my friend Artie, a long time friend who was of a Jewish background at one point told me he thought I had a big ego and that I thought I was Jesus. I thought nothing of the sort, though I had Jesus aspirations, though I did not know what they were. I remember thinking that Jesus was out of reach. How could someone have unconditional love for everyone, I thought. How could someone love someone who grossed them out for instance, or an enemy. I don’t know where Artie was coming from. The only thing I can think of is that my college experience gave me some identity and then finally having a full time girlfriend and living in my own apartment made me feel more grown up, so that did build some self confidence but how that came across to him in a negative sounding “ego” sense, I’ll perhaps never know. Perhaps the fact that he was then living at home and didn’t have a girlfriend and I guess I talked about Jesus some entered into it. It wasn’t like I was a Jesus freak and certainly was not evangelical or a preacher. I simply sought to understand what the historic person was about. I didn’t even think of him in a traditional Christian way of being the Son of God.

I was working on the other end of Long Island for a handyman. It was difficult work especially during winter. I would hitchhike to and from work daily and it was cold and dreaded but it paid the bills. Tara was working for her Uncle in Manhattan. She’d take our only car or the train. One day on the way to work, it was raining and she skidded off Northern State Parkway, a curvy road and totaled the back end into a tree. Fortunately she was not hurt at all. The car still ran but would not hold much gas and looked atrocious. I ended up ripping off the back and building it into a station wagon with a wood back made of salvaged materials. I put in a new gas tank and exhaust system. My dad taught me basic mechanics and I had a bunch of cars to practice on over the years. As the winter came I lost my handyman job and found one in a drug store. We had our beefs with our current apartment so moved out to Centerport. We got a big house on a pond. It was great but not without weirdness. Next door on the same property was the main house also rented out but to a group of college students who had wild sex escapades, or so I was told. We never attended, but it was not much of a secret. To afford the $300/mo. rent we rented out a room for $100/mo. to a x-rugby player from England.

MY FIRST JUGBAND

One of our regular activities at the house, on weekends was to have jug band parties. My friend Artie would come over with his friends Dave and Tim and sometimes there were others. We’d drink fruity brandies chased with Guinness Stout Irish beer and get drunk while playing washtub bass, washboard, spoons, harmonica, congas, bongos, dulcimer and jaw harp among other percussive instruments. I’m sure we sounded like hell but it was fun. We also enjoyed watching the community skate on the pond, literally outside our living room window. When we left, he was behind on rent by several months and left a big hole in the wall from his rough sex with his girlfriend that he did not tell us about until the landlord was coming to check the house. We lost our deposit due to him. However, I was wanting to get something from him. It just so happened his tires were the same size as our mustang tires and ours were bald and his were not. so I put his tires on my car and mine on his. His girlfriend found out about it and said he was after us. We left the house ahead of schedule and within a few days were on the road to Canada, this time not as a vacation but in search of a new life in a country with socialized medicine and no wars and perhaps inexpensive beautiful British Columbian land.

MOVED TO BRITISH COLUMBIA, CANADA TO HOMESTEAD

We started out in the Okanagan Valley, near Penticton, B.C. orchard country. The jet stream across the Pacific kept the area relatively tepid. It had snow but not as much as one might expect that far north. We got jobs picking fruit while we inquired on land availability. We had only saved a couple thousand dollars for land and my plan was to build my own log home with the wood on the land. At least that was our plan, however naïve. A few months into being there, our trusty 1976 Ford Mustang custom station wagon broke down. I spend hours under it trying to repair it but to no avail so we ended up leaving it for dead and bought a 1949 GMC pickup truck for $300 which was more suited to rural mountain life. Some of the people we met in the orchard towns told us that the Clearwater, BC area was nice and there were quite a few people settling up there. As the summer was already ending and we had spent far more than we were taking in, we took their advise and headed north to Clearwater, in the Canadian Rocky Mountains. We had a contact there who was very near the Wells Gray Provincial Park, some 30 miles along a dirt road from Clearwater, a town with a population of less than 1000 people, mostly consisting of mill workers, hunters and trappers. After being there a couple weeks we were just about broke. I recall living off of crackers, peanut butter and jelly day after day for the better part of a week before I found a job working for the provincial park on road maintenance. One of my jobs was to haul water to the workers camp everyday. We pumped water from the creek into a tanker truck to then pump it into the storage tank that fed the camp. Meals were provided to me but not to Tara so at lunch time, she would drive over to where the mess hall was and I’d sneak out food for her. As the summer season ended the job ended but I got another job working on a cattle ranch. We were given a cabin to live in on a remote part of the ranch that bordered the mountain wilderness that extended for many hundreds of miles north. We lived in that cabin through the winter. To live the winter we needed to tap into our last nest egg of perhaps $1000. The cabin had no facilities and we were expecting over 60 inches of snow and extended below zero temperatures so we needed to gear up. We traveled to Kamloops a hundred miles west for supplies. We bought a rifle and a shotgun to hunt. I decided if I was going to eat flesh foods I was going to hunt it myself. I had studied up on that as well while still in New York. We bought a Wood cook stove and an airtight heating stove to heat a poorly insulated log cabin of one room that was about 20 foot square at best. There was a creek 30 yds. from the house so I filled up a big milk urn and used a ladle. The out house was 10 yards away. I cut my own wood supply throughout the winter. Our driveway was a bear, a mile long, but one advantage was it was plowed by the provincial park people. I got chains for my truck and had a box outside the house to use as a freezer. We bought sacks of flour, grain and beans and rice and had access to some veggies in Clearwater 30 miles away.

This is where I learned to fall trees and wow did I make every mistake in the book and near killed myself several times. I was a lousy hunter though I went out daily in the foot of new snow that would fall nightly. We also made leather products, handbags, hats, belts and such and sold in a local store and to local farmers a bit. Tara was a good artist so would paint on leather as decoration. I looked for more work in Clearwater at the mill but jobs were few at the time and they didn’t take too kindly to giving them to Yankees from the states. Most of our friends were draft dodgers who came up there to escape the Vietnam draft and married Canadian women to become citizens. Our cabin was the last building on the trailhead to the mountain wilderness, a park that had many huge waterfalls and a majestic peak at every turn. Some mornings we would be awoken by a fully outfitted hunting party. They would all be mounted on horseback and have a couple pack animals. We’d make them a pot of coffee and see them off. We became good friends with a woodsman and his wife who also worked on the ranch but about a mile away from us. He had a good 4X4 and helped me get my truck out of the ditch several times. My chains would snap and the ice was treacherous at times and we almost slide right down the mountain several times. Just to get up my driveway, I’d have to gun it and fishtail around two dogleg turns climbing over a ridge. Sometimes I’d be coming home late at night from looking for work and would leave the truck on the road and walk a couple miles back in the heavy snow with no lights anywhere. I could not even see my hand in front of me and would know if I was on the road when I would start to hit the snow banks on the sides from previous plowing. We had a pet weasel in our cabin. He was pure white and would run around on the inside of the logs as we watched from our bed. We remained warm and cozy. Here we were suburban kids barely in their 20’s living in the wild. Stories abounded by the locals of this old timer who was attacked by a bear while in his bed and how he for some reason burnt down his house. In fact that old burned down house was in view of where our cabin was. There was nothing left but the foundation but it made the stories real. Part of the reason I bought a rifle was for protection from the wild that we so closely bordered. We had no telephone or neighbors within miles with which to dial 911. The woodsman friend Dave and Joan told of his experience in the northlands. He shot a wolverine with a six shooter, off his leg, no less as it was making his way to his throat. He was no story teller. He had all the scars to prove he’d lived one heck of a tough life, raised by his trapper/hunter dad. I never did shoot anything except a squirrel and grouse which don’t eat too well with buckshot imbedded, but Dave shot a dear and I skinned it and he gave us a large part along with moose meat he shot.

We made a bunch of friends up there. We had a sense of community. A new couple got married and I played hand drums at their ceremony. Then we all got together for a chinking party. They had a log cabin where they were going to live. Chinking is the stuff one puts in between the logs to keep out the weather. It can be made from any number of combinations of materials but straw and mud mixed together is a common one. At least that is what we used. People brought food, so it was a pot luck and a present to the bride and groom to get their cabin chinked for the harsh winter.

When we first went to Canada to live, we camped in the Okanagan area, on orchards where we picked fruit for some living. That summer we made a bunch of friends, other fruit pickers and such. We ended up starting some long term relationships. We often had get together around the fire where we played music. I was a decent percussionist and harmonica and recorder player. There were a few string players and singers so we had a band. Some of these ended up in the Clearwater area as well and we had a number of music fiascos. In fact in the middle of winter I organized a ho down in an empty community hall. We invited anyone and everyone and had a hoot. My draft dodger friends, some of whom were also of the hippy types would smoke some pot. They wanted so badly to get me stoned, but I was not interested. I was not even tempted.

CANADA DREAM SQUASHED – OFF TO JAIL I GO

Well, one day, while getting a few supplies from town, two Canadian Mounties pulled over our truck and took me to jail, instructing Tara to gather our belongings and meet me at the border. I was being deported. I never did learn what led to my arrest but the charge was working without a visa. This was true. I did not do anything official to be living and working in Canada legally. Canada to me was my backyard. My parents took the family to Canada several times for vacations. I traveled up to Canada by car and by thumb a number of times. I walked across the border with a backpack. I didn’t think of Canada as another country but that was my naivety of course and my idealism that borders were man made and really of no consequence. This was a wake up call, that’s for sure.

But, I can’t say it was completely unanticipated. When I started working for the Provincial Parks, I used the assumed name, Clay. Clay had been a nickname Tara’s little sister gave me. My thinking at the time was, if Canada had a problem with my working illegally, then at least my real name would not be on the books so to speak. I know this thinking was quite flawed but at the time, at 20 years old, I thought it made sense and surprisingly enough Tara went along with it. Then to further emphasize our sense at the time that we were in fact living in Canada illegally and could be apprehended, we decided upon a strategy to attempt to correct this, however ill conceived.

Somehow we got the idea, that if we left Canada, then upon return we would have a fresh start. What was flawed with this idea was that we never planned to officially leave Canada as we never officially entered, so who would know we were reentering? Well we did it anyway and it was not without incident. We took our British Columbia registered truck across the border into Blaine, Washington. Then we virtually turned the truck around and tried to reenter. At the border the Canadian Border guard asked me if I had used Marijuana. I suppose looking like a hippy, that was a standard question to ask. Well, since I had not used marijuana for several years, I said…”I haven’t used it for years”. Well, that was not the time to be honest. He refused us entrance and we were in a jam because we didn’t know if we’d get home. Our plan at this point was to try to get across another border crossing. We did know that the border guards might have communicated with one another but we had to take that chance. So we proceeded east in Washington state to the next crossing and the guard seeing that we had a British Columbia truck suspected that we were living in Canada illegally, instead of vacationing and refused us entry. We were starting to freak over this. We went into the nearest town to the border and started to inquire from anyone we thought might know, how we might get across the border unnoticed. We knew this was dangerous but felt between a rock and a hard place. One fellow told us of people who have crossed at a ranch. Sometimes there are dirt roads and we might have to cut a wire fence. We considered doing that but we decided before going that far, we might try one more border entrance. Well, somehow this next border guard let us through. We figured that perhaps their communication link broke down and this guard was not so conscientious. I recall driving north in Canada at the Penticton crossing, wondering if some Mounties would be in our pursuit. We made it back to our cabin and from that point on wondered if someday we’d be apprehended. It was months before those Mounties pulled us over. I wouldn’t be surprised if the Mounties put out the watch for us based on our truck and appearance and license plate. We did not have an address though we did get our mail general delivery at the Clearwater post office which we did check when we came into town. They could have learned we were in town from that.

I was taken to a jail in Kamloops, a town of about 50,000 people. It was a difficult experience because at the time I had a toothache and they would not give me any pain relievers as they were afraid I was a drug user. The only way I could get momentary relief was by swishing cold water on the tooth. So I ended up pacing the cell day and night. A few days later I was given a hearing. I had no lawyer and no case so it was just a matter of time until I would be transported south. I remember when Tara showed up at jail and she saw me in my jail clothes, she cried. She had our stuff, all except for our beautiful wood cook stove that no one could help her with. Other friends did help her but they couldn’t fit the stove. A few days later I was headed south in a jail bus. We were on the road and because I was drinking so much water to keep my toothache at bay, I had a full bladder. I yelled out that I needed to relieve myself and I was ignored. I waited a bit and said it again and again nothing. The third time I yelled out that if he didn’t stop soon I was going to pee on the floor rather than damage my bladder. He said, hold off, we’d be at a stop momentarily. We stopped at the next town where they had a jail and I could be safely let it to relieve myself.

CRYING AT THE BORDER

We arrived at the border and I was let loose to walk over to the American side. It was Washington state. Tara was already there with the truck. We both went in side to US customs – a small office manned by one or two officials. I remember how we both cried at being extricated from a place we had grown to love. The border guard was actually sympathetic and comforting. Nonetheless, we headed south towards Yakima, Washington. We had $50 left to our names.

We had decided to head to the west coast of Oregon, where I thought perhaps I could get fishing work. I was raised a fisher. My dad, uncle and granddad, the Czech side of the family were fishers and would take myself and my cousin out fishing weekends. We caught flounders, blowfish, fluke, crabs, eel and whatnot. I have this image of boiling crabs at home followed by my mom sitting for hours picking crab meat out of shells leaving a mountain of shells. I did my fair share of gutting and cleaning of fish as well.

JESUS FREAKS TAKE US IN

When we got to Yakima, we heard a clunk from the engine area and as it ended up, we lost our highest 3rd gear, so we were stranded.

We were looking for someone to help us in Yakima and saw this man walking, a tall bearded man. He actually approached us and asked if he could help us. His name was Ted. He was part of a small group of what might be called Jesus freaks of the day. They were an independent from any formal church group type of group. They took us in to their home, where perhaps three couples lived. Ted was a talented guy and a mechanic and fixed our truck. It needed a new transmission. He located it and personally installed it and didn’t even take our $50. We were there for about two weeks at which time we shared in their work and needs and their worship services. They had music in their services so I participated in that. I also did a great deal of debating scripture with them. From reading scripture a great deal I was aware of certain hypocrisies, at least that’s what I called them. I would bring them up and debate them with them. They send us off with a fixed truck, not one iota poorer than when we came. They were often helping anyone and everyone in the community. These were people truly trying to serve God in the Jesus fashion as best they could. A year or so later, Tara and I returned to Yakima to pick fruit for a season and looked up Ted and his wife, whose name escapes me now. We found them and had a good meeting.

ARRIVED IN NEWPORT, OREGON FLAT BROKE AND OUT OF GAS

Well, we landed in Newport, Oregon and the gas tank was reading empty and the $50 was gone. We sat in the truck looking out over a pacific ocean sunset. I thought, lets find a place to stay for the night. We went into town, a town of 5000 people and about the only places that were open were the bars. That’s where we met Zanadu and he was certainly a character. Tall, dark and handsome but in the Charles Manson sort of way. He had a very low raspy voice, but he gave us a place to sleep, it just happened to be someone else’s bed who was not home at the moment. A couple days later when she returned she was fuming that we’d slept in her bed and in fact I was not happy about it either after I took a look at her. Oh, well, we were not that clean cut either. As it turned out, Zanadu was in the midst of opening a junk shop, three storefronts down the street from this pub where we met. He was collecting anything he could sell and he was certainly a wheeler dealer personality. So we helped him clean up the store and do some painting and then we put some of our leather goods in a showcase he had. We had leftover leather from Canada. We ended up putting handbags and such in a nice new age type store in Newport as well and we sold some stuff. Through Zanadu we met Robert. Robert was the owner of Zanadu’s house. Robert was a Brooklyn transplant who had purchased a bunch of old and in disrepair ocean view homes right in town and he rented them to anyone who could pay which ended up being fishermen, hippies and transients. It wasn’t a dishonest lot, just a poor one. Since we were NY’ers we got along well with Robert and he introduced us to Ron and Judy. Ron, another Brooklyn transplant had moved out to southern Oregon in the 60’s and lived in a real hippy farm commune. He had also begged the spiritual path of treks to India, where he got sick and was taken in by locals and healed and expected to marry the community heads daughter, a story right out of Kipling or someone like that. Judy was Ron’s partner, a young girl of perhaps 19 or 20 who had two children from another man, a four year old named Jenny and a 1 yr. old named Noah. Ron thought of these kids as his own. They had a great little apartment in Newport immediately on an ocean cliff living above some older hippy astrologers. Newport, as it turned out was a hippy haven in 1972. Tara and I met all sorts of characters and I began playing music with various fellows. I was gigging for beer at one dock side pub and that woman whose bed we borrowed was drunk as a skunk one night and tried to give me one heck of a sloppy kiss, which I narrowly escaped, thank God. I never did take to drunk women or casual sex though the idea of it had it’s draw – just not something I could really dive into.

I took a job making outdoor furniture with a pornography buff. I didn’t know this on the outset, until one day he invited me and the other employee to his house after work. I wasn’t interested. Besides my infatuation with the female body, porn seemed deplorable, though I guess it’s all about the same thing, sex, something I still had an hefty appetite for, though Tara’s was waning.

LIVING ON THE SILETZ INDIAN RESERVATION

We rented a house in  Siletz, Oregon, actually on the Siletz Indian reservation along with some roommates, two single girls, Michelle and Patty and their part time boyfriends. Kent, Michelle boy friend was a great kind of guy. We got along well. He played dulcimer and I played flute with him and we would travel around playing here and there. One time we walked into a field of high grass and sat down and began to play. It was a crazy house and Tara’s sister Cara, having graduated high school came out from New York to live with us. I had started to smoke a little pot again. Those two brooklynites influenced me. I held off for a while but in the music scene it enhanced emotion so served to accentuate our performances, or so we thought. But more so it was because Ron and I loved to talk philosophy and spirituality. Tara didn’t approve of my pot smoking and especially when I used $30 from the $1000 she borrowed from her Dad, much of which went into the first/last months rent on the house. The house was wild but not in a druggy or sexy way, just wild with youth and music. I remember being perfectly straight and crawling around the floor barking like a dog chasing after whoever. I guess my past drug use had fried my brain.

FRESH PICKED PSYLLISYBIN MUSHROOMS

One day Tara and I picked our own psilocybin mushrooms that grew wild all over the cow pastures in that Oregon coastal rain forest environment. We each ate about 20 and wow was it gross. They tasted bad, bad, bad and they were so chewy, chewy, chewy. We both got sick, sick, sick and heaved ho, wrenched our guts, but afterwards were in la la land for hours. I would never do that again and neither would she. What was strange was that Tara seemed to want to do it more than I. I had experienced the “trip” many times before and can’t say it was always pleasant, but she was virtually untainted by the alter consciousness. In fact, she seemed to be a natural trip. One time, when she was perfectly straight, she said she saw two beings on a ridgeline not too far distant. I asked for more information and she just said they were there. It wasn’t something she thought she saw out of the corner of her eye or something she was imagining. She thought she saw them. I saw nothing of the sort, no place, no how.

Well nearing winters end, my job ended and so did keeping the house because my boss stopped paying me. It was strange that the next time I saw my coworker he had a bandage on his hand. He had cut off a finger on a saw. While I was working there, I always thought he was a little too confident. The boss had taken a liking to him so he got to do more of the sawing and I did more of the sanding. I guess sometimes what seems like the lessor position might turn out to be the better one. So, we had a little money left so decided we were sort of stagnant in the Newport area.

SUMMER MIGRANT WORKER IN THE FRUIT ORCHARDS

We decided to hitchhike to Yakima, Washington and Hood River, Oregon to pick fruit for the season, which is where we reunited with Ted the generous hearted Jesus enthusiast and his wife, whose name slips my mind. The truck was just too costly to drive. While camping in the apple orchard, Tara tells me she wants to visit our Canadian friends Linda and Alde in British Columbia. I was against it as we didn’t have transportation. I couldn’t go as I thought I’d be turned away at the border due to my deportation. She went anyway and my heart broke. We had not been apart for even a day in four years. It was the beginning of her independence though. She hitchhiked up there alone. Alde was a handsome guy we’d met in Canada who Tara was somewhat infatuated with, or so it seemed while we lived up there. They stuck to tickle fights as strange as that sounds, at least as far as I knew but I knew there could be some fire there so I was a little jealous and that was part of the reason I didn’t want her to go. She also got into those tickle fights with Dave the woodsman which was also strange. I recall in our Canada cabin, Dave and Joan would come over for tea and cookies. There wasn’t any TV or anything much to do but read and talk. Tara and Dave would start tickling and Joan and I would just look at each other as if to say…what’s this about…are we supposed to be getting it on too, which neither of us really felt inclined to. However the main reasons I was upset by Tara’s trek north without me were her safety and yes, my loneliness or feeling rejected. Alde had been down to the states to visit us once since we left Canada and he and I were good friends so I trusted him. I recall sitting in my tent in the orchard at night alone and weepy. I couldn’t even play the flute. I just did not have the energy, the breath nor desire to create music. I was unhappy because I felt this was the beginning of the end of our relationship. I learned later that more stages were yet to come. I was no angel with other women though I never went beyond lusting in my head. I even had some chances but never took them. The reasons were two fold. I was shy and didn’t want to hurt Tara.

TARA AND I HAVE A FIRST PARTING

So she went to Canada and came back three or four days later and had little to say of her experience and I didn’t ask much either. Upon returning to Newport, we took another job picking holly, you know that Christmas mistletoe stuff with sharp pointy leaves.

With the little money we earned we took a trek around Oregon for a new place to live. We went all the way east to Bend, Oregon, then south to Crater Lake area and back up through Eugene and could find nothing we could afford but we sure burned our budget down to the end. So we went back to Newport and were turned on to a place to stay for $30/month. It was a big, broken down trailer in the woods close to Waldport, Oregon maybe 15 miles or so south of Newport. We moved our stuff and decided to spend the rest of the cold wet winter in the south, so once again we stuck out the thumbs. We made our way to San Diego where Patty our Siletz roommate had moved and she put us up. It was great down there in the sun. We even applied for public assistance with San Diego and they put us on a work program. I drove around on a truck picking up trash for 3 days and in return got about $100 and some food stamps. We didn’t need much. I have several distinct memories from that time. One is when I was at an airport, perhaps picking up trash as part of that job. I was approached by a Hare Krishna person. We talked and he ended up giving me a copy of the Bhagavad Gita. It was a 6 inch thick large book. Another was while waiting for public assistance a Jesus freak began a debate with me and I felt like I held my own quite well in his bible backed language as I was no stranger to the bible. In the end he blessed me but said Tara was the devil keeping me from God. I recall hitchhiking east from San Diego to Lake Havasu City, Arizona and this guy picked us up and said he was a preacher and that the Lord told him to pick us up. He said, whenever the spirit moves him, he gets goose bumps all over his arms and that happened to him when he saw us standing on the side of the road. I remember getting into Arizona and being broke and hungry and going to a church to ask for help and they gave us a voucher for some food. We went to Lake Havasu, again looking for opportunity, but also because my folks had just purchased a condo there. We stayed in it though it had no lights or A/C or furniture. It was not a good time. We returned to San Diego and met up with my sister who had just enlisted into the Navy, at my mother’s suggestion. She was stationed at Coronado Island. We hadn’t seen each other for some years, so it was great. She was grown up. I later learned that was the height of her party life in the Navy and where she met her husband who she became pregnant by and who then abandoned her.

So with no luck finding anything we were inclined to become a part of in California we hitched back north. On the way back, along highway 1, the Pacific coast highway, we hit a glitch. A policeman arrested me for hitchhiking as I was the one sticking out my thumb. What infuriated me was that he took me away in the patrol car and left Tara there alone to get home by…yes, by thumb as it was in the middle of nowhere and we were still virtually broke. We didn’t hitchhike for the fun of it. I spent the night in a local California jail. The next day we drove north a bit and I stayed the night in another jail. The next day they took me to Portland, OR where I was in general lock up. The next day I was arraigned. I was to pay a fine of near $300 I believe. I told the judge I had no money and no way to pay so he said I could spend 3 more days in jail instead of paying the fine, which is what I did. Tara made it home okay and she with some friends picked me up at the Portland jail. By the way there were no signs against hitchhiking, as there are on many freeways in the west. It wasn’t on the freeway. It was on the Pacific coast highway. It was ridiculous but they had the power over me so I went along.

To add difficulty to our situation, when we returned to our trailer, we saw that we had been robbed. My nice conga drums were gone and some other stuff. It ended up it was the young son of the landlord and I got the drums back and some other stuff but not all of it. I guess it was a karmic payback for my petty thievery which for whatever it was worth was never against a person with the exception of some cigarette from the person I was babysitting for and that was less than a pack. I stole from organizations. I’m not really justifying it. It was wrong. It was interesting though that even though these prize possessions of mine were taken, I was not angry with the robber, just like I was not angry with Hobbit in trying to steal my for all intents and purposes my wife. I did not try to press charges or anything. I just wanted my drums back so I could continue in the band.

ACCELLERATED NEW AGE SPIRITUALITY

It was about this time that we started to get more spiritual. We began participating in various meditation groups around Newport. At one meeting, I was outside and the group said they saw a huge light in the room. Then for several times we danced with the Sufis. One other occasions we meditated on the picture of an ascended master, in this case Sri Chinmoy. A fellow musician who I played with sometimes and who was an exceptional guitarist was a strong devotee. Meanwhile every night I was reading the Bhagavad Gita while Tara embroidered and did whatnot. I continued practicing the flute and was getting better fairly fast.

THE BEGINNING OF MY FIRST GIGGING BAND – CATHARSIS

It was about this time that we met Paul, a good rhythm guitarist with a great look, a fine voice, a romantic style and manner and not bloated with success. He and I became a number in the sense that I was a good percussionist, harmonica player and I had just began playing flute. Mainly he needed percussion. We attracted a good lead guitarist named Dave who could duplicate every Dylan song he ever did. We didn’t do Dylan in our act though as our repertoire was all Paul’s original love songs in a Trinidad rhythm which I was fairly adept at maintaining percussively. Paul was of Trinidad decent. And then we added an upright bass player. We had a band and called it Catharsis I believe. We gigged wherever we could. We played at Canyon West in Newport. It was a combo Heath Food Store, Natural Food Restaurant/Bakery, New Age Bookstore under one large roof and in the middle was seating against a large stage. This is where I first felt the ego of a performer. I would gloat a bit I admit while setting up. I was proud of our music. When we first got together we were in The Dalles near Hood River, Oregon visiting friends. Actually we were seriously considering moving there to homestead on some raw land. We scoped out a site along with three other couples. While in Hood River one night we started playing music on the street, that is until the police told us to move along. But it was at our friends house that I got two things. First, it is where I had my ear pierced. Some girl who said she had done it before volunteered and put some ice on my lobe and then ground her way though my ear lobe with a pin. The ice numbness never really did take and wore off. She kept going and going and was admittedly having trouble with my earlobe. Finally she got through and I immediately passed out. If you recall I passed out easily from any trauma. Not a very tough guy I guess. I awoke a joker as usual though. That night the band first got together electrically and with a full drum set that I played in addition to the Congas. It was pure magic. Yes, we smoked some weed but the music really flowed. There were slow melodys that were heavenly with light cymbal work just in the right places and there were toe taping Latin sounding rhythms with sensitive lead guitar and bass work. We knew we had a great sound. We didn’t homestead there. It was just too dry to try to live there and build there though there was a decent site in a gorge by a creek, just not much access by road.

Paul as it turned out was making his living as a painter – a house painter that is so he hired me as a helper and it was fun and we played music all the time. We played for meals at nice trendy Newport restaurants. We played at a fair in a neighboring town. We played for slide shows. There was a local photographer that had just returned from Alaska. So he showed the slides and we played the music during the presentation and it was advertised and attracted maybe a hundred people and we were a successful band, at least for small time potatoes. I don’t recall our pay. I know it wasn’t much. On the side I played for a good Belly Dancer and her flute playing boyfriend. We did several demos for the Newport community. They generated a couple hundred people. I was considered a very good improvisational percussionist. I didn’t have to practice much with whoever I was playing with. I seemed to be able to stop and the right places and change at the right places and get fast and loud or slow and quiet at the right places and perhaps my biggest asset was an ability to stop on a dime to make really professional finishes. I also played for an African Dance Class. Nothing paid big dollars but it was something.

TARA HAS A BRIEF AFFAIR – MY HEART BROKE

But my music had some problems associated. I would always be on stage playing or practicing and Tara wasn’t really involved. At shows she’d be near or dancing and she was a good dancer and rather attractive with her dark Turkish look with long, long thick black hair nearly down to her knees that she’d wave around like a flag while wearing colorful long skirts. So she attracted men and one became her dance partner and soon became more than that. I was troubled by that, in fact devastated when I was out of the picture. I recall walking the highway talking out loud to whatever or whoever might hear me, angry but sad. I certainly had a jealous streak but not so much so that I kept a rein on her. I wasn’t that angry with Hobbit, as he called himself. He was an elf of a guy, cute I suppose, and he seemed to always be tripped out more than just on weed. He was likable and he loved the ladies and was a sweet lure. After a week in the doldrums I accepted her choice and decided it wasn’t going to rule my life. Shortly after my acceptance of her new relationship Hobbit dumped her, as she said, and she came running back to me. I forgave her and we moved on, but I knew we’d changed. We were no longer the naïve lovers we started out as. We’d been though a lot. I guess we both grew up some.

It was about this time, that we decided on a new direction. Robert, the fellow who owned all those houses in Newport also owned a 10 acre parcel of land in Waldport, Oregon, 20 or so miles south of Newport. This was his home, an A frame he built some years prior. We had become close to him and Ron and Judy so he invited us to build a house on his property and to live there. It sounded good to us. We had already been involved in expanding and tending a big vegetable garden there. So we located a spot, down in a gully, near a creek and built a lean to that we camped in while I began building our house. I planned to build a Tee Pee shaped house out of logs. I found the trees I could use on his property and cut them down, stripped them of bark, let them dry a little and then treated them with creosote. While they were drying, which wouldn’t have really been enough time to stop their checking, I built the foundation. I used cinder blocks. Robert had an account with the Waldport hardware store that he allowed me to use. He also had some old lumber and windows he donated to our project. I ran logs from one cider block post to the other, notching them together. I knew a little about what I was doing from my study of log cabin building before our move to British Columbia and I was handy with a chain saw and axe, the main tools I would use. Next I sank a middle pole into concrete into the ground and attached a carved star to the top. I ran the prepared logs from the foundation joists to this crown to form the skeleton of the structure. Next I laid floor joists to the middle pole and put down a crude floor that I layered. Then I framed the sides bringing them out as bay windows and then built a loft floor.

COMPELLED TO HITCHIKE BACK TO NEW YORK TO SEE FAMILY

For some reason I, at this time felt compelled to visit my family back east. Tara was not really in approval of it. We had a long history of contention on my relationship with my mother. I think it must have stemmed from the fact that when she was 15 she lost her mother in a terrible accident. Her mother was hospitalized for pneumonia and was medicated to assist with sleeping but apparently the rails on her bed were not put up one night and she rolled off the bed and hit her head, went into a comma and died a short time later. I can only imagine how that would hurt and affect one for their entire life. Maybe I’m wrong about this reason for Tara’s objections at my desire for contact with my mother. Perhaps it was also because my mother was always on my case about not calling them more often. I was not great on that score and frequently it was about cost. Long distance charges in the early 70’s were not cheap and especially for us as at times we were well below any poverty statistics. I called collect at times. Whenever I did, I got yelled at for not calling more. I wrote infrequently. I guess I was an insensitive kid who was out gallivanting but it was not really new to my mother. When I left for college, I already had quite the estranged relationship with my folks. I loved them but as I rebelled so from their parenting style so I could do what I wanted to do and went far afield from what to them would have been a good kid they could be proud of. Nearly flunking out of high school, and drug usage, lying, stealing, Hitchhiking all over the place, then shacking up with a Jewish girl (though my parents certainly liked Tara), then to move to a distant part of the globe, getting deported and living a hippy life so to speak were not considered favorable ways to be living. I basically fought against my parents wishes by tooth and nail and not being in more regular communication was really just par for the course. So when I would bring up to Tara that I wanted to call them, she generally objected and we’d argue about it, bringing up how I didn’t want to get married without consulting my mother all over again. But Tara agreed to take the trip back east with me and lacking funds and considering our truck was in disrepair we decided to hitchhike and this time we would travel a northern U.S. route. This was our first trip back east. It was an uneventful trip that took about a week. I remember getting to my parents house fairly late and night and as the door was locked I tapped on my little brother’s window. He was now about 14 years old and wow was he excited. We stayed up all night telling the stories of our Canadian wilderness adventure and life in Oregon. We stayed around for about a week. I remember talking to my brother and sister, who must have been home on leave from the Navy about spirits and reincarnation and how I came to believe in both. I am noting this because I felt like I had a real sense of the existence of spirit. It seemed more real to me than what we only read about and wondered about. While in my home town I remember, my mom and dad had sold a car for me, one I left behind years back. They decided to give me my share of the money, a little over $200 bucks. I took it and bought a new flute. I had been using a nickel plated student model and now I was getting a brand new silver plated student model. While home on Long Island I visited with an old boyhood friend, Ron, who was now a professional drummer working the upstate New York clubs. He was teaching drums also and just so happened had a drum set a student was upgrading from, so he offered it to me for nothing or next to nothing. We shipped them to Oregon. We spent time with most of my extended family. We also spent plenty of time with Tara’s family. They liked me in general, that is her dad, stepmom and Uncle. The rest of the family didn’t like that I was a Catholic. They made that known during several family gatherings. They were outright nasty with things they would say but I was the guy their Tara had chose so what could they do.

Tara was quite independent minded. Tara’s uncle wanted her to visit her grandmother and didn’t want her hitchhiking so he bought us a bus ticket to Florida that would continue on to our new home in Oregon. It was about August of 1975 when we returned home and we were greeted by big warm smiles from Robert, Ron and Judy who were hard at work in the garden.

BEGINNING OF A NEW PHASE – A COMMUNE

Times were fairly good. We had a place to lay our heads building this new house. My band was regularly playing and I was making a little money at it. We would hitchhike to Newport and back frequently for music and a social life and for occasional work. Cara by the way had been living with a guy she met there. We would see her frequently around town. She had her own truck, somewhat like ours and seemed quite content with her life which didn’t cross paths with us much. Her dad sent her money now and again.

But our lives were about to really change in the most dramatic way I suppose it could have, short of something life threatening occurring, though this certainly was seen by our relatives as that traumatic.

THE END OF THE BEGINNING

Chapter Two – First Contact with Bo and Peep’s H.I.M – Human Individual Metamorphosis

It was in Newport, Oregon, a small north-western U.S. coastal fishing town where I was first introduced to the group via a posted meeting announcement. It was September of 1975, just a month after the 17th of August when I turned 24 years old. Tara and I had just spent the night at Paul’s place. I was the percussionist/drummer, harmonica and flute player in Paul’s band. We had had a jam session that as usual extended into the wee hours. Tara and I had been living together for over five years by then. We both grew up in the same town on Long Island in New York, a suburb of Manhattan where I was born. We met a year or so after graduating from different high schools and through quite a twisty turn of events that took us hitchhiking all over Canada, the U.S. and briefly into Mexico for over 10,000 miles ended up in Newport. We lived in Waldport, just 20 minutes by car south on the Pacific coast highway. It often took us longer to make the trek to Newport as we frequently traveled by thumb. In this case our 1949 GMC pickup truck, we’d bought in Canada some 3 years before for $350 was temporarily out of commission. The last time we drove it home to Waldport, it’s driver side wheel came off while driving 55 mph and we skidded on the wheel drum until it would operate no more. I somehow got the wheel back on and thumped it the last few miles home.

On this somewhat clear morning, with little sleep under our belts we stumbled out of Paul’s house, one of many old houses populated by hippies and fishers. We were not wild partiers. Tara never drank alcohol and only rarely tried smoking pot. Her personality was naturally high. On the only occasion where she partook of the dreaded illegal plant she nearly scared me to death and from just one little toke on the pipe. It was actually one of my prime introductions to the “unseen” world, setting the stage for future belief.

One night in about 1970 Tara and I were watching TV together, kind of cuddling like some lovers do and she decided she would try marijuana for the first time. I had been a pot/acid head for several years prior. Anyway, so we smoked one hit each. In minutes she was hallucinating with closed eyes that we were on Noah’s Ark and she was describing in detail the animals and all as if she was seeing it in her head in Technicolor. Scared me big time and I was trying to calm her down, afraid she was going to flip out as she was relating what she saw in a shocked kind of way. It wasn’t pot laced with anything as that was not done back then. I don’t know how or when it started but all I can recall is feeling fear. We were clutching one another like you’d see in Hollywood and I couldn’t keep from looking at her bedroom door that went to the hallway of the big house she lived in with her dad and stepmom. And the fear kept building for both of us. Now I did have many minor hallucinations while under the influence of other drugs like acid and mescaline in years earlier, but never felt this kind of paranoia from pot, not in the least. After some time, perhaps 10-15 minutes of feeling this fear – feeling like there was something on the other side of the door about to burst in, something evil, I was building the courage to go open the door because I also knew this was crazy – it had to be all in our minds. She didn’t tell me to be fearful of anything and we didn’t talk about it so somehow I was either being affected by her or something else. She also felt the fear and by then had stopped talking about Noah’s Arc. I sat up to go to the door, when all of a sudden the door burst open (we never locked it) and Tara’s younger sister of 14 came rushing into the room crying hysterically. She was an attractive physically developed young girl. She calmed down a bit and began to explain what had just happened. She said as she was walking home, a man stopped his car and somehow grabbed her and tried to physically pull her into the car but she broke loose and ran all the way home scared to death. Wow, was I shocked. I stopped smoking pot then and there. Besides dreams and feelings, that was my most concrete (non-substance induced) experience to demonstrate a reality beyond the obvious physical that had interface with the physical. Little did I know there were many more to come.

But coming out of the house, the ocean was as usual quite beautiful to see and feel. It was still a bit foggy as it is most mornings on the Pacific Northwest’s coast and less than fifty yards from the cliff perched beach house was a little general store. Just outside the store on a pole I noticed a poster and called Tara to come over and take a look. It read:

UFO’s

– Why they are here
– Who they have come for
– When they will leave.

Not a discussion of UFO sightings or phenomena

Two individuals say they were sent from the level above human, and are about to leave the human level and literally (physically) return to that next evolutionary level in a spacecraft (UFO) within months! “The Two” will discuss how the transition from the human level to the next level is accomplished, and when this may be done.

This is not a religious or philosophical organization recruiting membership. However, the information has already prompted many individuals to devote their total energy to the transitional process. If you have ever entertained the idea that there may be a real, PHYSICAL level beyond the Earth’s confines, you will want to attend this meeting. ************************

I remember reading it several times and commenting to Tara on the unusual content. “Two individuals say they were sent from the level above human”. “I’ve got to go to this just to see what these folks look like”, I recall saying to Tara with a curious but cautious tone. To date there were many groups I’d taken some interest in but none I felt like joining. She seemed equally interested and it became the main topic of conversation for the next few days prior to the Sunday afternoon meeting. Curiously the reference to UFO’s meant little to nothing to me. In fact a couple months or so before seeing this poster I didn’t know anything at all about UFO’s, that is except for science fiction TV shows or movies like the Jetsens, the Outer Limits and the Twilight Zone, fictitious stuff. But then there was one time while we were visiting our best friends Ron and Judy at their second story apartment on the same cliff where Paul lived and where we jammed. That evening Ron had the radio on and as Ron and I often partook of a little bud, that’s pot, I was a little spaced out, no pun intended, when I tuned into the radio part way into what to me sounded like a news cast. It was saying that a crashed disk had been found near Roswell and that it contained what were believed to be alien bodies. I perked up immediately and remembers exclaiming, “Did you all here that…there was a crashed disk and alien bodies found!!!”. Neither Ron, nor Judy nor Tara even looked at me with more than a glance and certainly said nothing about it. They were preparing dinner and Ron was watching the news on TV so perhaps they didn’t hear the radio that was on more for Judy in the kitchen though all sounds were evident in this tiny apartment.

However, unbeknown to me at the time my interest in what the poster said was also peaked for less obvious reasons. The part that stood out most, beside these two being from this “other place” was where it said how it had “already prompted many individuals to devote their total energy”. At the time, not knowing hardly anything about it, I hadn’t thought I wanted to do that, not even knowing what that entailed. I guess it did put a sense of urgency and seriousness on it that stood out among the myriad of spiritual movements that flooded the west coast environment in the early 70’s. Nothing of the dozen or so movements I was aware of ever spoke of giving one’s “total” energy. I know the fact that it mentioned returning via spacecraft to the next level in months didn’t affect me. I was not excited by the idea at all.

I remember talking to my closest friends about it and a number of them also planned to attend the meeting which was less than a week away and just so happens was to be held in a small restaurant on the coast just north of Waldport where I was in the process of participating with two other couples in a small startup commune. It was my friend Robert’s land upon which he had an A frame house. We had about 1/4 acre producing garden and I was down the ravine a bit building our own house. I had cut the trees down, prepared them and had begun my own T-Pee design made of large poles to a center pole on a cinder block and log foundation. It was about halfway constructed with lots of windows on each of it’s six sides forming the walls that squared off the bottom level, a floor, and a spiral staircase to the loft all made with either forest logs or salvaged materials. I had studied log cabin building a couple years before as Tara and I left Long Island hoping to homestead in British Columbia, Canada, part of that twisty trek to Oregon

Chapter Three – The Meeting – The Two

The meeting room in the restaurant was very full to standing room only, perhaps 200 people. There was a high stage area. Each participants chair had a legal size handout that was typewritten and filled the 8 1/2 x 14 inch page with hardly a margin.

This handout was the first statement of “The Two” as some called them, Bo and Peep to others, Guinea and Pig to still others, all names they used to introduce themselves. Their legal human names were not important to the content of the information they sought to deliver. Later they would take the names Ti and Do, (pronounced Tea and Doe – from the notes on the musical scale). This document was written in March of 1975 by Do (aka Bo and Guinea) while he was in jail for keeping a rental car longer than they had paid for. When the car they left Houston with broke down they rented another but quickly ran out of money to pay for it so periodically they wrote letters to the rental car company explaining that they had the car and fully intended to pay for it but didn’t have the money yet. In any case, they were apprehended for a completely unrelated reason which turned up that the rental car company had reported the car stolen. When Do got out of jail on a plea bargain for time served, at that time 6 months, they headed to a friend’s place in Ojai, California, where Peep(Ti) typed up what Bo(Do) wrote and sent out some ninety copies to every religious and spiritual leader they could think of.

The leader of a Los Angeles meditation group was on their list and was intrigued by their “Statement” so sent two of his students to meet with Bo and Peep to check them out and potentially invite them to speak to his group, which they did. Statement 1 read as follows:

Statement One

What religions have sought to understand since the beginning of their origin is what is above the human level of existence. Most have taught that if an individual lives a “good life” adoring some savior that he will inherit some “heaven” after his death. Only if it were that simple. That viewpoint is as inaccurate as the caterpillar believing that if he dies a good caterpillar he will mysteriously awaken in a rose blossom and live there forever with the King butterfly. He must become a butterfly while a healthy caterpillar – overcoming his decaying option.  If he rises above all caterpillar ways, converts all his energies to the pursuit of becoming literally another creature who circulates in another world, he becomes a butterfly. Likewise a human who seeks only to become a member of his next evolutionary kingdom may become a member of that kingdom if he completely overcomes all the aspects and influences of the human level providing he has found favor with a member of that next level who will direct him through his metamorphosis.  As the caterpillar, the human can complete this changeover only before his death as a human.  A member of the next kingdom finds favor with one who is willing to endure all of the necessary growing pains of weaning himself totally from his human condition. Members of that next kingdom are no more confined to human limitations than butterflies to caterpillar limitations.  Nor do they in like comparison concern themselves with human type indulgences or concerns.  However, if the human is thought of as the larva of that next kingdom then there are, at times, those who are approaching the completion of their individual metamorphosis and are beginning to have some of the attributes and characteristics of that next kingdom.  When the metamorphosis is complete their “perennial” and cyclic nature is ended for their “new” body has overcome decay, disease and death.  It has converted over chemically, biologically, and in vibration to the “new” creature. Approximately 2,000 years ago an individual of that next kingdom forfeited his body of that kingdom and entered a human female’s womb, thereby incarnating as the one history refers to as Jesus of Nazareth.  He awakened to this fact gradually through the same metamorphic process and came to know that he had incarnated for the express purpose of telling and showing, even to the point of proof, that the next kingdom can be entered by overcoming the human aspects and literally converting into a “man” or creature of that next kingdom – the kingdom of his Father – one who is already a member of that kingdom.  By His resurrection He proved that death can be literally overcome and that a permanent body for the next kingdom is acquired from the human kingdom. He did not leave His body in the grave.  He converted it into His body of that next kingdom. This is the only way the next kingdom is entered permanently. Each human has that full potential.  Jesus’ “Christing” or christening was completed at His transfiguration (metamorphic completion) and He remained in the “larva” environment, with other humans, only for some 40 days to show that His teaching had been accomplished.  He showed them His new body and demonstrated a few of its new attributes, i.e., appearing and disappearing (changing His vibrations) before their eyes while letting some of His friends touch His “new” body.  This could be compared to a butterfly remaining in the caterpillar world for a few days to show them what they had to look forward to if they chose to seek true conscious communication with a butterfly and were willing to overcome all of their caterpillar ways.  Then Jesus left them in a cloud of light (what humans refer to as UFO’s) and moves and returns in the same manner.

There are two individuals here now who have also come from that next kingdom, incarnate as humans, awakened, and will soon demonstrate the same proof of overcoming death.  They are “sent” from that kingdom by the “Father” to bear the same truth that was Jesus’.  This is like a repeat performance, except this time by two (a man and a woman) to restate the truth Jesus bore, restore its accurate meaning, and again show that any individual who seeks that kingdom will find it through the same process.  This “re-statement” or demonstration will happen within months.  The two who are the “actors” in this “theatre” are in the meantime doing all they can to relate this truth as accurately as possible so that when their bodies recover from their “dead” state (resurrection) and they leave (UFO’s) those left behind will have clearly understood the formula.

Those who can believe this process and do it will be “lifted up” individually and “saved” from death – literally.  If you seek those two while they are here they will gladly fill you in on the details and assist those who wish to follow in this “path.”

If this speaks to you – respond – according to your capabilities or needs.  For your sake – give this opportunity your best.

End of Statement 1

I read the document rather quickly and took particular interest to it’s references to Jesus. Everything made sense to me but I wanted to see these two. What did they look like – two people who say they are from this “other” level somewhere in outer space.

They walked out onto the stage and looked ordinary. They took seats and just sat quietly looking out onto the audience without expression. One was a woman and one a man, both in their 40’s. They looked normal. I saw nothing about them that looked unusual. They both wore greenish windbreakers and in that they did resemble one another. They both had what I would call butch haircuts slightly over the ears on the sides. As they sat silently, I recall thinking, what are they waiting for? Some minutes passed.

Bo then began to speak about a “light” that has come close to our planet Earth that bears an opportunity for a very brief time. They said they were representatives from the Next Level incarnate to offer membership in that Kingdom. They said it was a physical kingdom with many members and that this was the way new members were born into that kingdom, by overcoming their human attachments when Next Level reps were present who would guide them through the overcoming process. They talked about the content of the Statement I’d just read but hardly digested so it all sounded new to me. Bo got to a point where he said the “process” of transition from human to membership in this Next Evolutionary Level Above Human, what Jesus called the Kingdom of Heaven was a kind of metamorphosis just like what we see in a caterpillar moving into the Butterfly world. The caterpillar must all but cease being a caterpillar to allow for all it’s energy to be used to create it’s wings – a new body that is no longer limited in the ways of the old one. He explained that it was the same for a human. When the opportunity presents itself by the incarnate presence of members from that Kingdom Level a human can choose to leave life as they know it to engage in their own metamorphosis. This amounts to walking out the door of one’s entire life to devout all their energies to this process full time. He reiterated that they were here now to help those who wanted their help. He stated that in practical terms it meant no longer engaging in relationships, marriages, sex, business, schooling, entertainment or family. He said that this opportunity was not open to children because they could not decide on their own yet and parents can not in this case rightfully decide for them.

At this point I heard a loud voice from the back of the room, “You ought to be shot” a woman shouted, and it’s about then that I noticed that the air around these two was hazy. They had two spot lights on them on the stage and it was lighter than the rest of the rather dark room but then I turned my head and noticed this same haze hanging throughout the middle of the room and it had a shimmering motion to it. I didn’t think it was smoke. I smelled no smoke and I was once a smoker so was quite sensitive to the smell. If it was smoke there was a lot of it but it didn’t act like smoke. It wasn’t as dense.

The air in the room was certainly tense with so many different people there listening to this plain Jane presentation of hard to believe material though for me it seemed to make total sense. There was no hell fire and brimstone, no saying anyone must do this, no pressure saying if you don’t you’ll burn in hell, no glamorous presentation, no paraphernalia as is so common with virtually every religious denomination and it was so simple. They never asked for money or had any books to sell.

Then Bo said, if anyone has any questions they can stay after and that there were some in the audience that have decided to make this their total effort who could help you with your questions.

I looked at Tara and she at me and we both had grins on our faces and knew this was what we wanted.

On the same row we sat in there were two of the group’s members Bo spoke of. They introduced themselves as Logan and Sooner – a very tall grey haired man in his late 40’s and a younger woman. We said we wanted to join so they told us to put our lives in order but try not to take more than 2-3 days to do so as they were on the move and there would be no way to find them if we did not make the agreed upon rendezvous where they would tell us where to go next. They also said the longer we take the more difficult it could be to take this step, as forces in the world would attempt to keep you from doing so. They explained that they were traveling and camping so we could bring with us anything that would be helpful to include camping gear, automobiles and of course funds. There was no minimum – everyone was sharing what they had. They gave us a park location and time to be in Eugene, Oregon which was just a couple hours from Waldport.

That’s when the Earth shook, not literally, but in our lives and the lives of those we had formed relationships. I remember going around to all of our friends to tell them what we experienced and what we were about to do. Most just listened but had little to say. Ron and Judy had also decided to join as did Robert who owned the land we were homesteading on. And Greg a fine musician I used to play with occasionally was joining also.

I remember telling everyone that I felt like I was sitting in front of the equivalent of Jesus. They didn’t say either of them was Jesus, just that they came from the same place Jesus came from and had the same information of how to make the transition to the Next Level – aka Kingdom of Heaven, not a place we attain to automatically after we die if we’ve lived a good life. No one knew me as a Jesus freak or even a Christian. I also felt my life passed before my eyes and everything seemed geared to that moment like this was my fate or destiny.

Chapter Four – Leaving my life behind to give my all to the metamorphic process

Tara and I knew we’d be splitting up. Just a few months earlier we had just such a preview. We broke up for a week or so which was very traumatic for me for most of that time yet I pulled through it and began to move on but as it turned out we got back together. This was different – it was a mutual breakup as we both seemed full steam ahead in this new direction not hardly aware of just how bizarre it was for virtually everyone else we knew.

One of the first people we told was Tara’s younger sister, Clara who was just 19 by then. Clara came out from New York to live with us over a year earlier, as soon as she graduated high school. After living with us for some six months in a house we rented on the Siletz Indian reservation, near Newport, she met a local guy and before too long was living with him and we hardly saw her.

Clara freaked out at the news or our joining and pending indefinite departure. It was understandable of course. Though she was living on her own, had a job and a truck and a steady boyfriend and lived separate from us, she still wanted to be close to her sister. They had been very close ever since their mother died from a freak accident in the hospital where she was being treated for pneumonia and was given a sedative to sleep and the attendants did not put up the bed rails. She fell out of bed and hit her head, went into a coma and died. Tara was 16. Clara was 11. I wish I could say I was sensitive to Clara’s feelings. I was not. I was more selfish than I ever had been before it seemed.

As we exited the meeting we ran into our two best friends, Ron and Judy. They were also planning on joining. We had just visited them in their seaside second floor apartment to talk about going to our Eugene rendezvous together, just a couple days away. When we got downstairs we were met at the door by Clara and two police officers. Clara had gone to the police to try to stop us. She knew Ron and Judy were also leaving and she knew Judy had two children – a girl whose name escapes me, who was perhaps four and a 1 1/2 yr. old boy named Noah. Ron was not their father. Judy had been separated from their dad for over a year or two by then. They were living together as a happy family. Ron loved the kids and acted as their father, but they too were taken by Bo and Peep’s message, so Judy was talking with her X about taking the kids for a while so they could check this out. He had agreed, I understood. The police said to me that Clara had reported to them that some children were about to be abandoned. I denied any such knowledge which made Clara furious. Tara said nothing. The police left and Clara stayed back and there was a great deal of yelling and crying between Clara and Tara. When Clara saw Tara’s resolve she threatened to drive her truck over the cliff. We didn’t take her seriously.

The next day Tara’s dad, uncle and grandmother flew out from New York at Clara’s behest to try to talk her out of this wild idea. We met with them including Clara in their motel and again there was discussion and lots of tears and some yelling, exhaustion and it ended with frustration. I said little. They all liked me, but then I was this Catholic while Tara was a Jew, so all the talk of Jesus pointed to my influence over Tara. I don’t recall in the five years Tara and I lived together that I ever talked with her about Jesus. I knew that she believed in who Jesus was but that was about it.

The next morning Tara and I looked at one another and knew we could wait no longer. We needed to leave town immediately or else who knows what might have happened to try to stop us. We had actually tied up our loose ends as instructed.

I did not have much in terms of possessions, a truck and some instruments I played – flute, harmonica, Conga drums and a drum set. I’d been in a band with Paul that simply formed when I met him a year or so before. He was such a tall, dark and handsome, charismatic, romantic singer and played a lovely finger picking styled custom made acoustic guitar. His Mom was from Trinidad. Paul had a natural flare for rhythm when he played and we were an instant fit as percussion was my first love, besides Tara that is. We were joined by Dave on lead guitar – an excellent player who knew and performed every Bob Dylan song that existed, though our band was strictly Paul’s originals. And we had a stand up bassist. Just a week earlier we were all together looking to buy a PA. We had gigs most weekends, often in one of several restaurants where we’d be paid with great gourmet meals. The most fun we had was playing for a slide show. A successful Newport photographer had just returned from Alaska and was putting on a show of his slides from his trip. Catharsis, the name of our band played for the show. It drew over a hundred people. That was the closest I ever got to my dream music gig of playing a score for a movie. Greg, another musician friend of mine was also joining the group, the H.I.M group that is. He was a very fine woodwind player of all kinds but wasn’t in our band. He was at another level – a jazz player – we were Latin slanted folk rock – not an easy mix so we never invited him to join us and he didn’t seem interested in us either. Greg and I went to Portland to try to sell our instruments. I couldn’t believe he sold what he did – an oboe, soprano sax, an alto sax and a flute. I gave away one flute to Clara and brought my other one with me thinking I could sell it on the road. The band was not at all happy when I told them I was going off with this group. None of them felt so inclined – none were at the meeting and by the way I did not attempt to recruit anyone to join us. That was the farthest thing from my mind.

As it turned out, Ron and Judy were also ready to go. Their kids were now with their dad in Lincoln City an hour north of Newport. Greg also joined with us and so did another good friend, Rob. None of us were Christians by the way. In fact Ron and Robert were New York, Brooklyn Jews who were a few years older than I and who had been on the west coast in communes some years before we arrived there. Ron had traveled throughout India and at one point fell very ill and was nursed back to health by a village leader who wanted him to marry his daughter, like out of some Kipling movie. Rob signed away his 5 acre property to a friend which included the A frame house he built himself. He had become quite a landlord in his years in Newport/Waldport. He owned perhaps 8-9 houses in Newport that he rented out to hippies and fishermen. He sold some for next to nothing and gave away others. He too was quite taken by Bo and Peep. So together we headed for Eugene with destination thereafter unknown. Tara and I had $50 between us to donate to the cause. We had been living hand to mouth for years. It didn’t seem to bother us and it sure made it easy to leave.

The Eugene destination was a state park picnic area. There we saw a woman sitting at a folding card table in the middle of a landscaped field. All around her though at some distance from her there were people milling about. I didn’t know anyone and no one was paying attention to anyone else. Some may have been park patrons. It was strange to say the least. So we walked up to this woman and introduced ourselves. She was expecting us and simply told us to move as quickly as we could to our destination – Colorado National Monument near Fruita, a small town near Grand Junction, Colorado where we would be met by some who were already there but who were only staying for a few day, thus we needed to get their pronto. Rob had a bundle of cash from some of his house sales so he paid the way in gas and food.

Apparently the groups M.O. was to be very secretive about their whereabouts and to only stay in any one location a few days. They didn’t even give us the Eugene meeting location right away. Initially they only gave us a phone number to call and a specific time to do so. They knew that some would not take to kindly to someone’s abrupt departure. On the road I began to write to my parents about my choice. I knew calling them would do no good. They were not in approval of my choice to be so far from my New York home, living with a young women out of wedlock, no regular job or income, long hair, so on and on. Whenever I’d call I’d get fussed at because I hadn’t called sooner, though I did not have money for long distance charges which at that time were quite expensive – like 6-7 dollars a minute.

Yes for some one thing does lead to another and strong addiction may follow, but for me as I proved later, when I was ready to stop I stopped. By the time I met Bo and Peep I rarely did a hallucinogen. I had returned to smoking some pot, after nearly two years without.

As I wrote my parents it dawned on me that it may have been more than coincidence that, just that past summer I felt strongly to return to New York for a visit. Tara was opposed to the trip. After all we had begun the house and garden in our new commune endeavor with Ron, Judy and Rob. Why go back, but I felt compelled to do so, so we hitchhiked back and visited with both of our families. My younger brother at 14 years old seemed the most excited at seeing us. We got there late at night and I remember knocking on a window that just so happened was my bother’s room. He peaked out the window and was shocked to see me. That was so precious. It makes me nearly come to tears to recall it. From there Tara’s uncle who lived on Central Park West in the big apple bought us bus tickets to Florida to see Tara’s ailing grandmother. We stayed with her a few days, my first meeting her and she seemed to like me and then took the bus back to Oregon. Several months before that trip, we hitchhiked down to San Diego and saw my sister who had joined the Navy and was stationed on Coronado Island Naval Base. We met with her and it was the first time I’d seen her since she was 15.

Was it a coincidence that just months before we were to walk out of our lives in such dramatic fashion having no inkling to do anything of the sort before or did our spirit or soul or whatever we want to call it direct us in some fashion. People who have near death experiences often say they saw their life pass before them in an instant. Though my body was not threatened with destruction I did have a very strong sense that all that I was – all that I did – all somehow came together to not only prepare my mind to an acceptance of this huge step but also somehow located us where it did to be in the path of this spontaneous movement.

As with all of us, we are the sum total of our past experiences and choices thus an answer to how this all came to be as a reality we did not question can only be seen through one’s life story.

Chapter 5 – On the road as UFO Jesus Missionaries Extraordinaire

We arrived at the Colorado National Monument just as the sun was setting. Our car weaved through the narrow twisty, turny, huge rock formations. Maybe it was my imagination but it did feel intensely energetic and for the first time I was looking up and almost expecting to see a UFO. Again, I didn’t join for that type of excitement, though I later learned that some had. After all the group acted as if there was no time to waste and that we could be whisked off to this Next Level at any time. I later learned, that sense of immediacy was more the projections of the group members who had joined from the first couple meetings that took place in Los Angeles and the San Francisco Bay area than from Bo and Peep. However, the idea of “hitting the deck running” was certainly part of the modus operandi from day one. The sense of no time to waste held on for the entire 19 years of my rather intense involvement – time was always of the essence. That’s not to say there weren’t many times where time seemed to stand still. It was a mindset, a consciousness each person needed to maintain for themselves. Ti was very clear that this would require a serious sustained effort. But Bo and Peep did not know exactly when we might be picked up, nor exactly how or where. When pressed by students they said it would take place within five years, but they never claimed an absolute date or period of time.

At the first camping area at the top of the monument we were greeted by some we’d identified from the Waldport meeting who basically told us where we could lay down our sleeping bags, as we needed to wait for more to arrive. As a couple that was a difficult point as Tara and I had done a great deal of camping and would zip our sleeping bags together and “snuggle” and she, feeling a little insecure perhaps at the moment, perhaps our last moment together as a couple, after nearly being glued to each other for five years, moved closer in the sleeping bag, to which I gently moved to the other side so not to be touching. I had no interest at all in sex at that moment, which was a first in my life, not that she was seeking such either, but I didn’t even want to go to square one. Still it was difficult for both of us.

We awoke and there were a couple dozen people all around, brushing their teeth and conversing. A meeting with the Two was announced to us and we all gathered in a little amphitheater, one with stone benches which is where we saw Bo and Peep for the second time. Again they appeared in their greenish windbreakers and as was most often the case Bo spoke while Peep listened attentively. They welcomed us and acknowledged the difficulties they knew many of us experienced exiting our old world. They stated that as hard as it is to leave loved ones behind it was necessary as this process needed your total effort. They said that those left behind would received special help from our Heavenly Father and would be looked after. We had to at this point have faith they would be fine and begin to cease dwelling on the past. And regarding the “past” it was the “past” and we needed to detach from it so we wouldn’t bring it up to others or ask others about their past. They said an essential ingredient we all needed was to establish a strong connection to our Heavenly Father. To do this they said to project our thoughts way out beyond the Earth’s atmosphere into deep space – as far as we could imagine, so not to have an imposter in the Spirit World try to masquerade as our Heavenly Father. They said we could ask for accelerated growth opportunities and the strength to handle them when they appeared. They spoke on influences, discarnate being, entities that are normal in the human world but who we will need to begin to give their walking papers to. In other words, spirits that may have been our helpers in the world could not help us any longer as with their help they want what they want as well – recognition of their role – seeing your success. No influence want’s to leave the planet but they will not go without a fight. This was a big part of our overcoming process – gaining a “single” eye.

They said some 27 new members came from the Waldport meeting, but some were arriving elsewhere, where we would be moving to as well. And they began to talk about what we could anticipate next – sharing this information as there appears to be a great thirst for it right now. And they answered some questions.

They made it clear that this wasn’t a hippie group, as many of us were and that they sought to maintain high standards of cleanliness and grooming. There wasn’t any philosophical talk but they made it clear they didn’t know when the demonstration would occur – when the Two Witnessed in Chapter 11 of Revelations are killed and after 3 1/2 days rise again. They fully anticipated this event but felt they must first gather those that are looking for this “information”. The focus was on the “process” and the “information”. The “process” was the overcoming of the world process and the information was the smelling salts that set us off – that compelled us to join. I learned later that most responded as I did – compelled to learn more and to do whatever was necessarily to have more. They also told us to select new names to match our the new person we were becoming. They said we could change our name as often as we wished.

After the meeting people started grooming themselves. Tara cut off the foot long braid I had and I shaved for the first time in maybe three years. There was a little sense of loss of identity from it, as I had built some of my identity in how I looked, so it was clearly one of the first shows of determination to engage this “process”.

That day, Bo held brief informal meetings with small groups of perhaps 6 new members. What I remember most from that meeting was his gentle way, but no sense of the saccharine niceties one can often find in various spiritual circles. But that is when he said to us…”this would be the hardest thing any of you could attempt to do in your lives – to overcome all your humanness and that perhaps only one or two of you will see this through. I remember thinking… “wow, that hard…I can do it…I will do it.” I didn’t at the time understand what would be so hard but I believed in what he said. I never for a moment in his presence felt his equal. I mean, I knew we both were in human bodies but there was something about him that I knew a great deal more about perhaps anything than I did, so I was in awe of him one could say.

That same day we packed up and among the six of us received directions to join one of six organized groups that were in the Ft. Collins/Boulder/Denver area where the next round of meetings were to be held. Tara and I were assigned the Boulder group and a ride was arranged.

Arriving at the Boulder Canyon site was uneventful. People’s tents were spread out among the trees, mostly hidden. It was a rustic camp area with not even a sign I could see. I was told we were waiting for one more couple who had been visiting their cousin and his girlfriend in Corvallis, Oregon, when they all decided to attend the meeting they’d seen advertised. They all joined. The Canadian couple from Calgary, Alberta went back to Canada to tie up their lose ends and were headed back to join the group in Colorado. They arrived the next day. We didn’t do any socializing per say. There were two that seemed to be the small group leaders and they asked if we needed anything and told us in general what was going on. So people stuck to their tent area doing whatever they wanted – read, fixed food they’d brought with them and so on, but there was no time wasted either. That same day, we all combined ourselves in a couple cars as there were only about 12 in this group and were instructed to meet at Poudre River Canyon, just north of Ft. Collins a couple hours north of Boulder.

As we arrived we could see this was a big meeting as there seemed to be perhaps 40 or 50 people. All were just sitting tight conversing with those they knew already, while group leaders were going back and forth as if they had some business we knew not of. After about a half hour Bo and Peep showed up and gave a meeting. In it they explained to us that we would all be holding six meetings on the same Sunday afternoon, perhaps five days away. Boulder, Ft. Collins, North Denver and Denver proper and a couple more I just don’t recall and probably never even knew. I knew there were some things, in fact many things I didn’t need to know. I trusted I’d receive what I needed to help me with my overcoming process. Then they explained that they had little funds and wanted to outfit all the new members, many of which joined with nothing with gear for living on the road as they thought we’d be in this traveling meeting mode for a while. They also explained that part of the overcoming process was trusting the Next Level, though the representatives sent – Bo and Peep to take care of our needs. That without giving over that trust it was like holding an ace in the hole in case this didn’t work out. They said we could all walk over to a certain spot and deposit whatever we want into that spot but to hold onto legal documents like drivers license and such. But we didn’t need to hold onto any money. Each group would be provided money for some of what we needed, that is, as long as it held out. Tara and I had $50 so we deposited that. They didn’t say we needed to strip or anything or put in the pile a Rolex watch though they did say, they did not adorn themselves with any decorations. They sought to be plain Jane in appearance – not trying to stand out or feel a certain way by what we wore or hung on our ears as all those things were things to overcome any need of. To hold onto things like that meant you weren’t ready to give your all to this effort.

I learned later that some had turned in their marijuana stash and I also learned that another seeing it secretly absconded with it. It wasn’t like there were any watchdogs present. That individual didn’t stay with the group very long.

Then Bo and Peep opened their car trunk and took out sleeping bags, Coleman stoves, some cots in the back seat and some foam pads and small tents and asked who needed them, at which point some helped distribute them and anyone who still needed one was put on a list. The group leaders gathered the pile of what all the new members donated and I didn’t pay any further attention as the meeting dispersed as Bo and Peep.

Next Bo and Peep began to create partnerships. This was a most traumatic time for those who joined as couples. Tara and I were partnered with another couple, me with Dandy, the new name she chose and she with Dandy’s old partner. I had chose the name Tim. Dandy was crying a great deal. I tried to console her a bit but knew there was little I could do. She had to come to terms with it, which she shortly did. Bo and Peep began to talk about the reason for the partnerships. This “process” was an accelerated period of growth – a cocoon kind of stage. A partner becomes a mirror of what you need to overcome. They are your equal but all decisions should be made together. One shouldn’t just walk off to use the latrine without telling the other where they are going and why. Because of this close relationship it will stimulate challenging circumstances that you will need to work out between you. You are not trying to please one another. You are both seeking to please only your Heavenly Father and you should know that of your partner as well so treat them with all the respect with which you want to be treated. When you find yourselves at am impasse, you each need to withdraw from your position and ask your Heavenly Father’s guidance (not aloud). It was private for each of us to do, and you will find that a solution neither of you thought of will frequently occur to you both or just feel right, not caring who expressed it. It’s because you relinquished your need to be right and have the answers, to even tiny questions and this opened you up for a better answer than either may have initially considered. It was as Jesus said…”where two or more are gathered in my name, I am in their midst”. Because of how the numbers fell, there were occasional threesomes. Then they added that we should let any one break up these partnerships.

It was in Poudre river that we met (though no one introduced themselves or made a point to introduce one another) all the members to date. It is also there where I began to catch on to how some of the students that joined before I did thought and acted. All were very serious but not without humor, as was the case with Bo and Peep. Bo and Peep didn’t crack jokes and their subject matter was generally logistical or lesson material so was serious but they also had an amiable light vibration. They never spoke with hell fire and brimstone. The bible was not a focus but was clearly in use by whoever wanted to use one. Bo and Peep did not discourage bible study, one of the things I did with my spare time. But certain students seemed to be thinking they were the reincarnation of certain persons in the New Testament. It was thought that we were those same souls who had returned to finish our lessons as we weren’t ready then, which is why Jesus said, He (with his Father) would have to return at a later time and then speak “plainly” of the Kingdom. Plainly was like using phrases like Next Level, or Evolutionary Level Above Human, says a little more than Kingdom of Heaven, at least did to me. I thought Heaven was this castle in the clouds, or just a good part of the spirit world. I never really thought of it as being in outer space, but that is what heaven actually means – the expanse or firmament around the earth – the sky scape to included the sun and moon. I never thought about members of the Kingdom of Heaven. I thought there was angles and angles had wings so were these mystical beings, even being invisible. But Bo and Peep were speaking more plain than I’d heard before by saying there were members, in fact, older members like themselves, what a human would call a Farther and younger members – works that helped with all the many tasks in the Next Level. So Bo and Peep were kind of deflating the spirit mysticism out of the idea and bringing it into more of a practical reality focus. Yes, there was still some considerable mystery but it was far progressed from what we had before.

One member of the group seemed to think of herself as Mary, the new name she’d chose when she joined. She was in her early 50’s and it was quickly apparent she was treating all us youngins as her children. She’d have to overcome that I thought to myself, but then found it amusing and went along. Another thought of himself as John and he had taken that name. He had a very managerial business air and to me was like 3CPO from star wars though barely short the British accent. Another chose Peter, very tall, squared jaw, great smile and perfect build. It wasn’t like they were all talking about what Jesus disciple they thought they were, but their names gave them away and I didn’t doubt that they just may have been. Bo and Peep didn’t monitor our name choices, but did say, that it wasn’t exactly boastful to think of oneself as one of Jesus disciples for two reasons. It held you to what they represent to you in your head and two they didn’t’ understand enough back then to be able to make the conscious choice to overcome and leave this world. Yes, many did go to their death in belief but much of that was stimulated by what they witnessed their teacher Jesus do – forecasting it then allowing himself to be captured knowing he would be murdered, then rising again and demonstrating a new body in progress but with new characteristics that to them was magic. One can’t ultimately make the transition into the Next level with undisputable proof of the Next Level’s existence as that would be baiting the body with magic. They 2000 years ago could only see such supernatural events because they were not ready to go in that lifetime. They had to come into a new body to start without such a memory that could substitute for a large portion of what otherwise would be experientially based faith.

Bo and Peep had also rearranged the groups so Tara and I with our new partners were not in the same group. Out of sight out of mind was certainly employed as a mechanism of not slipping back into old habits and desires. Dandy and I were still in the Boulder group and at about that time, we gathered up some of our new camping gear as we were some of those without much gear and it was back to Boulder Canyon.

The next morning a small group meeting was called by our group leaders, actually called “helpers” referring to helping Bo and Peep organizationally. They were in no way superior though having that position did set them apart and give them a certain air of authority and importance. Apparently they had secured a meeting hall, in the Boulder Library and had arranged to have posters made, thus the next step was to canvas Boulder which we did. We set out with two partnerships to a car and a plan of what areas to cover. Dandy and I were let out with our stack of posters and off we went – disciples of this new movement spreading the word. It was fun and Dandy and I got along well. We put up posters wherever it suited us. We even had nourishment provided by apple trees in people’s yards that hung over into the sidewalk. We didn’t have any question about picking a couple. We felt we were working for God and had a right to a few apples. We put up posters for three days.

The Boulder Meeting was given by our two group “helpers”. There were perhaps 100 people in attendance in a small conference room. They pretty much said the same things Bo and Peep had said. By the way, I can’t recall Peep saying much of anything at that first meeting but that wasn’t necessarily a pattern we needed to follow. It was known that each member might anticipate taking a turn in giving a meeting. As in our first meeting, some stayed after the meeting to ask questions and from that meeting 4-5 new members were added to our ranks.

The next day Dandy and I went all around Boulder picking up the posters we put out. We didn’t need them. It was simply the responsible thing to do. It wasn’t my idea either. In the next day or two these new members trickled into camp. We didn’t socialize much at that camps, if at all. Chit chat was frowned upon. There were no chit chat police but if you started to chit chat the other person would respond politely or just say…we are not to engage in idle conversation. That was an instruction from Bo and Peep. I didn’t know all the things they’d told others, so Dandy and I stayed near our tent, prepared meals together, cleaned up and did a lot of reading and contemplating. There were no radios or card games. By many a so called modern day person’s standards it was boring but I can’t say the inactivity bothered me though before joining it would have.

A day or two later we were informed of a meeting with Bo and Peep to be held at Arapahoe Community College. It was primarily for all those who were joining or considering to join as a result of the six area meetings. We arrived into a large lecture hall and we were instructed to sit on the floor in front of Bo and Peep to act as a buffer, though facing Bo and Peep. Apparently this was also a public meeting so had a mix. I remembers sitting there and for the first time in my life felt like the disciple of a guru. I was so, so proud to be counted as their student. It was the happiest I can say I’d ever felt. A buffer was someone in this context that was positive minded about Bo and Peep so in group formed a shield of sorts against the negativity Bo and Peep anticipated and felt directed at them at meetings they’d already given.

In a sense they made more enemies than allies because there was no existing group that was claiming to be leaving the planet with their bodies as one’s highest human aspiration. Therefore when anyone heard this, that we were not aspiring to spiritual enlightenment or nirvana, yet were not of the “say you are saved and by your belief your sins are forgiven and you will sit at God’s right hand and that all paths human are fine to get to the top of the mountain, but that there is only one way off – when a member of the next level incarnates to show you the way, we more or less intimidated or challenged others views as the ultimate pathway. And mix that with talk of UFO’s and people actually walking out the doors of their lives and wammo, we were becoming what was seen as a dangerous cult. Actually little did we know, there were investigators on our trail from Newport, Oregon. The word was out that this UFO Cult had somehow convinced people to give all away in exchange for a ride on a UFO to another world. Articles were starting to show up in local papers from Los Angeles where it began that April to San Francisco where one meeting was at Stanford College and big time in little Newport, Oregon where we’d come from and had that confrontation with the police. Bo and Peep did have this sense so knew moving quickly to do what they had started was a necessity.

To make matter worse, apparently when Bo and Peep were giving the Denver proper meeting, two FBI officers asked some of Bo and Peep’s helpers (they traveled with three student partnerships) if they could have a word with them after the meeting. When Bo and Peep were told this, rather than meet with the FBI, not at the time knowing what was on their mind, decided to go out the back door, hop in a car and skidoo. They had both been in jail before on circumstantial charges and now more than ever didn’t want to give anyone that opportunity. Apparently the FBI was interested in the group because of the UFO still on the posters. It was right in the middle of a large amount of cattle mutilation activity. At the sightings of these cattle mutilations frequently ranchers said they saw and bright light in the field or otherwise a UFO. The nature of the mutilations was very strange indeed, surgical cutting out of reproductive and milk giving organs, no sign of blood, precision cuts and no sign of footsteps or of an aircraft. And this pattern was being repeated all over Colorado. So this new “cult” was suspected and they couldn’t have been further from the source of such occurrences.

The next day Bo and Peep called another group meeting to include new members. To my surprise it was in a meeting room in the Denver Court house of all places. I thought that so odd. In this meeting were told of our next destination – Chicago over a thousand miles away and our getting there was to be a new experience for many of us – as there wasn’t enough funds to get us all there so we’d have to “test” our way there. “Testing” meant, going to those who say they are Christians who therefore technically should give to whoever asks of them and simply asking for our daily needs which in this case entailed gasoline and food. We could sleep in our sleeping bags on the side of the road or in the car if need be. We were not to beg. We were working for our Heavenly Father’s Kingdom and a worker is deserving of their daily bread. If they did not help us, we were to have no ill will to them – just move on. If they opened their doors to us, then give freely of what we have.

So the six small groups were dissolved and we were all instructed to meet at Cherry Creek Camp near Denver proper to organize for the trip. This was special for me as we were there for two days and Bo and Peep had been staying there while they were in this area with us. I saw that they too lived in a tent and didn’t seem to have anything more than us. I peeked in to their tent as I passed by and it looked very neat – a cot with a sleeping bag on each side of the tent and a couple folding chairs and a folding table – that was about it. While camping there we were told to keep our ears and eyes open as one never knew when Bo and Peep would walk around to mingle a bit to answer questions informally and sure enough they did and a crowd would quickly gather as individuals popped their heads out of their tents to be a part of. And this is where I got to hear more from Peep. In meetings she was near silent but in this setting she was quite amiable, conversational, humorous and pleasant.

We were organized into cars, two couples to a car. Dandy and I with Jan and her partner neither of which I knew yet. We were given about a tanks worth of gas, whatever food we already had as there was no central food distribution and instructions to meet at a camping area within the Chain of Lakes State park, just north of Chicago. We got on the road. Bo and Peep had instructed us to come into a town and ask our Heavenly Father to lead us to whoever might be receptive of the information we had to share. We were starting to develop our “feelers” they said, thinking of our solar plexus area as being key to it’s function. During travel time we were mostly expected to be “tuning in” to the Next Level – seeking accelerated growth and ways of service while not allowing our consciousness to dwell in the past and certainly not talk about the past. So there wasn’t a great deal of conversation. In fact mostly none except when we came to a decision point – which way to turn on the highway. We took turns as partnerships tuning into where to go in each town. We didn’t stop in each town, only those that were in proximity with the time of our needs for food and/or gasoline.

I clearly remember when it was our turn to seek help for our needs. Dandy wanted me to go first, but we together walked up to a Catholic church rectory door and knocked. I was nervous. I did not want to do it. I did not want to beg however we explained it. In fact there was only one time, and in my recent past when I asked a church for such help and that was before joining when Tara and I were out of money traveling to Lake Havasu City, Arizona looking for work. We went to my mother’s condo there as a place to stay from which we thought we could get work. It was 110 degrees in the shade I recall and we were staying in a condo that had no facilities turned on. But on the way, a church in Needles, Arizona helped us with some food to get further down the road.

It’s funny how I see this approach to this door so dramatically now. The door seemed huge – a big brown ornate looking wooden door with a huge ring type knocker that I used. No one came and so I started to walk back sheepishly somewhat glad no one was home, but then the other couple from a little distance egged me on to go and knock again which I did. The door opened and I said what I’d somewhat practiced… “We are in the area doing work for our Heavenly Father, sharing new information we have come upon and have some needs for food and gasoline – can you help us? He said, No! and shut the door and that was that. But I broke the ice. I had never proselytized or preached much of anything. When I was a kid I sold candy outside the bank and went door to door in my neighborhood getting people to sign up for my Christmas card club, but never had asked someone for a handout claiming to be heavenly messenger. It did feel natural and right, though scary. The next door I knocked on handed me a $20 bill – they said nothing and asked nothing and though it didn’t fill the tank and our bellies it was enough to get to the next town. In the evening we stopped on the side of the highway and found a decent spot to put sleeping bags and rested, got up, washed up and were on our way once more. It wasn’t more than another day until we arrived at our destination somewhat proud that we’d accomplished our first mission.

As people were arriving, those assigned to greet us assigned us an area in which to set up our tents. This was my first sense of being a part of this group. There was a slight euphoria in the air as people went about their chores and began to recognize faces they’d now seen a time or two before, all knowing we had chosen the same dedicated endeavor that we believed stood apart from anything else we’d done before. Most had been a part of this or that spiritual organization or pursuit or practice and the numbers were mixed male and female with a few 16 yr olds and a few in their 50’s. Most were in their late 20’s to early 30’s. There were now about 70 members.

Our first task was to scope out Chicago for meeting locations so cars were organized to go into Chicago to attend events where the participants might have interest in our information. Apparently Chicago had a large sector of spiritualists and people interested in all manner of the supernatural. The group I was with attended a meeting about psychic phenomena and asked questions with the intention of discovering what the teacher thought about UFO’s and such. There was interest and we stayed after and spoke to the teacher of the class about our new effort. We were in the Chicago area for 4-5 days and it was getting harder and harder to sustain ourselves financially as we all used the same method of largely “testing” Christians for our needs and we didn’t go to the same place twice.

National news – People from Waldport, OR leave all behind to join the Mysterious Two to go on a UFO to Heaven.

One morning we were told not to go out looking for help. A type of emergency meeting was called and Bo and Peep showed up. In it they told us our group had been infiltrated by two individuals, later we knew as Robert Balch and David Taylor. They were Oregon state students who joined as a way of doing their college thesis and they’d been with us for several weeks studying the phenomena. The group was in the news by then as the UFO cult led by this mysterious middle aged couple. But as it turned out a few days earlier Walter Cronkite had broke the story with the human identity of the Two as Bonnie Lu Trousdale Nettles and Marshall Herf Applewhite both from Texas. Since this had hit the national media and there was a hunt for them as the reason people were leaving homes and families behind to “catch a ride on a UFO” the media hyped and since there were impostors within our ranks, the teachers were in jeopardy of being apprehended and that would break up this group that was loose knit to begin with.

Bo and Peep had been in a hotel in Las Vegas when the Cronkite story hit and felt like they didn’t want to leave the room for fear of being apprehended. They didn’t feel like it was the right time for the demonstration as they predicted would occur according to Chapter 11 of the Book of Revelations re: the Two Witnesses. So while we were all arriving in Chicago and getting settled and scoping out the town for meeting locations and interests they were contemplating their next step. It was interesting looking back at how they were “shot down” from their mysterious position as Members from the Kingdom of God and how that occurred while they were hold up in Las Vegas, a city that like none other in the US might be considered akin to Sodom and Gomorrah (a city filled with all manner of corrupt behaviors) again as stated in the Revelation. Bo and Peep did not think of this until months later when it they realized the demonstration as they first thought could occur was not going to. In any case, shot down by the press saying they were frauds took them 3 1/2 days to recover and formulate a new strategy as they could not be seen in public now, not with the picture posted all over TV making them to be dangerous people knappers.

Walking around camp I recall wondering who might be the imposter. I can’t say I saw it all with the seriousness Bo and Peep did but I was certainly naïve as to how authorities could have pounced down on all of us at any moment.

So when Bo and Peep came into the camp, they were more secretive than I’d ever seen them and this time Peep spoke very quietly in case there were spies in bushes and there very well could have been. They gave us the overview of what was going on in the media and about the infiltrators and how they believe to know who they were and they were not in the camp. I suppose they just didn’t know what other surprised could be lurking in our midst because all they said they could do was scatter. The quickly assigned groups with about three cars each and had a separate huddle with those they knew they could trust, who had been with them for six months or so by then. No one else in a group would know where any group was going. They had a way for group members to stay in touch with Bo and Peep’s group of six plus themselves – I guess what would have been considered the core group. We would have a particular hotel chain that had hotels everywhere and a specific time each day when one could try to leave or pickup a message for a particular name. In this way someone knowing this scheme could call the Holiday Inn in San Francisco where a group was planning to go next and leave a message for Peter Childs, saying he will be checking in later. Then Peter Childs would call the hotel for any messages and it was a free message service. They would know that they could call again or meet in person at the hotel the next day at the same time and make contact. It worked well, but I was not privy to this plan until much later in my membership.

We packed up our camp as quickly as possible. Time again was of the essence as we didn’t know if authorities would be headed up our way and I later learned they were right behind us, even a couple hours behind us. This was till October and as the groups numbers increased however seemingly small, each new members was by some in their family a missing person who was somehow lured against their will to have some pie in the sky.

Next thing I knew we were in a car with 4 others headed south and I was driving. Apparently Bo and Peep handed each group leader partnership some funds to get us far enough out of the Chicago area so we weren’t slowed too much by seeking gasoline help. So we didn’t stop until we got to Oklahoma, just east of Tulsa where there were a bunch of large lakes and campgrounds where we camped and met up with several other groups but did not know the whereabouts of Bo and Peep.

Our group leaders did not have instructions past this point so we waited a couple days. Then we got word that our group would head to Phoenix to see if there would be receptivity for a meeting. We had an agreed upon campground to meet at near Phoenix. Apparently two groups would work together on the area. It was quite handy that Bo and Peep had spent literally years on the road in these areas before they ended up giving that Los Angeles meeting that began the group. They knew every place we could camp for free and with little hassle and we took advantage of those instructions when we could get them.

But trying to organize the Phoenix meeting was the beginning of a great deal of strangeness that would plaque the overall movement for months to come. People began question the leadership of those assigned by Bo and Peep to be our “helpers” or “contact people” to Bo and Peep and/or their helpers. These helpers were no anything special in terms of their management abilities which is what probably drew the most criticism. We were all very green at all this. None of us were of the ilk of a follower of anyone. Most of us were drop outs from society, business and the world to a large degree. And most were thick headed and not exactly polished diplomats. But it only took one or two to spoil the soup but it wasn’t really spoiling it – it was a response to the asking we’d all be instructed to do to “have accelerated growth” – well it was being dished out big time now.

Even still we managed to agree to look for a room and media support for poster donations and of course there were our daily needs to include gasoline. I remember living off of donuts thrown out by Dunkin Donuts that were readily available daily in the dumpster and as they didn’t have much really gross trash it was not contaminated. Later when Bo and Peep heard some were doing this they felt we’d taken the easy way out and that it was beneath us. Dandy and I would walk along the avenue where there were growing large date palms and we could easily find nice dates that had fallen when birds plucked at some loosening others. We lived on these dates for days. Well, though we learned where we could get great showers at the University of Phoenix by just walking in like we were students and showering. As it turned out the other group secured a free meeting room in Prescott, Arizona a hour to the north of Phoenix so we all migrated to that area to publicize it. It was our way to only give at most a week lead time to a meeting. Knowledge of who were even though it had made the national news was still not spread everywhere to all the small towns and not everyone watched the national news and the story though it was fairly big for a while didn’t dominate the entire media. However we didn’t want to push it and there was also the consideration that we were living off of the donations of the town and essentially the churches in each town. There was only so many donations one could find and we often visited a church where other members had just visited before us. Asking for help, though it became routine was never fun. It was always drudgery in the sense that it would have been easier to work, and at times did offer to do jobs to pay our way. However, the fact was, of course as we saw it was that we did have a job – to spread the word that representatives from the real physical Level that Jesus came from were here physically to share how that kingdom may at this time be entered, but essentially walking out the door of you life to join our effort to include overcoming all your human desires and characteristics that would in process be creating a new body within your physical one. And that at the completion we would be picked up by a UFO, not needing to experience death – gaining eternal life in a new world, but not the spirit world.

It’s funny looking back on these words and actually understanding them more fully. Death really meant what Jesus referred to as the “second” death. The new body we were creating was in actuality our soul – what was being filled more and more with Next Level mind stuff that at some point could be “viable” – able to transit the human kingdom – becoming the “celestial body” not made of the same flesh stuff the flesh body is made of yet still of some physical nature.

In any case the Prescott meeting was a good one. Somewhere around eight new members came from it and in this case Bo and Peep were nowhere to be found. We were out of touch with them at this point. We continued the pattern of having follow up contacts who stayed behind to help new members exit their old lives. Meanwhile the groups went on to our next prospective meeting town – Sante Fe, New Mexico. We camped in the black mountains and this town in particular was both very receptive to our presence and our message but for some very committed to forms of spirituality that would find our message of “the only way off the mountain top” offensive because that in a way was saying we were the top dogs, but the plain truth is better seen by eliminating all spiritual inference. The point was that these members from a world outside the Earth were opening the door for a brief time to any humans who might want to apply for membership in their world. It wasn’t saying they were top dog, though if that group were the creators of the entire planet and even our very existence, however that evolved in mind and body in conjunction with the direction offered by members from that other world, then I guess they would be a rung up the totem pole. Jesus said it this way that even the least in the Kingdom of Heaven (amidst the firmament outside the expanse of the Earth) is greater than the greatest human on Earth (at the time referring to John the Baptist).

The Sante Fe meeting was given by my old friend Ron from Newport and his partner. It was an intense meeting and about a half dozen new members came from it. Because of the new members and the need for cars I finally sold my silver flute I’d been carrying around (and had never again played). I got $90 for it and with the money Dandy and I bought a car that did run but that’s about it. We went ahead to the next meeting location – Berkley, California where two other groups besides our two were converging.

It was nearing Halloween – October 31 and as a prank a book store in Berkeley announced that the UFO Two as they were now called would be showing up to give a meeting on Halloween. We heard the rumor and so showed up wondering who was going to claim to be Bo and Peep. No one showed up and it was just a silly confusing scene as there were people interested in the message of the “UFO Two”, but we took care of any of those and pointed them to the real meeting we were organizing in a large park in Berkley. A lot of press showed up, but also parents of those who joined, spouses of those who joined all looking for their loved ones. In some cases they were found and emotions ran high but none were dissuaded. I ran into Tara there and it was a little awkward. We glanced at one another but did not make any effort to have further contact. Actually I ran into her very briefly at another time and it was strange but we kept our focus on our tasks and not on each other.

We stayed in the house of a would be new member and it was one strange scene as people knew who we were but at the same time didn’t know what to make of us. We like celebrities to keep some distance from I guess. After the Berkley meeting several groups merged in the forest near Santa Rosa. There were many new members that had never met Bo and Peep. Being somewhat a veteran by now I recall speaking nightly around the campground repeating everything I’d heard Bo and Peep say or do.

Plus there were members there that I had never met who were on the road traveling spreading the message while Bo and Peep were headed up to Waldport. One person’s name was Seymour. He had some ideas of going east but didn’t want to do it himself, but I liked the idea being from the east and feeling a calling to take on a difficult task to help bring the message there as it seemed apparent the west coast was becoming saturated. Dandy wasn’t enthralled by the idea but was willing. So we had a pow wow and agreed to split into two. We numbered perhaps 50 at this camp. Some would need to hold back while new members trickled in. Seymour wanted to head north again, eventually heading up to Canada. My group, not “mine” but one in which I was taking more of a leadership role would head to Boston.

Out of the recent California meetings came a bunch of new members that in some ways made former disciples look tame minded. One person called himself Lightborn and he was apparently loosely affiliated with Ruth Gordon’s group and the Space Brotherhood, a group of alleged aliens that were very military in style and who were like a Starfleet command as a part of a grander union of space aliens though they acted and looked very much like humans. Another individual took the name John the Baptist – a big guy. They were to travel to meet us in Boston as well.

Well the car we’d bought for $90 lasted for about that many miles – collapsed and Dandy and I were given a little Mazda a new member from Sante Fe had brought into the organization. We drove it cross country stopping alone the way to ask for our daily needs and most importantly spreading the word as we went. There were many a preacher I engaged in debate. More and more I studied what Jesus had said in the gospels and found his words more and more clearly supportive of the same effort in which we were engaged so frankly could shoot down any arguments to the contrary. In fact in many cases after some discussion we were asked to leave and without help as we were thought to be inspired by the devil. I really did not care whether we got help if the other had a problem with the message we were wielding. It was clear to me that we were certainly not saying or doing anything against Jesus. Those we encountered were the ones most insistent in our use of their terminology to describe their faith that by not subscribing to indicated to them that we were not of their ilk and rightly so – we were not. All this stuff about Jesus dying for our sins so that any talk of works (effort) was thought of as somehow “earning” our salvation in the face of what Jesus was to have given us. Where did Jesus exemplify that he did it all for us, anymore than a teacher of math can do your own math problem and expect you to gain the benefit from it. The teacher can show you the “way” but they can never do it for you as they know experience is the only real teacher. This logic was so clear to me and I learned to see it in so many ways backed by scripture because frankly I’d taken the leap of faith to leave it all behind as Jesus required of his students and the Bo and Peep were requiring now while those in churches had not taken such a step thus would not be the beneficiary of the relationship such leap of faith spawned with one’s Heavenly Father. This was not to say I sat in judgment of anyone. If they didn’t answer the call that was not my business and I said that to many, that they had their own relationship to God and I was not one to say what that is for them, however when the shepherd’s voice is heard the sheep from that fold need to respond or else be left to fend for themselves in a world of wolves often in sheep’s clothing to steal your very soul. It came to timing. We were saying the timing for what Jesus had preached he would return to do – gather up the believers was “at hand”. It wasn’t for everyone and belief was nothing without action. One doesn’t believe in something if they are not willing to support it and the degree of that belief has to do with the degree of support and of course the cares of the world do weight heavy upon us all in how to apply that belief to action. It just so happen for me, I was more or less free of worldly attachments or for whatever reason was touched in such a way that what I considered myself attached to, my common law wife, my budding music career, my house construction and communal endeavors paled in comparison to this magnificent plain sense about what otherwise was until then still superstition and here say and frankly near beyond belief. What Bo and Peep brought seemed so darn tangible – it was well worth “selling all I had” to by one pearl of great price, one of the countless examples that Jesus gave as to what the Kingdom of Heaven (or call to it) would be worth to us.

It took us about a week to get to the Braintree area south of Boston where we’d agreed to look for one another and we immediately bumped into others from out group who had also just arrived. Then there were more and more and then we ran into another group who had heard some were tackling the east coast so also felt led to do so, so set out and in fact joined us as well. So we had several dozen members in the area coordinating our efforts and wow was that indeed an effort. Dandy and I located a library room that was large enough in Worchester, MA and agreed we would speak at the meeting having found it and I was chomping at the bit to get my feet wet. I was frightened at the idea but felt it was time to dive in. I’d been practicing my spiel for weeks.

As we began to advertise our meeting that in this case we made over a week and half away – being we wanted to do a good job to poster all over the Boston area, we went to every health food store, new age head shop, library, music venue, book store and spiritual center. We sought radio ads, did interviews with various newspapers to get free advertising and of course visited every church that existed. There were challenges at every turn though as within the group there were always a one or more that no matter what the decision, they saw it differently and could not stand to not be heard and heeded. I think they also did not want to feel led. At one point at a park we were all meeting inside a tennis court, all twenty something of us and this one member could not come to consensus on the plans, until I just said…if you don’t like it just leave… which I felt bad about saying as the individual seemed to have good intentions but was seeming to be used to repeatedly cause us all delay and discord. I apologized to him later but it wasn’t the end of our difficulties together.

The first public meeting I spoke at

The meeting in Worchester was about to begin. Dandy and I found a silent place to go “tune in”. I was going to begin talking. I was nervous for sure. I was making what I saw as a major spiritual announcement to this East Coast metro-plex. The library room was filled to capacity, certainly over 200 people. We walked in, sat down and took a moment to “tune in” asking that our Heavenly Father use us and began to say…”There is a light from the distant Heaven’s that has come upon the Earth at this time”. I literally felt engulfed in that light – removed from reality and anyone’s response, hardly aware of what I was saying and certainly having no plan memorized or noted before me. I looked over at Dandy and could see she was energized as high as a kite. She said nothing but I knew the energy was coming through both of us and it was not of our origin. After speaking for perhaps ten minutes we began to take questions and there were a bunch, many of which were from Christians but from other religious orders as well. We clarified immediately that we were students of the Two, the ones the press spoke of as the UFO Two. Maybe 40 minutes into the start it ended and some stayed after to ask more questions. Four or five wanted to know more and we answered all their questions. One wanted to join and we met up with her the next day but she ended up changing her mind. It was far different than the response in the western states. Bo and Peep felt that most that were seriously seeking found their way west, not all mind you but most.

We gathered our members and had a pow wow and decided to head north to Montpelier to put on our next meeting. Before we left Massachusetts our little car died on the side of the road. Some police happened by and said we couldn’t leave it there. We explained that we had no money and were working for our Heavenly Father’s Kingdom. He took us to the station and arranged for a tow of the car which he gave us the bill for but decided not to hold us further so we hitchhiked from there.

When we got to Montpelier, we ran into another group. Apparently three of our groups had headed to the northeast. They were also short cars but one had a Volkswagen van so we piled in and traveled together looking for the help we needed and scoping out the meeting possibilities. Food was a little scarce then. We lived mostly on canned corn and peas donated to us from food pantries. We didn’t have a stove then, so we’d eat it cold and speaking of cold, the weather was getting pretty cool. It was into November and we’d sleep out in the open on the ground wherever we could without getting arrested. One morning I awoke with a inch of snow on my sleeping bag and frozen toes. As luck will have it we met a gentleman that loved what we had to say so invited the entire group to stay at his house where he also lived with his family, to include a couple kids and a few of his relatives. We gave them a mini meeting and they were as hospitable as could be.

We were examining a meeting room in a local church, but they didn’t know exactly who we were and we didn’t always blurt out our more controversial views or ways of expression of them – yes at times it seemed too blatant unless we were asked. I remember how that became a point of contention with Lightborn and John the Baptist. When we’d ask for help and state our business as Serving our Heavenly Father by bringing new updated information about the Kingdom, if someone was not inquisitive as to what that exactly meant – what “new” information or what “update” then we didn’t force it down anyone’s throat. The testing that we were doing was not setting us up as anyone’s judge. It just demonstrated to the Father in Heaven what people were made of as Jesus said to give to whoever asked of you and that by giving to the least of these you are giving to him. Even still I never felt like…one person passed or failed. It just wasn’t my job. My job was to distribute the information and if those in Christian organizations were working for the same ones we thought of as Jesus and His Father – the Kingdom of the one true God the creator of our world and even life then why wouldn’t they want to help us and why wouldn’t we want to receive the help from them. Did our terminology mean so, so much? Well, yes it did and no it did not. For some, they wanted to help us and did so without question. For others they wanted to know all about us first, some to scope us out as legitimate or not and for others because they really were interested in what we were sharing. Some when they heard our spiel that I never held back on when they asked (and I didn’t require them to ask a whole lot) they were troubled by it. I never enjoyed that. Some cried and some I cried with not necessarily knowing why. Some got very angry and demanded we leave. Some through money at us in which case I refused to take it, though I always kept in mind that we needed to shake the dust off our feet as Jesus had instructed his disciples when he sent the 70 out doing much the same mission as we were attempting. In one case a Catholic priest gave us $20 and we said very little to him, sometimes have 4 to 6 of us approach at once asking. When we got to the car Lightborn and John the Baptist wanted to go give him a statement as he did not ask much and yet we felt his love for God. Perhaps I was too sheepish – not wanting to blow his mind or make it seem like we presented to him only what we thought he would be okay to hear to get the money when we really had all this weird to his ears stuff to share that understanding it might have caused him great grief of thinking we were charlatans after all.

The contention within the group was getting worse and worse. It got to the point that these folks were trying to break up Dandy and my partnership saying we’d been together too long and needed more lessons with others – we were too attached to each other. These folks had not even met Bo and Peep and were resentful of the strength in our partnership that Bo and Peep had formed and even warned us against breaking needlessly. Dandy and I had little to no attachment to one another. Yes, we did work well together and yes did rely on one another for strength and were friends but it was clear in my mind that I was not interested at all in another human relationship. There were brief moments of time when I tuned into her femininity, but I quickly turned my attention away and didn’t have much trouble doing so, especially helped by my sense that personally she really didn’t like me and I knew for a fact was still grieving the separation from the guy she did love, who was still by the way partnered with Tara.

But one of the indicators of whether we would do a meeting in a town was whether there were people interested in what we had to share and together with whether we were receiving the help we needed, be it food, gas a meeting room and posters. It seemed like we had far more resistance in this town so we decided to cancel. And it was getting very cold so decided we’d all go our own ways with the cars we had. Lacking our own car to use, we ended up traveling south with Lightborn and John the Baptist driving this old Camaro I think Lightborn had joined with. It wasn’t more than a couple hours down the road that Dandy and I could no longer stand being with these two guys, so we asked them to just let us off, which they did and we from that point on were on our own with only our thumbs to travel on.

So we decided first order of business was to get out of the cold and it didn’t get warmer until, well actually we still froze our butts off in Houston, Texas about a week later where they were having unseasonably cold temperatures with highs at night in the 40’s. We didn’t have winter clothing but stopped by salvation army and churches and asked for help with clothing so had some sweaters and such. As it turned out Dandy had an old friend who lived in Houston so we looked him up. He was actually a close friend of her X-boyfriend – Michael F. It was great having a warm dry place to hang our hat for a few days. I remember loving listening to the grateful dead tapes though at the same time I was guarded not to get too carried away with it. We naturally did a lot of talking and it was emotional for Dandy to be there again recalling her relationship with Michael. Detaching from the past is not easier when confronted with it. Another interesting situation came up. These folks we were visiting had some friends over. As it turned out the women in her late 40’s I’d say, said she had dated Marshall, who was known to me as Bo of Bo and Peep, my teachers. Before becoming Bo, Marshall was quite well known in Houston high society. He knew people like Farah Faucet and as he worked as the music director of a mega-church in downtown Houston that was directly across the street from where Dan Rather worked for CBS, he would often eat lunch with Dan. In any case she didn’t elaborate much on Marshall except to say he had wandering hands and I presume a healthy sexual appetite when they were together. I remember hearing that and not really caring. I didn’t have some idea that this fellow had no life before he had awakened to the role of Two Witnesses – Bo. I didn’t know much of Bo and Peeps past except what I’d read in newspapers. We’d been detached from the group for several months by then. It was December. To get out of the weather and to relax Dandy and I would seek out libraries along our journey and I’d read newspapers for any news of the group and I’d study whatever I could find related to the bible, mostly gravitating to the pseudopigraphia and the Nag Hamadi library and whatever was published about the Dead Sea Scrolls.

At this juncture we decided to head east so along the gulf coast we did continue to hitchhike. I remember one fellow picking us up, getting talking a bit but not in particular about the group and before I knew it the guy was offering me a job managing one of his factories and he was dead serious. We were clean cut and obviously not encumbered by substance use or abuse and convicted to our spiritual journey so he thought I would make a great manager. I had to refuse saying, I had a job but that I was honored that he would offer it. It was right after that that we stopped at a shelter for the night. Shelters were not a regular stop at all in our travels. We had few regular stops. We didn’t like shelters as they often separated the men from the women and it was part of our instruction to stay together which we tried to comply with but occasionally we made an exception. We didn’t think Bo and Peep would find fault with our choices but then we didn’t have a way to check with them except in our minds. As it turned out, posted right outside the shelter was a poster advertising a meeting in Panama City the very next day at a local library and it was the same information we were sharing. It blew our minds to see this. We showed up at the meeting and sat in the audience to kind of check them out – see what they were going to say and whether we recognized them. We didn’t recognize them and it was the same information alright. During question and answer period one person asked if they were the same group from Waldport, Oregon who left all behind to catch a ride on the UFO. They said they were not those folks but that it was the same group. Dandy and I could not restrain ourselves so we jumped up and said…we were some of those who were at that Waldport meeting and left all behind to follow Bo and Peep. We pleasantly shocked the speakers and the audience and they invited us to help complete the meeting which we did. One of those was named Steel and perhaps Jeremy. They had joined during a St. Louis meeting another group gave. They were not connected to any group either but knew more of their whereabouts. A huge meeting that got a lot of press was held in Biloxi, Mississippi.

Somewhat joyful to have made such connection we decided to work together, but they had a car and we did not and their car was a two seated sports car so we agreed to meet in Brownsville, Texas to see about holding a meeting there. They were also interested in warmth.

In a day we made it to Corpus Christi, Texas. Dandy was putting her sleeping bag down on the beach. We’d received help with food from a local church but no lodging. I laid my sleeping bag down perhaps 10 yards from hers and as it was way past sunset and was dark (as I can recall seeing the lights of Corpus Christi to the north) and I was looking up into the heavens as I frequently did and talked to “God” (without any real definition of what God was) when to my surprise I saw a huge ball of bright light, say the size and brightness of the headlight from an airliner facing me as if coming in for landing. It was traveling from the North at about a 45 degree angle from me and as close as the elevation of a small plane or like that airliner example, over the Gulf of Mexico and sped in the course of 2-3 seconds out of sight to the south at a speed of a meteor but showing no signs of a smoke trail or breakup (as I learned to observe of metoers thereafter). But that was not all. About half way in it’s path, putting it directly in front of where I was standing it took an abrupt 90 degree turn then headed down as if it was going to dive into the gulf and did so seemingly without a speed change, traveling for less than a second though a clearly distinguishable distance down. Then it did another 90 degree turn to keep it headed south as it first started out but as if it had changed latitude lines. And I watched it go out of sight in the far distance.

I shouted out immediately…”Did you see that…!!!” and Dandy looked up but it was gone. I immediately wondered if it was intelligently driven. I did feel like it was for me for some reason.

The next day we arrived in Brownsville, got help with food and found a meeting room for free, got some posters donated to advertise the meeting and rendezvoused with Steel and Jermy who helped us advertise the meeting to be held 3 or 4 days later. It was a small town. We didn’t think we needed a huge PR job. The four of us gave the meeting together and perhaps 20 people showed up and no one was interested to join us. We decided we would be holding them back too much to try to stick together further so we said our farewells and parted company.

That’s when I got it into my thick head that we were restricting our service to our Heavenly Father if we were too concerned about the winter, staying away from it. Dandy was not in objection so we decided to head north. About three days later we arrived in Madison, Wisconsin and yes it was cold. We found open churches to sleep in or shelters. But Madison did not seem to open up to our staying a while to try to do a meeting so we headed southeast into Kentucky, then all the way back west into Colorado. We were in the deep snows always being picked up and taken into people’s homes for some warm food and a dry place to sleep, or a minister of a church would put us up in a hotel. I recall sitting at the dinner table with a minister and his wife and their two kids who themselves asked us lots of questions to include…were we married. I explained that we were married to God. We’d get meal tickets for restaurants and at other times if no one was around to ask, we’d walk into a town find an open church door, go into the pantry and eat and even cook whatever was there and clean it up and leave a note of thanks. One time we were surprised by a deacon and his assistant and a large conversation ensued. Another time we were ordered to leave their premises. We spoke to many people in cars and to others in hotel lobbies – even gave impromptu meetings when the interest seemed apparent. It was exciting. It was challenging. If we had no place to stay and were too far from a town we’d just keep our thumb out as staying active kept us from freezing but we never felt our health threatened. We were well taken care of and met lots of great people. We had many run in’s with the law. They didn’t particularly like our modus operandi. One time in Tennessee they took us to the station. We each had largish backpacks and they dumped them out and found nothing as we did no drugs. I was a bit tiffed at them. So they took Dandy and locked her up and I complained and told them I was working for God and that they were messing with the wrong folks. They let her go but really frightened her as that was the first time Dandy and I were in physical contact when she ran into my arms for a hug while crying. We put our backpacks back together again and they took us to the border of the town and ordered us to stay out of their town. Some towns gave transients who were looking for help the big run around. It was not infrequently that many of the churches because of the volume of transients looking for help organized a fund to help folks but that they administered through the police department. That looks good logistically as then they could have the police check them out, not a very Jesus think to do, someone who forgave the thief and prostitute. Jesus wasn’t much of a mixer with the state. He said pay your taxes if you use Caesars money system. He also said agree with your adversary while you are in the way with them or else they will take you to the judge and from the judge to the prison where you will have to pay a great price. Many humans think they own all this land and have the right to run people off the roads and harass them if they are living outside their laws yet hurting no one, so if we need to live with this system as it would be hard or impossible to travel without being within the system, then we need to seek to “agree with this adversary to God’s law’s” so not to find ourselves punished for non-compliance with man’s laws however abhorred by God.

We continued to crisscross the mid west, town to town on the small roads. One particularly notable event occurred in Liberal, Kansas. When we got to town we found a church that without a question gave us a hotel for a week and a meal ticket for several meals a day for a week. We looked at one another and said, this is some reception. We have to organized a meeting here. We quickly found a library meeting room from free and got someone to donate 100 posters. Then we marched into the local newspaper office and asked to be interviewed. We told them about the Two Witnesses, Bo and Peep and all and the reporter in her 40’s or so took wild notes and was quite smitten with us to a point that I know we were about the weirdest things she’d seen cross her desk. But they agreed to run the story before the meeting. The article was printed front page with our pictures the day before the meeting but they got one thing wrong…They said we were claiming to be these Two Witnesses that were expecting to be killed and rise again after 3 1/2 days. When Dandy and I saw this we both kind of got scared. What if some crazed Christian thought this was their claim to fame to do in these antichrists. Then we could be putting out lives on the line by giving this meeting. We decided such would be a longshot and personally I was willing to give my life, even expected it to some degree. We agreed to announce at the meeting first thing that the paper got it wrong, that we weren’t the two, we were their disciples. Nearly 100 people showed up in this tiny town to hear our meeting and they were a good crowd though there were some Christian hecklers. So the meeting went well though no one wanted to join us and I was not disappointed by that. I was not looking for followers really, just wanted to do my job to see if there are any.

One night I recall being just west of Little Rock, Arkansas, in a camping area. It was already May. We’d been traveling like this for 4 months and overall since September when we joined. I was increasingly frustrated and felt all alone. Dandy had had some doubts she expressed and told her I’d help her with whatever she wanted to do. I assured her I could go it alone, that it wasn’t my preference but I could manage. She didn’t want to quit yet though. We had grown close and she did feel connected to Bo and Peep as I did so pressing on was our only option. I remember though looking into a clear nights sky and asking what more there was I could do and asked for help to know the way. The next day we hitched into Oklahoma City and sought the local library only to see one of those infamous UFO posters advertising a meeting a few days away at the library itself. We were elated and attended the meeting and it was being given by none other than Bo and Peep themselves with students at their sides. They looked at us and knew us though we’d hardly been seen by them before. We were reunited and it felt so, so good.

Apparently the groups were quite organized again and were still putting on meetings though attendance was low. After the meeting Bo and Peep spoke to us – congratulated our tenacity and assigned us groups to hook up with. We headed up to Indiana where our group was located. A new member from the Oklahoma City meeting provided us with a car she no longer needed so we drove ourselves.

One thing I noticed that was odd about the group leaders of the group where we were assigned is that the female of the partnership was pregnant – very, very pregnant. As it turned out she was impregnated days before she joined and didn’t know it. She had arranged to deliver the baby to a midwife and a family wanted to take the child as their own so this way she would never have so face the baby and the baby would have a loving family to care for it’s needs. While I was with this group she did leave to have the baby and she returned and all went well.

The meetings were winding down. Low attendance and enthusiasm made us feel they were played out and Peep felt that too. We started staying in our campgrounds more, working with new members, doing chores and such. We received a lot of communication from Bo and Peep that were given in such a way to encourage better grooming as well as behaviors. One time we were instructed to communicate to anyone if they have a particular problem with them. Maybe this was a big mistake but I told one female classmate whom I was clearly infatuated with that I was attracted to her. She was a bit taken back by that and I later learned that that was about the only thing we shouldn’t say as even that could be like bait to see if the other has interest and could start an attraction. I was told by Dandy that I was very gruff. That I stomped around the campground like I was angry. I was not. I was simply serious natured.

Then I recall in a camp ground by St. Girardeau with my group, we received some very serious communication from Bo and Peep to be in our silence and to focus on bringing in and being ready for the next step in our progress into membership in the Next Level. Several days later it was announced that Peep called off any additional meetings. The harvest was officially ended she said. We would all be gathering together from wherever we all were around the country.

It was July and it was 3 1/2 years to the day from when Bo and Peep left Houston, Texas on January 1st 1973 to set out as the Two Witnesses.

And things were really about to change now.

Chapter 6 – The Cocoon – an Out of this World Accelerated Experiential Overcoming Process Begins

Situated about halfway between Cheyenne and Laramie, Wyoming was the Veedavou National Forest, a huge stretch of uninhabited territory dotted by small pine trees, huge majestic rock formations dispersed within a rolling high desert. It had it’s own mystique while showing the harshness of the environment – high winds, well below zero winter temperatures, lots of snow and besides the winter, low in precipitation.

Each group while on the road had “group leaders” who maintained communications with the group traveling with Bo and Peep. Now that we were all in one area, these continued to be a point partnership for organizational purposes but they were called “Helpers”. They were not our leaders. They were simply helping Bo and Peep manage the newly formed organization.

These Helpers were available if group members needed help with something. They would come and go and didn’t inform us of what they were up to. It wasn’t our business. We had our daily chores around the camp. We didn’t mingle really, not within our group, nor with other groups. We mostly worked within our partnership unless we had a need or wanted to offer service to the Helpers. They in a sense were stand in’s for our Teachers being they were our most immediate “link” to Bo and Peep and they didn’t have as much time as we did to take care of their daily needs because they had tasks to do in relationship to their job as group “helpers” so we could offer to help them, be it to cook food of do their laundry or whatever we might think of. This entire endeavor was not a social experience. When not engaged in chores, but not excluded from chores, we spent our time “tuning into” our relationship to the Next Level, seeking to quite our thoughts and seeking to change the things about ourselves that we needed to learn in order to become acceptable to the Next Level. The problem at this point was not knowing what was not acceptable to the Next Level but over time that would be clarified therefore sometimes not having much to do, was a lesson step, to take it all in rather than constantly occupy ourselves with chores and thoughts.

My First major Lesson: Keep my focus on myself – As Jesus said – Remove the log in your own eye before seeking to remove the twig in another’s eye.

Three or four days into our stay in Veedavou Bo and Peep came to each camp and spent a few minutes with each partnership privately. We simply sat in a car with them, Dandy and I. They asked us if we had any questions. Dandy was a bit shy so looked to me. I looked at Peep and noticed she appeared to wearing eye liner which I thought odd. After all, I thought makeup was for women that wanted to enhance their appearance and certainly not for someone on such a spiritual type endeavor as we were at that point fully engaged. So I asked, why Peep was wearing eye makeup. Peep replied, “it’s none of your business”, to which I was taken back. It was a strong response said with all seriousness. She certainly wasn’t hesitant to offend me, not that she intended to offend me. She just answered my question honestly. I looked over at Bo and he was smiling. He then said, was there anything else we wanted to ask them. I didn’t have any further questions so we left the car and another partnership entered the car.

Years later I learned that Peep sought to look “normal” when interacting with humans which for a woman in her late 40’s at the time entailed what she wore and how she kept her hair and how her face looked. She also had large somewhat bulging eyes that she felt make her look odd to people that entered into their pre-judgment of her something she found ineffective in communication. Bo spoke to the classroom once about that incident many years after it occurred and explained Peep’s position in this regard. Appearances mean a great deal to human beings, pre-judging one another by our looks, often doing so automatically. I did not and still don’t realize the extent of this. Peep knew it well so sought to compromise – blending in while de-emphasizing her more distracting to others’ features.

I learned a good lesson right then and there. These were not Pollyanna teachers. They were not afraid of turning away students and were not feeling like they owed us explanations that were not pertinent to the task at hand. What did Peep’s appearance have to do with my “overcoming process” to be acceptable to Next Level membership – the whole reason I was committed to the effort they were the instigators of.

Dandy, left the car and was like “phew…that was intense” and it was clear I had been blatant and my normal bull in a china shop kind of person who had little restraint. Bo and Peep never spoke to me about that though there were many lessons to come that somewhat addressed this same unbridled enthusiasm that bordered arrogance.

The helpers would meet with their group once a day at most to relay Bo and Peep’s instructions which mostly surrounded our daily care of ourselves and our environment. We were not to put things off that needed doing, keeping ourselves and our environments neat and orderly. Lacking showers and having limited water we were instructed to start each day with a sponge bath, taking turns using the tent for privacy. We’d heat a small amount of water, use a washcloth to wet our bodies, use a little soap but not so much that it took a lot of water to rinse off. Water wasn’t plentiful. The entire group organized a “water run” daily where approx. 45 5 gallon water jugs were taken to an agreed upon water source out of the forest to fill up. We’d do our own laundry in a basin each tent was provided and we’d keep the groups camp neat and orderly while staying hidden among the trees so not to alert the Forest rangers to how long we were there. There was officially a two week limit, though we certainly stretched the rule. Fires were not allowed in that time of year and we did not come and go unless we had a reason which would be cleared through the Helpers of each group. For instance, if we were bored we didn’t just up and go to town to get a pizza. It was quite clear that there was a chain of command in this respect.

At this point there were no dietary standards. We were given funds and times to go to town to buy supplies. Two or three partnerships would carpool to town.

One day the Helpers returned from a morning meeting with Bo and Peep and we were told to all pile into cars and intermittently leave the forest, so not to arouse attention and head to Laramie some 40 miles to the west, specifically to a particular hall on the University of Wyoming’s campus.

Somehow, as strange as it seemed Bo and Peep had secured the use of a classroom so we could meet and see and hear Bo and Peep better. It was a small lecture hall and Bo and Peep presided over the meeting. There were 98 of us that had survived the 9 1/2 months of mayhem scattered around the country. Ron and Robert and Judy and Greg who I left Oregon with were no longer in the group. Tara was still in the group and we said hello but still kept our distance so not to awaken old memories to stir feelings, but that was the way it was, in general between members. We were not a social club. It was more or less strictly business between us, the business of overcoming our humanness, an endeavor I still knew little about but was going to learn a great deal more about soon enough.

Bo and Peep were very pleasant and even humorous. They congratulated us for having made it this far. They spoke of our circumstance, the practical aspects of being a sizable group living in the forest and wanting to stay as long as we could. They addressed much of what had been instigated by each groups Helpers re: hygiene and care and the order of our camp, our cars and such. And they answered questions. Apparently they had shared a great deal more information over the months Dandy and I were on our own hitchhiking all over. They spoke about discarnates what were referred to as “influences”. They said when a human died they become a discarnate yet they continue to enact the same behaviors, likes, dislikes they had established while in a body, though lacking a body, they had no other recourse than to enact it through those who still had a body. In some cases for the things they did alone, they continued to do them whether that was to mow the lawn of course in mind only or run in the park. For the things they did with others they sought out others to do them with whether to have sex or to engage in conversation or debate or to be on a baseball team. Those in bodies were not aware of these influences and might have the idea – I think I’ll call Joe to see if we can organize a ball game. That idea could have been their own or could have been a discarnate seeking that activity. In this way, discarnates provided humans with lots of ideas and even their power of execution. In other words their attention and proximity in and around our brain added to our own force of effort. With more of these influences we might feel more and more motivated to certain activity and even thinking. Say you were seeking political office and discarnates witnessed the attention you were getting – holding rallies and attending fund raisers, giving speeches, some discarnates who sought the limelight would gravitate to these and their presence in energy and ideas, answers to questions and so on in a real sense beef one up – fills them with a greater capacity, what we often think of as charisma.

They said that one large aspect of our job was to rid ourselves of these human level helpers. They were not bad to have while in pursuit of human level activity and goals – to have a career, a family, a beautiful home, lots of entertainment and such. But if one is attempting to depart the human kingdom, they need to give these influences their walking papers as their desires can only hinder someone’s completion of the metamorphic process that can result in becoming a butterfly, what they said was akin to Jesus Christing or christening – completion of the metamorphic process as demonstrated by Jesus at what was described to us in the gospels as his transfiguration.

They spoke of the Next Level more. One interesting idea they touched upon was that in the universe there are many forms of service to the Next Level. There are some creatures that serve by being living transport devices for other beings just like someone on the human level might serve their community by being a bus driver. They said there were living space crafts that were intelligent and enjoying of serving by transporting others to tasks they needed to perform. Their service was no less or greater than any other and they were not limited to that service for eternity. They would have continuous opportunity to aspire to whatever they wanted. Some they said aspired to work in Headquarters which is where they had come from. In Headquarters one department entails making membership an option for human equivalents on garden planets like earth as they come to their ripened time evidenced by human or human equivalents desiring more than what the Earth can offer, having that sense of there being more and not able to fit in or seeing through much of the contradiction and primitive behaviors of garden occupants. When some are beginning to reach this stage, the Next Level can read it and provides them help in the form of new information pertaining to the reality of the Next Level and how to move closer to it’s membership. This occurs in conjunction with the Next Level sending “gardeners” into the fields who bring more of their Next Level mind with them to deposit into the Earth atmosphere that provides all more opportunity to perceive more and more, lifting more and more out of any Dark Ages. Knowledge is increased by the presence of these members of the next level who enter as discarnates but are not limited as discarnates are. They seek the vehicle they prepped beforehand for their mission and start a relationship with it, to at an appointed time “take it over” and use it to locate those potential new members to bring them up another notch in their overall schooling that leads to their Earth graduation. They explained that they were here to take those who have exhibited the desire and wherewithal to complete their lessons to result in their membership in the Next Level which would be their next evolutionary step above human where they would no longer die or circulate among humans but would be beginning a new life everlasting in a non-decaying environment that was engaged in the service of all of creation to include the nurturing of yet new potential members of the Next Level.

We began to have meetings with Bo and Peep in that classroom every week or so where they would bring examples of how members had acted in certain circumstances and answer our questions. It was mainly so we wouldn’t rouse suspicion from the Forest rangers as who this large group was and whether it was time for them to move on.

REVERENCE:

In one lesson, they explained that we were far too casual about how we approached one another and that we needed a great deal more respect, restraint and realistic REVERENCE. For instance, say a partnership (we did everything as a two or threesome) had a need to talk to another partnership. How would they go about it. Would they just walk into another’s tent site area and knock on the tent to get their attention? No. If the other partnership was in their tent then we didn’t approach them unless we had specific instructions from Bo and Peep and/or through Helpers to do so. If it was clear that other partnership were out and about – active, then we would approach but stop when we reached eyeshot of those we were approaching. Those receiving us would acknowledge that it was a good time to communicate, with a glance, otherwise if they ignored us then we would not bother them and would try again later. This came up in regards to Bo and Peep where some Helpers wanted to ask them a question. Bo and Peep were outside their tent area cooking on their camp stove. The approaching partnership just walked up to them and thereby forced Bo and Peep to give them the attention they wanted. It was wrong in this circumstance to assume Bo and Peep could be interrupted as it appeared they were just fixing a meal. Little did they know, that Bo and Peep were regularly in a type of connection or seeking of connection – “tuning in” as we called it to their “helpers” outside their visible environment and that forcing them to turn their attention to us was forcing them to take their attention off their “older members”, not a casual think to do. Bo and Peep said this was a normal human thing to do, like knocking on someone’s door or ringing them on the phone, thinking little about interrupting their mental concentration which could have also been engaged on working out a problem. The Next Level way was to extend the ultimate respect for another. Lacking an emergency it was to show your presence and when you know they knew you were making your desire for attention known, if they acknowledged you, approach, otherwise come back another time and/or repeat the request. We were to practice this with each other not just between us and our teachers, representative of older and younger members of the Next Level. It wasn’t so much that they couldn’t’ be interrupted. It was more about not assuming what we have on our mind is more important than what they have on theirs and that no matter what someone appeared to be doing – menial tasks of cooking or cleaning it didn’t mean that a great deal of important things were not happening on their minds that we could not see.

Practicing this with one another seemed so special. It was truly reverent and it also put more responsibility on others to recognize another’s need to communicate so someone with a genuine need were not put in the position of having to be pushy to get another’s attention.

The “A” tone:

Bo and Peep gave us a tool, they said would aid us in “tuning” our minds. They brought in tuning forks for each group that we shared. It was in the key of A. I never knew whether that was because those were the most available tuning forks or whether they specifically sought that tone for this exercise but we were instructed to sort of memorize that note – sing it, hum it and check that we are learning it by using the tuning fork to check our tonal memory.

Partner Change:

At one point we were reassigned partners. I became partner with a female named Check. She was one of the 39 who laid down their lives in 1997. She was one that came from Canada, who met up with the group while we camped in Boulder. I had grown accustomed to Dandy and she to me. Our effectiveness in helping one another discover the areas we needed to gain control of had diminished. It never was that good to begin with. One time Dandy had told me I was like a bull in a china shop the way I tromped around the camp. I sought to be more refined in my movements after that. At another point before arriving at Veedavou Bo and Peep suggested if we have anything to say to any member of our group to clear the air or to seek help with, we should do so. I told June a young woman who joined pregnant and arranged to deliver the baby to a family in Arkansas who wanted the child. June was also one who laid down her life in 1997. I told her I found her attractive and therefore distracting or something like that. It took some guts to tell her that. I was embarrassed and I wasn’t coming on to her at all. I had no intention of going back to the behavior I’d left behind. I thought I was being honest. As it turned out this was one area Bo and Peep preferred we not indulge because of how it stimulates the vehicle and puts thoughts out there that can become bothersome to others. I don’t know if June ever dealt with knowing how I felt. I remained very attracted to her while in the group, though I kept it under control and tried not to focus or have thoughts in this regard. I slipped plenty in this discipline but overall I did not enter into any fantasies so I guess I did okay.

So now I was with a new partner, also a fairly by my estimation attractive young woman so there was chemistry automatically there which would provide for difficult communication – usually surfacing as being a little too nice or unhelpful. We were supposed to point out in one another anything we thought was unbecoming of a member of the Next Level. We were knew at this but still tried and Bo and Peep would learn about what we said to one another and correct us if we were barking up a wrong tree in criticizing another.

Exercise of Silence:

Simultaneous to this partner change was an extended exercise in not talking. We didn’t know how long it would last but there was to be no talking at all. We could write a note to one another if we absolutely had to. It wasn’t easy agreeing on what food to cook. That was the hardest thing I guess because along with not talking we were trying to not be aggressive with our way. We were seeking to do what the other thought best. So we used gestures and often just nodded yes even if we didn’t want to so we could proceed. It was like if you said no to someone, it was like demonstrating that you had a strong preference for things to be a certain way, and this we were trying to deprogram from ourselves. Flexibility was important in this regard so it was hard to say no yet if we really felt another decision was best we had to say no and then gesture something else. It was awkward. Bo and Peep eventually after a few days and reports galore on how things were going to include some meetings where we could voice problems said we could say Yes, No or I don’t know and could use key words. So if you wanted eggs for breakfast one could say to their partner whom we were supposed to do everything with, short of personal hygiene and bathroom chores, “Eggs?”

Securing our Environment – Camp Borders to keep out discarnates:

Next Bo and Peep instigated a mindset and practice that had to do with discarnates – human level spirits who were no longer incarnate – out of body – spirits. They said we needed to keep our minds clear and part of doing that was by keeping foreign thoughts that these discarnates were thought to be the originators of out of our camp. Since we had no walls, we designed imaginary walls assisted by sticks – branches that had fallen off trees that we laid all around the perimeter of each camp touching one another and whenever we felt the urge members of each group would walk that perimeter telling the discarnates to stay out – talking out loud or in our heads. They encouraged us to talk to the discarnates out loud at times because this fortified their reality to our own vehicle. Our bodies were thought to be our suits of clothes that has it’s own mind, own habits, own likes and dislikes. We were the commander, that is if we didn’t always do what the body wanted and when it wanted to do it. We were to take full control over our vehicles – that is in mind and body. Bo and Peep explained that we were not responsible for what thoughts we have but only for what we chose to entertain. If we had a thought of a sensual/sexual nature, we could allow it to linger and grow into another and another and even a daydream or vision but that would increasingly stimulate the vehicle in this way and would be harder to stop. We were given the expression “nip it in the bud” – sense that thought even before it registers in your head and cut it off, put up a blank card, turn your attention elsewhere – whatever it took to not go down that path that gets harder and harder to reverse once entered. This discipline also pertained to those who were highly critical of others, easily brought to anger, fantasizing, playing out scenarios of fun or popularity or fame or even a better world. Bo and Peep wanted us to be so in the moment that we consciously instructed our bodies every step, every movement. It was a practice of being in total control, not doing anything on automatic.

I would walk the perimeter and in this case could do so without my partner though before doing so would ask of motion to my partner if I could walk a bit. We asked about everything. “Is it a good time to use the rest room?” with one key word/phrase, “rest room?”. Most times a partner would say yes to this one but at times they might remember that there was water boiling that they were supposed to take care of, so would say…”water?” and I’d get the hint and take care of my job and then go to the rest room, which by the way was the woods. We dug holes for solid waste. It was a big national forest and these were not prepared campgrounds. It was as rough as could be. We used leaves for paper, though if we had paper we’d bury it too.

So I’d be walking along the stick perimeter which was also thought of as our space craft and I’d say. Discarnates – get out of here. This is our craft and we wish to be left alone. Go somewhere else please but if we heard a thought that persisted be it the past or someone in the past we had certain attachment to or desire for a chocolate cake or to take a drive or to be sexual or whatever we could if we wanted get stronger and even angry building force to let these discarnates know we meant business. But we didn’t have to get mad. These discarnates were thought of as often helpful to humans. They attach or tag along with humans when the humans do the things they liked to do when they were in a vehicle and often times they help humans do things. A discarnate that when in a vehicle liked to run or jog might hang out where people with bodies jog and will all but enter another’s vehicle to experience whatever they can, which we thought amounted to the energy from the effort, like a heat or pulse that they get increased vibe from, thus in a sense feed off of. If it was a discarnate that loved to be a manager of others, say at the corporation they ran, then they would continue to hang around the new corporate board room and assist whoever they want with their duties, reminding them of things that need to be done and giving ideas of new things to try. The human will think they originated the thought – “had an idea” while it often is a discarnate. This could become so dramatic that those humans with lots of popularity for whatever reason could have a literal entourage of discarnates traveling around with them boosting their ego, giving them confidence, helping with whatever it was that they became successful at. It was thought that this was why when some people would walk into a room, one felt an enormous presence. It may very well be that they do represent an enormous presence, their body and who knows how many discarnates building them up and taking the energy that comes from their doing what they like to do most that this human body was active in.

The Smooth Whirlwind:

The next exercise Bo and Peep instigated was called the Whirlwind or something like that. We changed partners every day and did so with other groups. There were about 7 or 8 groups of about 12 in a group at this point. We even built pathways with sticks connecting groups that were sometimes as much as 100 yards apart. So each morning after daily clean up chores – which entailed a sponge bath in our tent and shaving for the guys and brushing of teeth, we’d have our next partner assignment as provided by each groups helpers and off we go, switching and doing it all silently. We each had one bag to carry all our personal belongings, sleeping bag and such. One partner would stay put and receive the new partner to their tent while one would go to a new tent. It was very, very interesting and challenging because it showed how each person did things a little differently and interacted a little differently and how chemistry played such a strong role in communication and how much help we were willing to offer another.

A funny thing that was happening in many tents was the making of fudge. We got to learn who made the best fudge and this whirlwind continued so that we ended up being with most every person in the group and some twice. It was all most interesting when we’d go to town, at an agreed day and time for each group so not to make a big scene leaving or returning to the camp, to get supplies. We’d continue the no talking and would just nod approval or not at each food item. Most of us have strong preferences when it comes to food and this became a source of how flexible we were willing to be while not imposing our likes on another. There were no food guidelines from Bo and Peep at this point and most gravitated to the same things and our budget was not huge – provided to us by the group helpers who received it from Bo and Peep.

Bo and Peep were also camping but no one but the 7 or 8 helper partnerships knew their location. As I’ve said the Helpers would go meet with them every morning to get new instructions if there were any. At this time Helpers would pass along their observations of the group members. Talking was permitted if we needed to report something to the group Helpers and we could do so without our partner if necessary though that was discouraged, but if it was about our partner we needed to seek help at times without them. For instance a number of females said I looked angry at them at times and they didn’t know why. So Helpers would come to me and tell me of this observation. They didn’t take sides. They would preface that “if the shoe fits”, in other words, examine the observation. If you don’t think there is merit to it, then simply catalog the observation, but if you can see what the other is saying, seek to change that behavior. Of course Helpers also had their difficulties, though they weren’t in the whirlwind. Bo and Peep needed dependable help and these helpers were usually those whom they had worked the most with in that capacity for the 9 1/2 months we as a group were offering what we had to the public.

I was envious of the Helpers. They seemed to have greater stature, but I soon learned they didn’t. In fact in my group, as it turned out the Helpers had a sexual encounter. I didn’t learn who was involved until years later. However, there was a meeting called by Bo and Peep when one of the members confessed it to them and it was a major shakeup of the group. Bo and Peep were adamant that this was not a game. If anyone wanted to have sex then they should leave the group – it wasn’t for them and there was no time to waste. I also heard that someone smoked some pot in one group and Bo and Peep found out and had the same kind of meeting saying this was not appropriate behavior for someone seeking to engage their full energy, full strength, full mind, body and soul to taking control of their body and all it’s desires to “overcome” it’s animal nature to be the best applicant of Next Level membership they could be. It was the same for alcohol use if there was any or smoking tobacco or any entertainment based activity. We were only to do what we were instructed to do or we don’t want to be in the program, what we called, “The Process”. Food as entertainment would be dealt with later on as it was not as clearly entertainment.

At some point after these events a few decided to leave the group. neither of those who had some degree of sex left at that time. One did leave some years later the male member who instigated the sex. The member in the female vehicle exposed what she participated in many years later when Do encouraged the students to come clean with anything we knew we were attempting to not participate in. I was a little shocked by it as she was a “Helper” in my group at that time and I did look up to the “Helpers” as they had a closer and more regular interface with Ti and Do. I later learned that that did not really mean they were my elders or were further along or even closer or more loved by the Teachers. In fact as it turned out most that were in that “helper” role then and thereafter ended up leaving the classroom, perhaps because it did build their ego to have that “special” role so that translated to thinking of themselves as “special” to where when they weren’t in that role, as the roles did change, they felt let down and demoted and less important and special. Many were faced with this kind of struggle and many left rather than overcome it.

At one point, I ended up in a threesome partnership with two other male members. That was very interesting and challenging. We ended up discontinuing the strict no talking. We’d experienced it for nearly 3 months so Bo and Peep said we could give it a break but not to go back to chatting like chatterboxes. However I recall lying on my sleeping bag, next to my partners, two guys about my same age – 20’s and we were talking about stuff and discarnates. We tried not to talk of the past, but occasionally someone would refer to something in their past and the other partners were supposed to say something but then would feel like they didn’t want to make waves or find fault with the other so might be permissive of it and even might fall into doing the same thing. This may have been one of those times but somehow we started talking about discarnates and to all three of our surprise we at the same time felt this overwhelming presence and it felt very strong and very dark – evil – whatever you want to call it. We were scared seriously by it and said to one another, we’re never going to talk like this again. Apparently we were challenging the discarnates to show themselves while not being that convinced that they really existed and wammo, something changed and all three of us knew there was a reality to it.

Don’t Challenge discarnates:

This led to a lesson when it was reported by us to our helpers that reported it to Bo and Peep, that we should not challenge discarnates. We don’t need to try to make it harder than it is. We don’t want to intimidate them as they will take it as a challenge if they would have done so while in a vehicle and you will have a more difficult time keeping your thoughts under control and not off into some human activity, when you need all your energy to stay on the straight and narrow.

1976 – 1994

We lived outdoors in the “wilderness” for about 3 years. Then we moved into large houses in suburbs of cities like Dallas, San Antonio, Austin, Amarillo, Houston, Denver, Boulder, Albuquerque, NM, Scottsdale, AZ, San Diego, Las Vegas, NV, Anaheim, Laguna Hills, Newport Beach, San Clemente, etc.

Chapter 7 – My Choice to Leave the Classroom in September of 1994:

Here is another section that has to do with why I left the classroom:

https://sawyerhg.wordpress.com/2015/04/09/does-sawyer-regret-leaving-ti-and-dos-heavens-gate-classroom/

It was September of 1994 when I left the classroom. I had been dealing with giving into sensuality with myself for nearly a year, keeping it mostly hidden though did expose it early on. DO said he “thought I had the makings of a good member of the Next Level so didn’t want to throw me away.” I offered me an overseer task again as I was taken off of overseer duty when I confessed for the second time that I was still giving into sensuality. Do also said he didn’t feel to dismiss me from the classroom as was the policy via the documents Major Offense List and Lessor Offense List to do regarding knowingly giving into sensuality, because I had not threatened any other student’s compromise of their discipline.
He offered to partner me with Mllody to be Overseers on a task for him and I told him I couldn’t do it and he asked me what I wanted to do and I told him I guess I have to leave. He then said, “you want to become more objective”. He asked me where I wanted to go and I said I wanted to ride a bicycle we had in Laguna Hill, CA east. He said no and suggested going to stay with Mark and Sarah in Arizona. He had students buy me a airplane ticket there and gave me $600 in cash.
Mark picked me up at the airport and took me to their house. Sarah said to me, “none of that sex stuff”. I stayed with them for about two weeks. I was asked how I felt about Sarah (Srfody’s) classroom departure since Sarah had been my human partner in the world for about 5 years living together before joining:
I was surprised when I saw Srfody (Sarah) cuddling up to Mrcody (Mark) at a meeting. Before then I had been told by Srrody that she did that with him and I remembered she did that with me as well on two occasions, once in the Juice Lab and then on the airplane we took to have the 2nd visit to families of our vehicles. And she had gone into a closet with another student who later revealed they were feeling one another up in there. But at the time of that meeting none of that was in my head.
In other words, it seemed apparent that she wanted out but didn’t want to say so directly or leave in the middle of the night like a number did, so seemed to be looking for another way to leave. DO later said in a meeting in 1994 that there were some in the class that had formed a relationship while in the classroom. I could only recall Mark and Sarah doing that. I had long since detached from the relationship I had with her so it didn’t affect me personally.
The visit to families was short and cordial with her Dad and stepmom. I ran into him after I left the class in about 1985 and he said to me something I took as being condescending about my still having long hair (as I had regrown my hair and beard)
Sarah’s sister wasn’t there. I did speak to her on the phone after I left the class and she and her sister weren’t speaking. I expressed sorrow that our choices caused her pain but that was the extent of our conversation.
In Arizona I quickly got a job in the area at a resort hotel as a dinner cook. I got a bicycle and an apartment in Mesa and rode the bike to work and back everyday. Then I moved closer to work in Scottsdale.
I got in touch with my vehicles mother and family almost immediately. My vehicles brother visited me and I decided to move back to NY in about February of 1995 into my mothers house where I grew up. I had computer programming work remotely for some months with a company I worked for in the classroom in Scottsdale that I cultivated a return to after I’d left.
In NY I started to try to date via internet sites and it was a disaster. My mother started to make rules for me – like no dating a black girl which I broke in one of the dates. So I moved out and lived in my van and went up to the Highgate, Vermont Grateful Dead festival where I met a 22 yr old woman who I thought I fell in love with but was another disaster but taught me that I didn’t want to look for a woman. I moved to a friends house near Woodstock, NY and while there met the woman that became my partner of 17 years who we had and raised – a daughter and lived with her half sister – my partners first child who was just turning 4 yrs old when I met her.
I had started a Network Marketing business based on a blue green algae based product line and my new partner who I’ll call “Meg” tried the products and got fast positive results so decided to invest in it. We lived together a few months after meeting. She basically seduced me and was closer to my vehicles age so no drama was involved and I liked her so I went with it and grew to love her, though we always had problems to where I wasn’t living up to her standards (mostly surrounding my work for income). When I met her I was working two jobs in Saugerties, NY – one as a baker and one as dinner cook. We got an apartment and lived there with Gail her first daughter who was just turning 4 yrs old.
We moved down to Carmel, NY and Meg gave birth to our daughter in our home with a midwife as Meg’s first birth was stimulated with ptosin and was horrible for her. We tried hypnobirthing but didn’t continue with it. The birth went well enough but was hard on the nerves since her water broke 22 hours before she gave birth so there was a fear of infection as we were a hour away from a hospital.
Meanwhile I was terrible at network marketing. I would get stoned with weed to be willing to go to grocery stores, etc. to try to meet new clients to buy our products and/or become business builders. I would tell people on the cold calls I made how to get the algae less expensively. Meg, partly against my wishes spent thousands of her savings and 401K on advertising and business building seminars, etc, while paying the bills. She still uses the product line but we went broke because of it. While we were trying to sell it the local news came out with a story that Celltech (our company) was a pyramid scheme to sell “pond scum.” That didn’t help sales.
We moved to Long Island near to where my mother and other family lived thinking there would be more money there to afford our products. The products seemed good and we didn’t need to stockpile them – didn’t have to buy anything but it was encouraged to act like business builders to find more business builders to make the big bucks. Against Meg’s wishes I told her I was going to look for a job as a programmer.
I got a good job – paid 50K/yr. computer programming in Visual Basic in Syosset, NY and I commuted to Stony Brook, NY where we rented a house near the LI Sound shore. We were there for 5 yrs. Meg convinced me to ask for two raises over the years and I did and got 10K more twice, plus medical benefits.
Chapter 8 – The Classroom’s Exit of their human vehicles they borrowed for their task in March of 1997
I was still living in Carmel, NY when DO and His Class exited the human vehicles they borrowed to perform their overcoming of humanness task through as Jesus taught would be needed to reap his promised reward.
I reluctantly contacted the press and arranged for some secret interviews. I felt compelled to tell what I knew though didn’t want reporters on my doorstep.
I went to NY because Jstody knew someone from 60 minutes and he invited me. Over two or three days in NY I was shuttled around from one media group to another. I returned a few days later and went on Larry King Live. A few months after that I was on Geraldo’s show about UFO’s. I did Good Morning America and was pictured on the front page of the NY Post but with the unpopular title of “death cult x-member” or something like that.
The BBC came to my house. I was broke so I asked for money and got about $300 from the BBC and from Geraldo but no one else. (I’ve never received money from any media group since then, though they pay my expenses.)
Behind the Geraldo stage I met with a publicist who was known by Ted Lohman, someone who had a UFO show on a cable channel in the Tucson, AZ area where I met him with Chkody as my partner when we were setting up a meeting there. The publicist wanted to work on a book deal and I worked with him and formulated the idea of a book title being, “Within and Without” where I was writing my perspective from within the group and Nancy Brown, the mother of David’s vehicle was writing from not having him any longer and from outside the group. We submitted sample chapters and one major publisher said we had a deal and assigned a top notch editor who told me I didn’t need a proof reader – that my writing was good enough that a good editor could fix up.
Right after the death of Princess Diana hit the air waves it gave a reason to stop talking about Heaven’s Gate and the NY Post came out with the book, “Heaven’s Gate Cult Suicide in San Diego” and our publishing dream was cancelled with their saying, “The public is no longer interested” which though saturating the new cycle wasn’t really true. The public was tired of their reporting of it.
Chapter 9 – 9/11 and a return to writing about and wanting to serve Ti and Do again
I was in my office when the World Trade Center towers were hit 30 miles or so from me. I saw it as an apocalyptic event. My company did a public offering and sank and they hired my replacement who they could pay less. My boss, the owner told me that’s why he let me go, though there were probably additional reasons as I was starting to do a poor job, though they kept me on as a contractor from home as I knew their mac software product that was coded in C++. I worked from home for a while. At nights I’d go out to play music and got pretty good so got some gigs with bands.
We weren’t happy though so kept looking for something to buy that we could afford but could find nothing so Meg wanted to look in New England. At first I didn’t want to move off long island since I’d be moving away from my family for the third or fourth time in my life. But we sort of had no choice as after 9/11 there were no jobs being offered for programmers with my skills if at all for quite a while thereafter. And my partner who was a Manhattan corporate executive, CFO and CPA was raising capital for a startup internet girls clothing line that investors ran away from after 9/11.
Meg lined up a bunch of properties to look at in Maine, New Hampshire and Vermont. We found two that could work. We had fallen back on Meg’s hobby of making glass beads and jewelry and I got laid off so collected unemployment. We chose to move to Vermont.
We were having problems all along and after 9/11 I began to have dreams of TI and of DO and of Classmates with messages. Plus I had premonitions and asked for a sign and saw a streak in the sky when I asked for it. So I said to DO that I’d like to be of service again and I asked that I wouldn’t have to leave my daughter/family and felt like I got an immediate response that that was not necessary at this time.
I began to write a book I was going to call, “The Message” and Ti came to me in a dream and approved of my writing.
I tried finding a publisher but in my sample manuscripts several said there was no interest in that story any more. For some reason I steered away from putting a focus on Jesus and Prophecy.
The Father in law of this vehicle had money and was a devout Catholic so I asked him if he’d help me publish my book as I had nothing. He agreed and that was about 2003 or so, so I began to write with a Jesus prophecy perspective. Simultaneously I began to explore Heaven’s Gate on the internet and met Carlan (Crlody) in the process. He remembered me and I vague remembered him as he only joined months before I left.
I wasn’t with the entire classroom when we finished the meetings all over the U.S. over 9 months in 1994. I had got an old job back at the same company in California where Srrody, Nrrody, Mllody and Stlody had been working while we were in groups putting on meetings.
I had a hard time watching DO in exit video’s. I never disbelieved in he and TI but it was hard to take his message at that time but over time I grew back into enjoying all his meetings.
I continued having dreams sometimes in response to a specific question I posed to them while awake. I asked DO if I needed to prepare to exit as they did and he came to me in a dream and said, “You need to give your life”. A friend reminded me that you have to have your life to give it which I admit wanting to hear, but I did have the guts to ask but as with Ti and Do he gave me the option of how to give my life.